HomeMy WebLinkAboutVolume 2 Project Manual.pdf
PROJECT MANUAL Addition to Westside Transportation Center Carmel Clay Schools Carmel, Indiana ARCHITECT PROJECT NO. 211118.00 TSC PROJECT NO. 212012 Book 2 of 2 Divisions 2-32 February
28, 2012
211118.00 024119-1 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION SECTION 024119 -SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Demolition and
removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Cutting
and Patching" for cutting and patching procedures. 2. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above-and belowgrade improvements. 3. Division 31 Section “Earth
Moving” for backfilling. 1.2 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. B. Historic items, relics, and similar objects including,
but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be encountered during selective
demolition remain Owner's property. Carefully remove and salvage each item or object in a manner manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to Owner. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refrigerant
Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air
Pollutants (NESHAP) and EPA notification regulations before beginning demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Mercury a. Elemental
mercury may be found in schools as follows: 1) Fluorescent and HID lamps contain mercury; EPA regulations require proper recycling and disposal of these lamps. 2) HVAC and other mechanical
components may utilize mercury switches and thermostats; EPA regulations require proper recycling and disposal of such devices. 3) Elemental mercury is often found in school laboratories,
occasionally in large quantities. Chemistry and physics labs may study its unusual properties, and labs may utilize mercury-containing devices such as thermometers and pressure gauges.
EPA regulations require proper recycling and disposal of mercury from laboratories. a) Improper handling of elemental mercury from the above sources could result in mercury spills. 4)
Elemental mercury may contaminate building drainage systems, especially those drains serving laboratories. Often, plumbing traps and acid/neutralization tanks collect mercury that has
been flushed down drains. b. Suspected mercury spills and mercury removal projects need to be evaluated by experienced consultants or health professionals. Remediation of mercury hazards
should be performed by experienced and trained environmental contactors in accordance with EPA and OSHA regulations. 2. Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCB's) a. Many schools in the United
States have light ballasts containing PCBs. PCBs are contained within the ballast capacitors and potting materials.
211118.00 024119-2 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION b. PCBs may have been used as an insulator and fire retardant in electrical transformers. c. PCBs are regulated by the EPA under their
Toxic Substances Control Act (TSCA). Materials containing PCBs must be disposed of properly. C. Standards: Comply with American Society of Safety Engineers (ASSE/SAFE) A10.6 and NFPA
241. D. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations
of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress
and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. 5. Review areas where existing construction
is to remain and requires protection. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition
so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. 1. Owner will remove items
indicated before selective demolition. C. Notify A/E of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Hazardous Materials: It
is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify
A/E and Owner. Owner will remove hazardous materials under a separate contract, unless otherwise noted. E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. F.
Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities
in service service during selective demolition operations. a. Exception: Provide alternative means of fire protection during demolition of existing limited-areas fire-suppression systems.
1.5 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to
void existing warranties. B. Notify warrantor on completion of selective demolition, and obtain documentation verifying that existing system has been inspected and warranty remains in
effect. Submit documentation at Project closeout.
211118.00 024119-3 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION PART 2 -PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. B. Survey
existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled
and items to be removed and salvaged. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate
and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to A/E. E. Perform an engineering survey condition of building to determine whether removing any element
might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations. 1. Perform surveys as the Work
progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. F. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings, preconstruction
photographs, or preconstruction videotapes, and templates. 1. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs or video of conditions that
might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition and salvage operations. 2. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be reproduced or duplicated
in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. B. Existing Services/Systems to Be
Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that
bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing,
and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same
or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect
and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect,
and make equipment operational. e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion
of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
211118.00 024119-4 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. C. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from
mechanical equipment to be selectively demolished according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct
selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. B. Temporary
Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to
ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective
demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors,
and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not
been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." C. Temporary
Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to
remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective
demolition. D. Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases, explosives, acids, flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with selective
demolition operations. 1. Refrigerant: Remove and store refrigerant according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General:
Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as
follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting
members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or
adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover
openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches. 5. Remove decayed,
vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 6. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid
free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 7. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting
walls, floors, or framing. 8. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
211118.00 024119-5 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION B. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store
items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. C. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition
adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to match new equipment. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. a. This work includes removal
and reinstallation of bus wash system and components. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements
for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect
construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by A/E, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during
selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS
A. Concrete adjacent to Construction Indicated to Remain: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals, using power-driven
saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts. B. Other Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch at junctures with construction to remain, using
power-driven saw. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete indicated for selective demolition.
Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated. C. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry
between saw cuts. 1. Remove full size CMU without cutting, if possible, at areas to be patched. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction,
cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before patching. Install units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
2. Refer to Division 04 Section “Maintenance of Unit Masonry” for salvaging masonry materials. D. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and
remove, unless otherwise noted. E. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI-WP and its Addendum. 1. Remove residual adhesive
and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the methods recommended by RFCI. a. If floor tile mastic is removed utilizing chemical agents, at a minimum, floors shall be cleaned
with a TSP-based detergent followed by a clean water rinse. F. Air-Conditioning Equipment: Remove equipment without releasing refrigerants. G. Fluorescent light fixture components shall
be removed and recycled/incinerated as follows: 1. Remove and store non-leaking non-electronic ballasts in sealed or labeled metal drums. 2. Remove and store leaking non-electronic ballasts
in separate sealed and labeled metal drums.
211118.00 024119-6 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 3. Remove and store fluorescent lamps in cardboard lamp boxes labeled “Mercury Lamps for Recycling.” Lamps shall remain intact. 4. Lamps
and ballasts shall be transported to an EPA approved recycler. Non-electronic ballasts shall be incinerated. All other components may be recycled. H. Thermostats with Mercury Switches:
Remove mercury switch thermostats intact, if applicable. Containerize and transport thermostats to a wholesaler participating in a thermostat recycling program within 10 days. I. Explosives:
Use of explosives or cutting torches is not permitted. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled,
or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. Do not allow demolished materials
to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal:
Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.7 CLEANING/PATCHING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused
by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. B. Repair demolition performed in excess of that required.
Return structures, substrates, and surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to commencement of selective demolition work. Repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged
by selective demolition work. 1. Refer to Division 01 Section “Cutting and Patching”. END OF SECTION 024119
211118.00 030600.01 -1 CONCRETE SCHEDULE SECTION 030600.01 -CONCRETE SCHEDULE SUBMIT THIS SCHEDULE TO CONCRETE SUPPLIER PRIOR TO BIDDING ITEM OR STRUCTURE FINISH** COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH
AND OTHER REQUIREMENTS Elevated (suspended) structural concrete slabs and concrete not otherwise indicated RfFm-Fn SmFm-Fn, if exposed 4000 P.S.I. at 28 days Max W/C Ratio = 0.45 Use
mid-range water reducer Trench footings, footings, and interior foundation and retaining walls RfFm-Fn SmFm-Fn, if exposed 4000 P.S.I. at 28 days Max W/C Ratio = 0.50 Foundation and
retaining walls exposed to exterior RfFm-Fn SmFm-Fn, if exposed, UON Ab-Fn, where noted 4000 P.S.I. at 28 days air entrainment* Max W/C Ratio = 0.45 Use mid-range water reducer Interior
formed concrete exposed to view SmFm-Fn, UON Ab-Fn, where noted 4000 P.S.I. at 28 days Max W/C Ratio = 0.55 Noncritical floors and floor slabs to receive mud-set mosaic and quarry tile
Flt-Fn 3500 P.S.I. at 28 days Max W/C Ratio = 0.45 Use mid-range water reducer Exposed interior floor floor slabs and carpeted floors, unless otherwise noted Tr-Fn1 3500 P.S.I. at 28
days Max W/C Ratio – 0.45 Use mid-range water reducer Interior floor slabs scheduled to receive thin-set flooring, resilient flooring and other flooring types, unless otherwise noted
Tr-Fn2 3500 P.S.I. at 28 days Max W/C Ratio = 0.45 Use mid-range water reducer Interior floor slabs scheduled to receive a polished surface, and where indicated Tr-Fn3 3500 P.S.I. at
28 days Max W/C Ratio = 0.45 Use mid-range water reducer Interior floor slabs scheduled to receive wood flooring, and where indicated Tr-Fn4 3500 P.S.I. at 28 days Max W/C Ratio = 0.45
Use mid-range water reducer Exterior walks, stoops, steps, aprons, and curbs; exterior formed concrete exposed to view; exterior concrete not otherwise indicated NsBrm-Fn (Horizontal)
Grt-Cl-Fn (Vertical) 4500 P.S.I. at 28 days air entrainment* Max W/C Ratio = 0.45 Use mid-range water reducer Exterior paving NsBrm-Fn 4000 P.S.I. at 28 days air entrainment* Max W/C
Ratio = 0.40 Metal stair pan fill, topping over precast deck N/A 2500 P.S.I. at 28 days #8 aggregate (maximum) Flowable Fill – Type 1 Utility Trench Backfill N/A 50-100 P.S.I. at 28
days Unconfined compression strength per ASTM D4832
211118.00 030600.01 -2 CONCRETE SCHEDULE Flowable Fill – Type 2 Under Foundations N/A 100 P.S.I. at 28 days Unconfined compression strength per ASTM D4832 Lean concrete fill under footings
and encasement of underground utilities or connections N/A 1500 P.S.I. at 28 days Max W/C Ratio = 0.55 for non-air entrained mix *Refer to Section 033000 – Cast-In-Place Concrete for
percent of air entrainment required for concrete mix. **Refer to Section 033000 – Cast-In-Place Concrete for definitions of finishes. END OF SECTION 030600.01
211118.00 030600.03 -1 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN SUBMITTAL SECTION 030600.03 -CONCRETE MIX DESIGN SUBMITTAL CONCRETE MIX DESIGN SUBMITTAL FORM Project:________________________________________________
City:________________________________________________ General Contractor:________________________________________________ Concrete Contractor:________________________________________________
Concrete Strength (Class):________________________________________________ Use (describe):________________________________________________ Design Mix Information Please Check One Based
on Standard Deviation Analysis Trial Mix Test Data Design Characteristics: Density Strength Air pcf psi (28 day) % specified If trial mixes are used the Mix Design is proportioned to
achieve f’cr = f’c + 1200 psi (1400 psi for strength higher than 5000 psi at 28 days) MATERIALS Type/Source Specific Gravity Weight/lb. Absolute Vol. cu. ft. Cement Flyash Microsilica
Coarse Aggregate Fine Aggregate Water Other TOTAL 27.0 cu. ft. * Water/Cement Ratio (lbs. water/lbs. cement) = _______________%
211118.00 030600.03 -2 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN SUBMITTAL ADMIXTURES Manufacturer Dosage oz/cwt Water Reducer Air Entraining Agent Mid Range Water Reducer Fibrous Reinforcement Other Slump
before HRWR_______________________ inches Slump after HRWR_________________________ inches Standard Deviation Analysis (from experience records): f’cr-f’c + 1.34s or f’cr = f’c + 2.33s
– 500 (Refer to ACI 301 for increased deviation factor when less than 30 tests are available) LABORATORY TEST DATA Compressive Strength Age (days) Mix #1 Mix #2 Mix #3 7 psi psi psi
7 psi psi psi 28 psi psi psi 28 psi psi psi 28 average psi psi psi REQUIRED ATTACHMENTS: Please Check Coarse Aggregate Gradation Report Fine Aggregate Gradation Report Concrete Compressive
Strength Data or Trial Mixture Test Data Admixture Compatability certification letter Rapid Permeability that results per AASHTO T277 # of Test Cylinders Evaluated: Standard Deviation:
211118.00 030600.03 -3 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN SUBMITTAL Submitted by: Name:__________________________________________________ Address:__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________ Phone #:__________________________________________________ Main Plant Location:__________________________________________________ Miles
from Project:_________________________________________________ Secondary Plant Location:__________________________________________________ Miles from Project:_________________________________________
________ _________________________________________________ Date:__________________________________________________ END OF SECTION 030600.03
211118.00 033000-1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 033000-CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement,
concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following: 1. Exterior Concrete a. Steps and stoops. 2. Interior Concrete a. Slab-on-grade b. Bases, curbs,
risers, and steps c. Foundations, footings, pads, piers, columns, beams d. Pits for trench drains and utilities. e. Pits for specialty equipment. 3. Provide other cast-in-place concrete
and related work as indicated for complete and finished work, except concrete work specifically designated to be provided under Work of other Sections of these Specifications. B. Related
Sections include the following: 1. Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants” for sealing joints and penetrations in the slab-ongrade or slabs below grade. 2. Division 09 Finish sections for
coordination with substrate requirements of finish materials. 3. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for underslab subgrade. 4. Division 32 Section “Concrete Paving” for concrete pavement
and walks. 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate with the other trades to maintain protection of concrete surfaces scheduled to receive polished concrete finish. Protect concrete
surfaces from physical damage and staining that could result from subsequent construction operations and might compromise final polished concrete finish. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Steel Reinforcement
Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement,
splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. B. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified
professional engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork. 1. Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping formwork, shoring removal,
and installing and removing reshoring. C. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including form coatings, fibrous reinforcement, fly
ash, admixtures, curing materials, sealers, floor treatment, and vapor barrier. a. Include installation instructions where applicable.
211118.00 033000-2 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather,
test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. Prepare and submit design mixes for each type of concrete and flowable fill. Use an independent testing facility acceptable
to the A/E for testing the compressive strength of the proposed mix designs. Submit compression test results for each design mix. Test report shall clearly indicate design mix for which
it applies. Each design mix shall indicate the types of structures in which it is to be used. a. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. b.
Sample design mix submittal form is enclosed herein. 3. Welding certificates. 4. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements to determine compliance with specified tolerances.
5. Field quality-control test and inspection reports. 6. Proposed curing schedule shall include method method and duration. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm
experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. 1. Manufacturer certified according
to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." B. Environmental Requirements: Manufacturer and Contractor shall conform to Federal, State, and Local V.O.C.
(Volatile Organic Compound) Regulations in area where Project is located. Notify A/E in writing if variations to Specifications herein are required. 1. V.O.C. content shall be a maximum
350 gm/liter, unless more stringent codes or laws apply. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant,
obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D1.4M,
“Structural Welding Code – Reinforcing Steel”. E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of the latest edition or edition approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. ACI
Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: a. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5. b. ACI 117,
"Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." c. ACI 347 “Recommended Practice of Concrete Formwork.” d. ACI 318, “Building Code Requirements for Reinforced
Concrete.” e. ACI 211.1 "Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete." f. ACI 212 “Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.” g. ACI 302.1 "Guide for
Concrete Floor and Slab Construction." h. ACI 304 "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete." i. ACI 305 “Hot Weather Concreting.” j. ACI 306 “Cold Weather Concreting.”
k. ACI 308 “Standard Practice for Curing Concrete.” l. ACI 311.4"Guide for Concrete Inspection." m. ACI ACI 544.3 “Guide
for Specifying, proportioning, and Production of Fiber-Reinforced Concrete” 2. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, “Manual of Standard Practice”. 3. ASTM Intl.: a. ASTM A 820 “Standard
Specification for Steel Fibers for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete."
211118.00 033000-3 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE b. ASTM C33 “Standard Specification Curing Concrete.” c. ASTM C94 “Standard Specification for Ready-Mix Concrete.” d. ASTM C260 “Standard Specification
for Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.” e. ASTM C494 “Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.” f. ASTM C309 “Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane – Forming
Compounds for Curing Concrete.” g. ASTM C779 “Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces.” h. ASTM C1018 “Test Method for Flexural Toughness and First-Crack
Strength of Fiber-Reinforced Concrete.” i. ASTM C1116 “Standard Specification for Fiber Reinforced Concrete and Shotcrete.” j. ASTM C1315 “Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming
Compounds Having Special Properties for Curing and Sealing Concrete.” k. ASTM E1155 “Determining Floor Flatness and Levelness Using F-Number System.” l. ASTM F609 “Standard Test Method
for Using a Horizontal Pull Slip Meter (HPS).” F. Concrete ramps and curbs curbs shall be provided to conform to the Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG)
and State and Local Regulations. These requirements supersede Technical Specifications in this Section. 1. Detectable warnings shall conform to ADAAG. G. Preinstallation Conference:
Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives
of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following: a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete
design mixtures. c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. d. Concrete subcontractor. e. Special concrete finish subcontractor. 2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency
procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold and hot weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and
joint filler strips, semi-rigid joint fillers, forms and form removal limitations, vapor barrier installation, anchor rods and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement
installation, floor and slab flatness and levelness measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Floor and Slab Treatments: Follow
manufacturer’s recommendations for environmental requirements when using floor and slab treatments. 1. Do not apply concrete densifier and chemical hardener when concrete temperature
is below 35 degrees F or above 135 degrees F. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth-Formed Finished (Exposed) Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous,
true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Plywood, metal, fiberglass, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior-grade
plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as as follows: a. High-density overlay, Class 1 or better.
211118.00 033000-4 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge sealed. c. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge
sealed. d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber
dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that
will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads
without detrimental deformation. D. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other
superimposed loads. E. Chamfer Strips: Metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum. 1. Products: a. Greenstreak 622; Greenstreak b. Vinylex CSN-3/4; Vinylex Corp. c. CHM-75-75-110
Poly-Comp Plastic Chamfer; Sylvan Products d. CS-750 Chamfer Former; BoMetals Inc. F. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or
adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
2. Water-Based: Biodegradable; maximum VOC content allowed: 55 grams/liter. 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. MBT Rheofinish 211;
BASF Construction Chemicals b. Enviroform and Aquastrip; Conspec c. Crete-Lease 20-VOC; Cresset Chemical Co. d. Asphalt Release; Franmar Chemical, Inc. e. Bio-Form; Leahy-Wolf Co. f.
Soy Form Release and Natural Form Oil: Natural Soy, LLC g. SOYsolv; SOYsolv h. Formshield WB; Tamms Industries i. SealTight Duogard II; W.R. Meadows, Inc. G. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated,
removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.
1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to plane of exposed concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch
in diameter in concrete surface. 3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing
Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed for bars No. 3 to 11, unless otherwise noted. 1. Recycled Content: 100 percent. B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars (Weldable): ASTM A 706, deformed.
C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets. Note: Roll stock is not acceptable.
211118.00 033000-5 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut bars true to length with ends square and free
of burrs. B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar
supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: 1. For concrete
surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports. 2. Over waterproof
membranes and vapor barriers, use precast concrete chairs to prevent penetration of the membrane. 3. For footings, trench footings, slabs on grade, and grade beams use precast concrete
bricks (f'c = 3000 psi min. at 28 days). (Concrete masonry bricks are not acceptable.) 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the
same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or III, gray. Supplement with the following: a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. b. Ground
Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, uniformly graded not to exceed 1-1/2 inch nominal
size per ACI 301. Provide aggregates from a single source to ensure uniformity in color, size, and shape. Aggregates shall not be potentially reactive as defined in Appendix X1 of ASTM
C33. 1. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C33, but which have shown by special test or actual service to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability, may be used when
acceptable to the A/E. 2. Fine Aggregate: Clean, sharp, natural sand free from loam, clay lumps, or other deleterious substances. 3. Coarse Aggregate: Clean, uncoated, processed aggregate
containing no clay, mud, loam, or foreign matter, as follows: a. Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone. b. Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. Use of pit or bank-run
gravel is not permitted. c. Maximum Aggregate Size: Not larger than one-fifth of narrowest dimension between sides of forms, one-third of depth of slabs, nor three-fourths of minimum
clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or bundles of bars. d. Exterior concrete shall have crushed limestone aggregate, complying with ASTM C33, Class 4S or better. C. Combined
aggregate gradation for slabs and other designated concrete shall be 8%-18% for large, top size aggregates (1-1/2 inch) or 8%-22% for smaller, top size aggregates (1 inch or 3/4 inch)
retained on each sieve size below the top size and above the No. 100. D. Water: ASTM C 94 and potable, clean and free from oil, acid, alkali, organic or other deleterious substances
and complying with ASTM C94. 2.5 ADMIXTURES A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260 as indicated on “Concrete Schedule”. B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer
to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use admixtures containing intentionally-added
chlorides.
211118.00 033000-6 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type B. 3. Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type C 4.
Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. 5. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E. 6. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type
F. 7. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type G. 8. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017, Type II. C. Non-Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting
Admixture: Commercially formulated, non-setaccelerating, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions
with steel reinforcement in concrete. 1. Products: a. Axim Concrete Technologies; Catexol 1000CI. b. Cortec Corporation; MCI 2005NS. c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.;
DCI-S. d. BASF Construction Chemicals.; Rheocrete 222+. e. Sika Corporation; FerroGard-901. D. Shrinkage Reducing Admixture 1. Eclispe; W.R. Grace & Co. 2. Tetraguard AS20; BASF Construction
Chemicals 3. Mix Water Conditioner; Apply Concrete Technology 4. Catexol 2000 SCA; Axim Concrete Technologies, Inc. 5. PMA-SRA; ProMix Admixtures 2.6 WATERSTOPS A. Flexible Rubber Waterstops:
CE CRD-C 513 for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes. 1. Manufacturers: a. Greenstreak.
b. Progress Unlimited, Inc. c. Williams Products, Inc. 2. Profile: As indicated. 3. Dimensions: Web thickness shall be not less than 3/16 inch for units up to 5 inches wide and not less
than 3/8 inch for widths 5 inches and over. B. Flexible PVC Waterstops: CE CRD-C 572 for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners,
intersections, and directional changes. 1. Manufacturers: a. BoMetals, Inc. b. Greenstreak. c. Meadows, W. R., Inc. d. Murphy, Paul Plastics Co. e. Progress Unlimited, Inc. f. Tamms
Industries, Inc. g. Vinylex Corp. 2. Profile: As indicated. 3. Dimensions: Web thickness shall be not less than 3/16 inch for units up to 5 inches wide and not less than 3/8 inch for
widths 5 inches and over. C. Self-Expanding Butyl Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip, butyl rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for
adhesive bonding to concrete, 3/4 inch by 1 inch. 1. Products: a. CETCO; Volclay Waterstop-RX. b. Concrete Sealants Inc.; Conseal CS-231. c. Greenstreak; Swellstop.
211118.00 033000-7 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE d. Henry Company, Sealants Division; Hydro-Flex. e. JP Specialties, Inc.; Earthshield Type 20. f. Progress Unlimited, Inc.; Superstop. g. Carlisle
Coatings and Waterproofing, Inc.; Mirastop. 2.7 VAPOR BARRIER AND ACCESSORIES A. Vapor Barrier: 1. Plastic Vapor Barrier a. Water Vapor Barrier: ASTM E-1745; meets or exceeds Class A.
b. Permeance Rating: ASTM E-96 or ASTM F 1249; 0.01 Perms or less. c. Thickness of Barrier: ACI 302.1R-96; not less than 15 mils. 2. Products: a. Stego Wrap (15 mil) Vapor Barrier; Stego
Industries b. Vapor Block 15; Raven Industries c. Perminator (15 mil); W.R. Meadows d. Viper Vaporcheck II; Insulation Solutions Inc. e. Barrier-Bac VB-350; Interplast B. Vapor Barrier
Accessories 1. Seam Tape: High Density Polyethylene Tape with pressure sensitive adhesive. Minimum width 4 inches. 2. Construct pipe boots from vapor barrier material and pressure sensitive
tape per manufacturer’s instruction. C. Drainage Fill (Coarse): 1. Washed, narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading
size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1 inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. 2. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel,
and manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a 3/8 inch sieve, 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 sieve, and at least 5 percent passing No. 200 sieve;
complying with deleterious substance limits of ASTM C33 for the aggregates. 2.8 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS A. VOC Content: Liquid floor treatments shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment (LCFH): Clear, chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate
or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; colorless; that penetrates, hardens, and densifies concrete surfaces. 1. Products: a. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Titan Hard.
Hard. b. ChemMasters; Chemisil Plus. c. ChemTec International; ChemTec One. d. Conspec, a Dayton Superior Company; Intraseal. e. Curecrete Distribution Inc.; Ashford Formula. f. Dayton
Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Sure Hard. g. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Euco Diamond Hard. h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; SureHard. i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Seal Hard. j.
Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Liqui-Hard. k. Metalcrete Industries; Floorsaver. l. Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Duranox. m. Symons Corporation, a Dayton Superior Company; Buff
Hard. n. US Mix Products Company; US Spec Industraseal. o. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Vexcon StarSeal PS. p. Prosoco Inc.; Consolideck LS
211118.00 033000-8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE q. BASF Construction Chemicals; Kure-N-Harden 2.9 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Reducer: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured
for application to fresh concrete. 1. Products: a. Axim Italcementi Group, Inc, CATEXOL, Cimfilm. b. Edoco by Dayton Superior; BurkeFilm. c. ChemMasters; Spray-Film. d. Conspec, a Dayton
Superior Company; Aquafilm. e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film. f. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Eucobar. g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Vapor Aid. h. Lambert Corporation; Lambco
Skin. i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-Con. j. BASF Construction Chemicals; Confilm. k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Evapre. l. Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold. m. Nox-Crete Products
Group, Kinsman Corporation; Monofilm. n. Sika Corporation, Inc.; SikaFilm. o. Symons Corporation, a Dayton Superior Company; Finishing Aid. p. Unitex; Pro-Film. q. US Mix Products Company;
US Spec Monofilm ER. r. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex EnvioSet. s. TK Products, Division of Sierrra Corp.; TK-2120 TRI-FILM. B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth
made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry. C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. D. Water: Potable.
E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating. Compounds will need to be abrasively removed by applicator. 1. Products: a. Anti-Hydro
International, Inc.; AH Curing Compound #2 DR WB. b. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Res X Cure WB. c. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear. d. Conspec, a Dayton Superior Company; W.B. Resin Cure.
e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W). f. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Kurez DR VOX, TAMMSCURE WB 30C. g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 420. h. Lambert Corporation;
Aqua Kure-Clear. i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R. j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100 Clear. k. Nox-Crete Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Resin Cure E. l. Symons Corporation,
a Dayton Superior Company; Resi-Chem Clear Cure. m. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems; Kure 200. n. Right Pointe; Clear Water Resin. o. Spec Chem, LLC; Spec Rez Clear. p.
Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Enviocure 100. q. TK Products, Division of Sierrra Corp; TK-2519 DC WB. 2.10 RELATED MATERIALS A. Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated
cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork, 1/4 inch maximum thickness.
211118.00 033000-9 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE B. Control Joint Forms: Two part, high impact polystyrene joint former, with top portion designed to be removed after concrete has hardened.
C. Expansion Board Caps: High impact polystyrene caps for fiber board joint filler, designed to be removed after concrete has hardened and before sealants are applied. D. Epoxy Bonding
Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements,
and as follows: 1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. a. Products: 1) Concresive 1420; BASF Construction Chemicals 2)
Adbond (J40); Dayton Superior Corp. 3) Flex-Con or SBR Latex; Euclid Chemical 4) Everbond; L&M Construction Chemicals 5) Intralok; W.R. Meadows, Inc. 6) Strong Bond; Conspec Marketing
& Manufacturing Co., Inc. 2.11 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Epoxy Crack Injection Adhesive (Repair): ASTM C881, Type I, Grade 1, solvent free. 1. Products: a. Sikadur 35 Hi-Mod LV; Sika Corp.
b. Sure-Inject (J-56); Dayton Superior Corp. c. EUCO #452 LV; Euclid Chemical Co. d. Concresive Standard LVI; BASF Construction Chemicals. e. Pro-Poxy 100; Unitex B. Repair Underlayment:
Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement
Binder: ASTM C 150, Portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions,
and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi
at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109. 5. Products: a. Ardex K-15; Ardex Inc. b. LeveLayer II; Dayton Superior Corporation. c. Mastertop Topping 112; BASF Construction Chemicals
d. 350 Industrial Topping; Burke. e. Skimflow ES; Dependable Chemical Co., Inc. f. EZ Level; TEC Specialty Products. g. FLO TOP or Super FLO TOP; Euclid Chemical Co. h. Levelex; L &
M Construction Chemical. C. Repair Overlayment (Traffic-Bearing): Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can
be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, Portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer:
Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by topping
manufacturer.
211118.00 033000-10 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109. 5. Products: a. Levelayer III; Dayton Superior
b. Duracrete; L & M Construction c. Concrete Top; Symons d. Mastertop Topping 112; BASF Construction Chemicals e. FLO-TOP 90; Euclid Chemical Co. f. Wearflow; Dependable Chemical Co.
Inc. 2.12 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both,
according to ACI 301. 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures. B. Cementitious Materials:
Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash: 25 percent. 2. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent.
3. Combined Fly Ash and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent portland cement minimum, with fly ash not exceeding 25 percent. C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content
in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement. D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing or plasticizing admixture
in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
3. Use water-reducing and accelerating admixture when required by low temperatures or cold-weather placement conditions. 4. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, and concrete
with a watercementitious materials ratio below 0.50. 5. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures, where indicated. 6. Use shrinkage reducing admixture in concrete mixtures,
where indicated. 2.13 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS A. Exterior Concrete (Ramps, Steps, and Stoops): Proportion normal-weight concrete with the following properties: 1. Compressive
Strength (28 days): Refer to Division 03 Section “Concrete Schedule”. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: Refer to Division 03 Section “Concrete Schedule”.
3. Slump Limit: 5 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. 4. Air Content: 6 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent. B. Footings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive
Strength: Refer to Division 03 Section “Concrete Schedule”. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: Refer to Division 03 Section “Concrete Schedule”. 3. Slump Limit: Not less
than one inch and not more than 3 inches. C. Foundation Walls and Retaining Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: Refer to Division
03, Section “Concrete Schedule”. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: Refer to Division 03, Section “Concrete Schedule.
211118.00 033000-11 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3. Slump Limit: Not less than one inch and not more than 3 inches. 4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery
for 1-inch nominal maximum aggregate size. D. Slabs-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: Refer to Division 03, Section “Concrete
Schedule”. 2. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch, before adding water-reducing or plasticizing admixtures, with maximum slump less than 6 inches. a. High range water reducers
are not allowed. 3. Air Content: Do not allow air content of troweled finished floors to exceed 3 percent. E. Building (Retaining) Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as
follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50. 3. Slump Limit: 5 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. 4. Air Content: 5.5
percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch nominal maximum aggregate size. 2.14 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES A. Proportion mixes by either laboratory
trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301, using materials to be employed on the project for each class of concrete required. B. Submit written reports to A/E of
each proposed mix for each type of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of Work. Indicate with each mix design the items or structures for which it is to be used. Do not begin concrete
production until mixes have been reviewed by A/E. Submit the following information: 1. Complete identification of aggregate source of supply. 2. Tests of aggregates for compliance with
specified requirements. 3. Scale weight of each aggregate. 4. Absorbed water in each aggregate. 5. Brand, type, and composition of cement with product information. 6. Brand, type, and
amount of each admixture with product information. 7. Amounts of water used in trial mixes. 8. Proportions of each material per cu.yd., including fibrous secondary reinforcement, if
used. 9. Gross Gross weight and yield per cu.yd. of trial mixtures. 10. Measured slump, with and without water reducer, if used. 11. Measured air content. 12. Submit compressive strength
results from tests performed by an independent testing agency on at least 30 consecutive strength tests or two groups of tests totaling at least 30 within the past 12 months. Supply
standard deviation and average strength in accordance with Article 3.9 of ACI 301. 13. Identification number or name of mix to verify agreement with compression test reports. 14. Water/Cement
Ratio C. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances
warrant, at no additional cost to Owner and as accepted by A/E. Laboratory test data for revised mix designs and strength results shall be submitted to and must be accepted by A/E before
using in work. D. Maximum Water Cementitious Ratio: Concrete mixes shall be limited to the water-cement ratios specified in the Concrete Schedule in these Specifications (Division 03
Section “Concrete Schedule”). Water reducers and fly ash may be used to increase the slump while maintaining or reducing the water-cementitious ratio at or below the maximums specified
values, except where specifically prohibited in these specifications.
211118.00 033000-12 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2.15 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.16 CONCRETE MIXING A.
Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. Addition of water to the batch will be
permitted only to replace water lost due to evaporation or with verification that the design water/cement ratio has not been exceeded and only under the direct control of the concrete
testing agency field representative. All water added at the site to be noted on concrete field inspection report. All tests on concrete to be performed after water is added. 2. When
air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to
60 minutes. 3. Mix proprietary materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, including product data and product technical bulletins. a. Once specific mix design and sequencing
of raw materials have been established, do not alter. Consistency of raw materials in each phase of mixing is the most important element in making quality concrete. B. Project-Site Mixing:
Not permitted without prior approval of A/E in writing. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to receive concrete sealer. Do not apply over curing compounds. Notify A/E
if surfaces are not acceptable. Do not begin surface preparation or application until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Preplacement Observation: Before
placing concrete, observe and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast-in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work; cooperate
with other trades in setting such work, as required. 1. Observe soil at bottom of foundation systems, which will be subject to testing for soil bearing value by the testing laboratory,
as directed by by the A/E. Place concrete immediately after approval of foundation excavations. 2. Observe underslab
drainage course areas that were subject to testing for soil bearing value by the testing laboratory as required by A/E. Place concrete immediately after approval of underslab compaction
tests. B. Material placement for interior slabs on grade and exterior concrete stoops. 1. Install and properly support and anchor slab welded wire fabric. 2. Position waterstops and
expansion joint fillers where indicated and as recommended by manufacturer. Special precautions shall be taken to avoid collapse during installation. C. Under slabs-on-grade, place drainage
course on prepared subbase and as follows: 1. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 2. Compact 6 inch drainage course to required cross sections and thickness
to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. D. Clean surfaces to receive coatings. Remove loose and foreign matter that could interfere with application
or performance of sealer.
211118.00 033000-13 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3.3 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic
loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. 1. Side forms are not required at the sides of trench footings or other footings unless specifically
indicated. Contractor responsible for foundations is responsible to verify from the Geotechnical Engineering Report included in this Project Manual that soil conditions allow the use
of earth-formed foundations. If soil conditions do not allow earth-forming, Contractor shall include the cost of forming foundations in his bid. B. Construct formwork so concrete members
and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347as
abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces, where exposed to view. 2. Class C, 1/2 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces, unless otherwise
noted. 3. Variation from plumb in lines and surfaces of columns, piers, walls, and arrises; 1/4 inch per 10 feet, but not more than 1 inch. For exposed corner columns, control joint
grooves, and other conspicuous lines, 1/4 inch in a bay or 20 feet maximum; 1/2 inch maximum in 40 ft. or more. 4. Variation in sizes and locations of sleeves, floor openings, and wall
openings, 1/4 inch. 5. Variations in footings plan dimensions, minus 1/2 inch and plus 2 inches; misplacement or eccentricity, 2 percent of footing width in direction of misplacement
but not more than 2 inches; thickness reduction, minus 5 percent. D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete. E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or
prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal
to 1 vertical. 1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate
screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type
screeds. G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely
braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete, unless
otherwise noted. I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing
such items. J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. K. Retighten forms and bracing
before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, before placing reinforcement.
211118.00 033000-14 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE M. Earth Forming: Where footings are to be constructed in cohesive soils, the Contractor may elect to earth form footings with the approval
of the A/E. Earth forms shall be excavated to create vertical faces to the detailed dimensions within a tolerance of plus 6 inches, minus 0 inch. 3.4 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure
anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions,
and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of
Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 2. Construction Joints: Where construction joints divide footings and walls, joints shall have keyways formed. Keyways shall be 1/3
of the thickness of the element, shall extend to within 3 inches of the ends of the element and shall be at least 1-1/2 inch thick, unless otherwise noted. 3.5 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than
50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete, if concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations are maintained. 1. Leave formwork
for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports weight of concrete in place a minimum of 14 days and not until concrete has achieved its 28-day design compressive
strength. 2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores. B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the
Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent. C. When forms are reused, clean
surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by A/E.
3.6 VAPOR BARRIER A. Vapor Barriers: Place, protect, and repair vapor barriers according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Place vapor barrier directly below
the slab and above the drainage fill. 2. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturers recommended tape. 3. Extend vapor barrier up perimeter walls 3 inches and seal top edge with
continuous bead of high-grade mildew resistant silicone sealant or manufacturer’s tape. 4. Seal all penetrations (including pipes) with manufacturer’s pipe boot or manufacturer’s instructions.
3.7 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor barrier. Repair damage and reseal vapor
barrier before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete.
211118.00 033000-15 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain
minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. 1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4, where indicated. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete,
not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining
sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. F. Provide sufficient numbers of supports
and of strength to support reinforcement in correct position. Do not place reinforcing bars more than 2 inches beyond last leg of continuous bar support. Do not use supports as bases
for runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads. G. Provide standard reinforcement splices by lapping ends, placing bars in contact, and tightly tying wire.
Comply with requirements of ACI 318 for minimum lap of spliced bars. H. Reinforcing steel installed in continuous footings shall run continuous. This shall include specially shaped components
with proper lap where corner reinforcing and step footings occur. I. Provide additional reinforcing around required openings in footings and slabs having a one foot least dimension.
J. Support welded wire fabric in slabs-on-grade with precast concrete bricks at 2 feet spacing in both directions. K. Provide continuous chairs or bolsters to support welded wire fabric
in elevated slabs at each line of support for steel deck (e.g., at centerline of supporting joists or beams) and as required to support reinforcing steel in correct position. 3.8 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Place joints at the ends of pours and where placement operations are stopped for more
than 1/2 hour, except where such pours terminate at expansion joints. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated
or as approved by A/E. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement
through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and
girders in middle third of spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection. 4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns
at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at top of footings or floor slabs. 5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls,
near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. 6. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete
surfaces. C. Control (Contraction) Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane control (contraction) joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct control (contraction)
joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:
211118.00 033000-16 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1. Grooved Joints: Form control (contraction) joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8
inch. Repeat grooving of control (contraction) joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form control (contraction)
joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch-wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage
surface and before concrete develops random control (contraction) cracks. 3. Control (contraction) joints shall be filled with self-leveling traffic grade sealant as specified in Division
07 Section “Joint Sealants” for the following locations, unless otherwise noted: a. Exposed and concealed concrete slabs on grade with no additional floor finish or sealed concrete finish
only. 1) Sealant color shall match sealed concrete color. 4. Locate control (contraction) joints in slabs-on-ground, as indicated, if not shown, then so as to divide the slab into sections
with a maximum distance of 15 feet between control joints both directions. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions
with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating
flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface
where joint sealants, specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated. 3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is
required, lace or clip sections together. E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to
prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 3.9 WATERSTOPS A. Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated to form a continuous diaphragm. Install
in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of the Work. Field fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions, adhesive bonding, mechanically
fastening, and firmly pressing into place. Install in longest lengths practicable. 3.10 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. General: Comply with ACI 304, “Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting,
and Placing Concrete”. First day test pours shall be a maximum of 1000 sq.ft. total size to work out problems and to determine if adjustments are required to attain proper quality of
work. Slab pours shall be limited to not greater than 18 feet in width. B. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete
and that required inspections have been performed. C. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by A/E. D. Before test sampling
and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301. 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding water-reducing admixtures to mixture.
211118.00 033000-17 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE E. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that
has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical
vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly
penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit
duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate. 4.
Concrete shall be completely discharged within 1-1/2 hours after entering conveying drum. 5. Pumping methods using steel or plastic pipelines will be permitted. Aluminum alloy lines
shall not be used. Minimum pipe diameter allowed for pumping shall be 3 inches. 6. Pumped Concrete: Comply with ACI 304R. F. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in
a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly
worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge
and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured
surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. G. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI
306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When average high and low
temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301. 2. Do not
use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or
other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. H. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301/305.1
and as follows: 1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent
of weight of ice is calculated and included within total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement,
and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 3.11 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough-Formed Finish (Rf Fm-Fn):
As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface
irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
211118.00 033000-18 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE B. Smooth-Formed Finish (Sm Fm-Fn): As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner
with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formedsurface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete
surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish, and to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete. C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following
to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where indicated: 1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish (Ab-Fn): Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum
brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops
of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final
surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.12 FLOOR AND SLAB FINISHES A. General Information (Slabs-on-Grade): The
requirements indicated are based upon the latest FF/FL method. Bids for this work shall reflect these requirements and enforcement can be expected. 1. Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations
for screeding, restraightening and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. a. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. Finished
surface is to be free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance and with surface leveled to tolerances indicated. Do not burnish trowel the surface. b. Elevated slabs shall
comply with the following floor flatness (FF) values. Floor levelness values will not apply to elevated slabs. B. Float Finish (Flt-Fn) – Noncritical Floors: 1. Specified Overall Value:
FF 20/FL 15. 2. Minimum Local Value: FF 14/FL 10. 3. Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive a trowel finish and to subfloors under concrete toppings, thickset
tile, sand bed terrazzo, and raised computer floors. C. Trowel Finish 1 (Tr-Fn1): Carpeted Floors, unless otherwise noted. 1. Specified Overall Value: FF 25/FL 20. 2. Minimum Local Value:
FF 17/FL 14. 3. Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive carpet and noncritical floors where slabs remain exposed, such as mechanical rooms, metal stair pan
fill, and topping over precast deck, unless otherwise noted. D. Trowel Finish 2 (Tr-Fn2): Floors with improved flatness/levelness requirements. 1. Specified Overall Value: FF 35/FL 25.
2. Minimum Local Value: FF 24/FL 17. 3. Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive thin-set flooring, resilient flooring, linoleum flooring, fluid-applied flooring,
resinous flooring and other flooring types, unless otherwise indicated. a. At thin-set tile floors, maximum permissible variation shall be 1/4 inch in 10 feet from required plane. After
surface is steel-troweled, apply a fine broom finish.
211118.00 033000-19 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE E. Trowel Finish 3 (Tr-Fn3): Floors requiring better than average flatness/levelness. 1. Specified Overall Value: FF 45/FL 35. 2. Minimum Local
Value: FF 30/FL 24. 3. Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are scheduled to receive polished concrete finish, unless otherwise noted. F. Trowel Finish 4 (Tr-Fn4): Resilient
athletic flooring covered floors, and with other floor finishes as indicated in their technical sections and required by their manufacturers: 1. The slab shall be steel troweled to a
true level and finished smooth and straight to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in any 10 foot radius. High spots shall be ground level, and low spots filled in with approved leveling compounds
by the Contractor responsible for this Section to the full approval of the flooring installer. G. Nonslip Broom Finish (NsBrm-Fn): Apply nonslip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms,
steps and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber bristle broom, perpendicular to main traffic
route. Coordinate required final finish with the A/E before application. 3.13 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless
otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with inplace construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling
indicated or required to complete the Work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to
a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: 1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual
equipment provided. 2. Construct concrete base a minimum of 4-inches high unless otherwise indicated; and extend base not less than 6 inches in each direction beyond the maximum dimensions
of supported equipment unless otherwise indicated. 3. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4,000 psi at 28 days, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to
concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 5. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor
bolts that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete substrate. 6. Prior to pouring concrete, place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions and directions finished with items to be embedded. 7. Cast anchor-bolt insert into bases. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to
supported equipment. 3.14 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1
for cold-weather protection and ACI 305.1 for hotweather protection during curing. 1. Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Polished Concrete Finish: Protect appearance of concrete surface from
physical damage and staining that could result from subsequent construction operations and might compromise final polished concrete finish. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation
retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to
manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
211118.00 033000-20 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain
during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period. D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin
curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces. E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1,
by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous
water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover
Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof
tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven (7) days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. a. Moisture cure or use
moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings. b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid
floor treatments. c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere
with bonding of floor covering used on Project. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. a. After curing period has
elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer. b. Apply membrane-forming curing compound to concrete surfaces
as soon as final finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours). Apply uniformly in continuous operation by powerspray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Apply
second coat to all surfaces with a direction of application at 90 degrees to the first coat and to the same rate of application. Recoat areas which are subjected to heavy rainfall within
3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. c. Do not use membrane curing compounds on surfaces which are to receive concrete
overlays, additional toppings, liquid floor hardener, or where incompatible with finish floor materials. Components found not to be compatible with finish floor material shall be abrasively
removed by this contract, with no additional charge to Owner. d. After seven days and curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound as soon as concrete is not subject to rewetting.
1) Contractor shall “brush blast (shot)” the surface. The process involves utilizing a self-contained shot-blasting machine, such as a Blastrac, that utilizes steel shot (170 of 230).
By using this process, the pores of the concrete will open and the floor will be cleaned, but leave a very light profile similar to the International Concrete Repair Institute “CSP 1”.
3.15 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and complete surface repairs.
211118.00 033000-21 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2. Do not apply to concrete that is less than 28 days old. 3. Installation a. Saturate the surface with undiluted concrete densifier and chemical
hardener by sprayer, squeegee or broom. b. Keep the surface wet with concrete densifier and chemical hardener for a minimum of 30 minutes. (A range of 30 to 60 minutes may be required
depending on temperature and conditions). c. Ensure areas are kept at all times with concrete densifier and chemical hardener. d. Once the surface begins at gel and becomes slippery,
immediately spray the surface with a light water mist. e. Scrub the surface with a broom or mechanical scrubber to increase the penetration of the concrete densifier and chemical hardener.
f. Continue to work the concrete densifier and chemical hardener into the surface for another 5 to 10 minutes or until it becomes gelled and slippery for a second time. g. Thoroughly
flush the surface with water and agitate the surface with a broom to aid in removal of the excess material with a mop or squeegee. h. Remove all excess material with a mop or squeegee.
i. Thoroughly squeegee the surface dry. j. If there are slippery patches, this is an indication that there is still excess concrete densifier and chemical hardener present. These areas
should be reflushed and squeegeed again until the entire surface is dry. 3.16 JOINT FILLING A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased. B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing
compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry. C. Fill control joints with self-leveling traffic grade sealant at the following locations: 1. Exposed
slabs with no additional floor finish. 2. Slabs to receive wood floor system. 3.17 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by A/E.
Remove and and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to A/E's approval. B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two
and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities,
cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins, and other projections on surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately
after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension in solid concrete, but not less than 1 inch in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular
to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brushcoat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids
with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white Portland cement and standard Portland cement so
that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact
mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.
211118.00 033000-22 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by A/E. D. Repairing
Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped
to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets,
crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.
2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting
out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair
underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather
edges to match adjacent floor elevations. a. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through underlayment according to manufacturer’s written
recommendations. b. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants that
might impair underlayment bond according to manufacturer’s written instructions. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure
a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce
a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete.
Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete
and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished
concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to
sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact
patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to A/E's approval,
using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. 1. Fill all cracks larger than 1/64 inch in both slabs-on-grade and elevated slabs with epoxy crack injection adhesive. F. Repair materials
and installation not specified above may be used, subject to A/E's approval. 3.18 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified
testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Inspections: Refer to Structural Drawings for list of “Special Inspections”. C. Concrete
Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:
211118.00 033000-23 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd.,
plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's
pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test
for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg
F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5. Density: ASTM C 138 fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite
sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31. a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder
specimens for each composite sample. 7. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. a. A
compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. 8. Strength of each concrete
mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value
falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. 9. Test results shall be reported in writing to A/E, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing.
Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete
batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-and 28-day tests. 10. Nondestructive
Testing: Rebound hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by A/E but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. 11. Additional Tests:
Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been
met, as directed by A/E. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed
by A/E. 12. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 13. Correct
deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents. D. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155
within 48 hours of finishing. 3.19 PROTECTION A. Protect concrete that will remain exposed and has or will receive a floor or slab treatment or a curing and sealing compound. B. Protect
liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by
liquid floor treatments installer. END OF SECTION 033000
211118.00 042000-1 UNIT MASONRY SECTION 042000 -UNIT MASONRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: 1. Concrete masonry
units (CMUs). 2. Mortar and grout. 3. Reinforcing steel. 4. Masonry joint reinforcement. 5. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division
07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping at openings and penetrations in masonry walls. 2. Division 07 Section “Fire-Resistive Joint Systems” for joints in masonry. 3.
Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing control and expansion joints in unit masonry. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive
strengths (f'm) at 28 days. 1. Determine net-area compressive strength (f'm) of masonry from average net-area compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method)
according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 2. Determine net-area compressive strength (f'm) of masonry by testing masonry prisms according to ASTM C 1314. B. Regulatory
Requirements: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications, and standards, except as otherwise shown or specified: 1. ACI 530-ASCE 5 Building Code Requirements For
Masonry Structures. 2. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 Specifications for Masonry Structures. a. Maintain one copy of the standard in project field office at all times during construction. Contractor’s
supervisory personnel shall be thoroughly familiar with this material as it applies to the project. 3. National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA) a. NCMA TEK Bulletin 3-1C “All Weather
Concrete Masonry Construction”. b. NCMA TEK Bulletin 3-2A “Grouting Concrete Masonry Walls”. c. NCMA TEK Bulletin 3-4B “Bracing Concrete Masonry Walls During Construction”. d. NCMA TEK
Bulletin 5-2A “Clay and Concrete Masonry Banding Details”. e. NCMA TEK Bulletin 7-1C “Fire Resistance Rating of Concrete Masonry Assemblies”. f. NCMA TEK Bulletin 8-2A “Removal of Stains
from Concrete Masonry.” g. NCMA TEK Bulletin 8-3A “Control and Removal of Efflorescence.” h. NCMA TEK Bulletin 9-1A “Mortars for Concrete Masonry.” i. NCMA TEK Bulletin 10-1A “Crack
Control in Concrete Masonry Walls”. j. NCMA TEK Bulletin 10-2C “Control Joints for Concrete Masonry Walls – Empirical Method”. k. NCMA TEK Bulletin 10-4 “Crack Control for Concrete Brick
and Other Concrete Masonry Veneers”. l. NCMA TEK Bulletin 12-4D “Steel Reinforcement for Concrete Masonry”. m. NCMA TEK Bulletin 14-4B "Strength Design Provisions for Concrete Masonry."
n. NCMA TEK Bulletin 14-7B "Allowable Stress Design of Concrete Masonry." o. NCMA TEK Bulletin 19-4A “Flashing Strategies for Concrete Masonry Walls”. p. NCMA TEK Bulletin 19-5A “Flashing
Details for Concrete Masonry Walls.” 4. ASTM International: a. ASTM C33 "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates."
211118.00 042000-2 UNIT MASONRY b. ASTM C90 “Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units." c. ASTM C91 “Masonry Cement.” d. ASTM C140 “Standard Test Methods of Sampling
and Testing Concrete Masonry Units.” e. ASTM C144 “Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.” f. ASTM C150 “Standard Specification for Portland Cement.” g. ASTM C207 “Standard
Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.” h. ASTM C270 “Standard Specification for Mortar of Unit Masonry.” i. ASTM C426 “Standard Test Method for Linear Drying Shrinkage
of Concrete Masonry Units.” j. ASTM C780 “Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry.” k. ASTM C979 “Standard
Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete.” l. ASTM E514 “Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage Through Masonry”. 5. International Masonry Industry
All-Weather Council (IMIAWC). a. “Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction – 1993”. 6. Underwriters’ Laboratory Inc. (UL) a. UL “Building
Materials Directory”. b. UL 618 “Standard for Concrete Masonry”. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of
special shapes. 2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show elevations
of reinforced walls. B. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including but not limited to: 2. Material Certificates: Include statements
of material properties indicating compliance with requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards. Provide for each type and size of the following:
a. Masonry units. 1) Provide material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements, if requested. b. CMU: Upon regular presentation within past 12 months of representative
representative units by approved manufacturer, a test report from an independent laboratory showing resultant weight, compressive strength (based on net area), and water absorption properties,
as well as adherence to standards where so specified, for: 1) Each proposed type and size of concrete masonry units. 2) Test reports shall conform to ASTM C140 and shall include: a)
Name of Manufacturer b) Date of Manufacture of Test Specimen c) Dimension Measurements (in.) d) Calculated Gross Area (sq.in.) e) Calculated Net Area (sq.in.) f) Total Load (lbs.) g)
Net Unit Load (psi) h) Sample Weight (lbs.) i) Dry Weight (lbs.) j) Wet Weight (lbs.) k) Immersed Weight (lbs.) l) Density (pcf) m) Moisture Content (%) n) Absorption (%) o) Linear Shrinkage
Coefficient (%)
211118.00 042000-3 UNIT MASONRY c. CMU: Submit compression test results from an independent testing laboratory showing the compressive strength of each type and size of concrete masonry
units delivered to the construction site during the first fifteen days of masonry construction. Submit additional tests from each type and size of concrete masonry units for each 10,000
sq.ft. of concrete masonry wall constructed. The independent testing laboratory is to select units to be tested from materials stockpiled on the Project site. d. Cementitious materials.
Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. e. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. f. Grout mixes. Include description of type
and proportions of ingredients. g. Reinforcing bars. h. Joint reinforcement. i. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories. 3. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description
of type and proportions of ingredients. a. Include test reports, per ASTM C 780, for mortar mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. b. Include test reports, per
ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement. For both fine and course grouts including complete identities and proportions of ingredients. 1)
Weight of each ingredient including water. 2) Measured slump. 3) Water/cement ratio. 4) Sieve analysis for aggregates. 4. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination
of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry
determined according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 5. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to
comply with cold-weather requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend
within the the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source from a single manufacturer for each product required. B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain
mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate.
Do not change source or brands of masonry mortar materials during the course of the Work. C. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI/ASCE 6/TMS 602, unless modified by requirements in the
Contract Documents. D. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM
E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Refer
to Division 01 Section “Product Requirements”. 1. Do not apply flexible flashing on wet or damp surfaces. 2. Apply to surfaces free of dirt, oils, lubricants, and other debris. 3. Install
flexible flashing materials at temperature above 40 deg. F. At temperature below 40 deg. F., apply primer in accordance with flashing manufacturer’s recommendations, prior to installation
of flashing.
211118.00 042000-4 UNIT MASONRY B. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially
completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place. 2. Where 1 wythe of multiwythe masonry
walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place. C. This structure is designed to be
self-supporting and stable after the building is fully completed. Protect masonry walls against wind damage by bracing as required until support of walls is integral with the completed
building structure. This includes the addition of whatever temporary bracing, guys, or tie-downs that might be necessary. Such material is not shown on the Drawings. If applied, they
shall be removed as conditions permit, and shall remain the Contractor’s property. 1. Safety: It is solely the Contractor’s responsibility to follow all applicable safety codes and regulations
governing this Work. 2. Load application after building masonry columns, piers, or walls a. Do not apply uniform design floor or roof loading for at least 12 hours. b. Do not apply concentrated
loads for at least 3 days. D. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and
soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect
sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. E. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen
materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with NCMA
TEK 3-1A. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 with special emphasis on the following: 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning
methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning. a. To assure mortar
temperatures between 40 degrees F and 120 degrees F until used, heat mixing water or aggregates when air temperature is between 32 degrees F and 40 degrees F. When the air temperature
is between 25 degrees F and 32 degrees F, heat both water and aggregate. b. Do not heat water or sand above 160 degrees F. 2. Comply with the requirements of the governing code and with
the "Construction and Protection Recommendations for Cold Weather Masonry Construction" of the Technical Notes of Brick and Tile Construction by the Brick Institute of America (BIA)
and International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council, “Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction.” F. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with
hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and the following: 1. Masonry construction performed when ambient temperature exceeds 100 degrees F (or 90
degrees F with wind velocities greater than 8 mph) shall conform to the following requirements: a. Store materials in cool, shaded location. b. Cover aggregate stockpiles with black
plastic sheet to retard the evaporation of moisture.
211118.00 042000-5 UNIT MASONRY c. Cool reinforcing steel, metal accessories, wheelbarrows, mixers and mortar boards by flushing with water. d. Wet high-suction brick. e. Increase lime
and/or cement content to maximum allowed under ASTM C270 for mortar type specified. f. Increase water content of mortar and grout as needed. g. Spread mortar beds no more than 4 feet
ahead of masonry, and set units within one minute of spreading mortar. h. Moist cure masonry by water fog spray after tooled joints have set. i. Cover walls to retard evaporation. j.
Schedule work to avoid hottest part of day. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units
to exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from
specified dimensions by more than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed Work or will impair the quality of completed masonry. 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUs) A. Shapes:
Provide shapes indicated and as follows: 1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. 2. Provide bullnose
units for outside corners and at sills, unless otherwise indicated or sill is indicated to receive additional finish materials. 3. Provide two core type masonry units where required
to receive vertical reinforcing. 4. Bond beam units shall be such that where two reinforcing steel bars are required in the bond beams, bars may be located not greater than 2-5/8 inch
from both faces of the unit. Bond beam units that do not allow the two bars to be separated and to be within 2 5/8” of each face will not be acceptable. B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM
C 90. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 1900 psi. 2. Weight Classification: Normal weight. 3. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's
standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 MASONRY LINTELS A. Concrete Lintels: Not acceptable. B. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made
from specially formed “U” shaped lintel units with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure prefabricated lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily
support built-in-place lintels until cured. 2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide
natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color(s) indicated. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
211118.00 042000-6 UNIT MASONRY C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C
207, Type S. D. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329. E. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone.
2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. F. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. 1. Fine Aggregates: ASTM C404, clean, sharp,
natural sand free from loam, clay lumps, or other deleterious substances. 2. Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C404, clean, uncoated, pea gravel containing no clay, mud, loam, or foreign matter.
Maximum aggregate size 3/4 inch. G. Epoxy Pointing Mortar: ASTM C 395, epoxy-resin-based material formulated for use as pointing mortar for structural-clay tile facing units (and approved
for such use by manufacturer of units); in color(s) indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as as selected by A/E from manufacturer's colors. H. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride,
noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated. 1. Products: a. Euclid Chemical
Company; Accelguard 80. b. Grace Construction Products; Morset. c. BASF Construction Chemicals; Trimix-NCA. I. Water: Clean, free of deleterious materials which would impair strength
or bond and potable. 2.5 REINFORCEMENT A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615 or ASTM A 996, Grade 60 (Grade 420). 1. Size, length, and spacing shall be as indicated. 2. Where
No. 3 and larger are indicated, they shall be deformed steel, conforming to ASTM A615, Grade 60. 3. Use #4 spacer bars at 48 inch spacing connected to longitudinal reinforcing bars in
concrete masonry bond beams to hold bars in proper location. B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951 and as follows: 1. Provide welded wire units prefabricated in straight
lengths of not less than 10 foot, with matching corner ("L") and intersection ("T") units. 2. Fabricate from cold-drawn steel wire complying with ASTM A82, with deformed or embossed
continuous side rods and
plain cross-rods, with unit width of 1-1/2 to 2 inches less than thickness of wall or partition. 3. Wire shall be mill galvanized and in accord with the following: a. Joint reinforcement,
interior walls or exposed to relative humidity less than or equal to 75 percent. 1) ASTM A641, mill galvanized (0.10 oz. per sq.ft.) b. Wire ties or anchors in interior walls or exposed
to relative humidity less than or equal to 75 percent 1) ASTM A641 (0.35 oz. per sq.ft.) c. Joint reinforcement, wire ties, or anchors in exterior walls or a mean relative humidity exceeding
75 percent 1) ASTM A153, Class B (1.50 oz. per sq.ft.) d. Sheet metal ties or anchors, interior walls or exposed to relative humidity less than or equal to 75 percent
211118.00 042000-7 UNIT MASONRY 1) ASTM A653, G60 (0.60 oz. per sq.ft.) e. Sheet metal ties or anchors in exterior walls or a mean relative humidity exceeding 75 percent 1) ASTM A153,
Class B (1.50 oz. per sq.ft.) f. Steel plates and bars 1) ASTM A153, Class B 4. For single wythe interior CMU walls, provide ladder type joint reinforcing fabricated with two W1.7 or
0.148 inch steel side rods and W1.7 or 0.148 inch cross rods. Joint reinforcing shall be placed in every other CMU joint or not more than 16 inches o.c. 5. For foundation walls consisting
of two wythes of CMU, provide ladder type joint reinforcing fabricated with four W1.7 or 0.148 inch steel side rods and W1.7 or 0.148 inch cross rods. Joint reinforcing shall be placed
in every CMU joint or no more than 8 inches o.c. Side rods shall align with face shells of CMU. 6. For single wythe foundation walls, provide ladder type joint reinforcing fabricated
with two W1.7 or 0.148 inch steel side rods and W1.7 or 0.148 inch cross rods. Joint reinforcing shall be placed in every CMU joint or no more than 8 inches o.c. 7. For joint reinforcing
in walls, other than those described above, refer to Drawings for particular requirements. 8. All ladder type joint reinforcing shall have cross rods spaced at 16 inches o.c. 2.6 TIES
AND ANCHORS A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are made from materials that comply with subparagraphs below, unless otherwise indicated. 1.
Mill-Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 641, Class 1 coating, provide in interior walls where humidity is less than 75 percent. 2. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel
Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating, unless otherwise noted. 3. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Commercial Steel, G60 (Z180) zinc coating, provide in interior walls
where humidity is less than 75 percent. 4. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153, unless
otherwise noted. 5. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36. 6. Stainless Steel bars: ASTM A 276 or ASTM A 666, Type 304. B. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structure: Provide
anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch
diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. Mill-galvanized wire may be used at interior walls, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Tie Section for Steel Frame: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized
to extend within 1 inch of masonry face, made from 0.188-inch diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. Millgalvanized wire may be used at interior walls, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Connector Section for Concrete: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and attached to tie section; formed from 0.097-inch thick, steel sheet, galvanized after
fabrication. 0.064-inch thick, galvanized sheet may be used at interior walls, unless otherwise indicated. C. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick
by 24 inches long, with ends turned up 2 inches or with cross pins, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS
ANCHORS A. Stabilization Anchors: Provide where masonry walls intersect concrete or existing masonry walls. 1. Products: a. D/A 2200; Dur-O-Wal, Inc.
211118.00 042000-8 UNIT MASONRY b. Slip Set Stabilizer; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. c. 1700; Wire-Bond B. Anchor Bolts: Headed or L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A
(ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153, Class C; of dimensions indicated. C. Intersecting
Masonry Wall Joint Reinforcing: Where interior masonry walls supported on slabs intersect masonry walls, provide hot dip galvanized 1/2 inch by 16 gauge mesh ties spanning horizontally.
1. Products: a. No. 269 Wire Mesh Wall Tie; Dur-O-Wal, Inc. b. #MWT Mesh Wall Tie; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. c. Wire Mesh 269; Heckman Building Products d. Wire Mesh Tie; Wirebond 2.8
MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler/Thermal Break: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness
indicated; formulated from neoprene or urethane. 1. Products: a. Neo-Seal IV 2218-3/Everlastic 1056 Joint Filler; Williams Products, Inc. b. Rapid Soft-Joint/Expansion Joint D/A 2010;
Dur-O-Wal, Inc. c. #NS-Closed Cell Neoprene Sponge; Hohmann and Barnard, Inc. d. Neocell; IPCO e. #NS-Closed Cell; National Construction Materials Corp. f. Sandell’s Closed Cell Neoprene;
Sandell Construction Solutions B. Thermal Break; Unfaced, Mineral-Wool Board Insulation: ASTM C 612; with maximum flamespread and smoke-developed indexes of 15 and zero, respectively,
per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 1. Nominal density of 4.4 lb./cu.ft. 2. Moisture Resistance; ASTM C 1104: Moisture Sorption, 0.03 percent. 3. Thermal
Resistance; ASTM C 518: R-value/inch at 75 deg. F., 4.2 hr.ft.2. F/Btu. C. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation
M2AA-805 or PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.
D. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). E. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into
mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells with loops for holding reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.142-inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
Provide units with either two loops or four loops as needed for number of bars indicated. 1. Products: a. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 810, D/A 812 or D/A 817.
b. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 376, 377, 378, or 379 Rebar Positioner. c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; #RB or #RB-Twin Rebar Positioner. d. Wire-Bond; Figure-8, Double Figure-8,
O-Ring or Double O-Ring Rebar Positioner. F. Column Isolation: Around all columns in masonry walls, provide 1/4 inch minimum isolation material to prevent the masonry from coming in
contact with the displaced column during loading and to prevent mortar from being within the same joint. 1. Contractor may provide standard column boxboard in lieu of wrap.
211118.00 042000-9 UNIT MASONRY 2. Products: a. Ceramar Flexible Foam; W.R. Meadows, Inc. b. Econ-O-Foam; Williams Products c. Nomaboard; Nomaco Inc. d. Column Backboard; Williams Products.
G. Grout Stop: Fiberglass, galvanized steel, or polypropylene screen. 1. Products: a. DA1015 DUR-O-STOP; Dur-O-Wall, Inc. b. Metal Lath 268; Heckmann Building Products, Inc. c. MGS -Mortar/Grout
Screen; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. d. Grout Stop 3612; Wire-Bond H. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D1056, nonabsorbent
to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 degrees F (minus 32 degrees C). Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape
to provide a seal for compartmentalization. 2.9 MASONRY CLEANERS AND ACCESSORIES A. Preformed Expansion Joint Filler: Provide closed cell sponge neoprene expansion joint filler conforming
to ASTM D1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated. B. Bituminous Coating: Cold applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, except containing
no asbestos fibers, or cold applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187, Type II. C. Masonry Cleaners 1. Job Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of trisodium phosphate (1/2 cup
dry measure) and laundry detergent (1/2 cup dry measure) dissolved in one gallon of water. 2. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard strength, general purpose cleaner designed
for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from masonry surfaces of type indicated below without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly
approved for intended use by manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. D. Spray Equipment: Provide equipment for controlled spray application of water and chemical cleaners, if any,
at rates indicated or recommended for pressure, measured at spray tip, and for volume. Adjust pressure and volume, as required, to ensure that damage to masonry does not result from
cleaning methods. 1. For chemical cleaner spray application, provide a low pressure tank or chemical pump suitable for the chemical cleaner indicated, equipped with a cone-shaped spray
tip. 2. For water spray application, provide a fan-shaped spray tip that disperses water at an angle of not less than 15 degrees. 2.10 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures,
including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. When specifically approved
by the A/E, admixtures shall meet ASTM C1384 Standard Specification for Admixtures for Masonry Mortars. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. No mortar shall be used
beyond 2-1/2 hours after mixing. Do not retemper colored pigmented mortar. 3. Proportion mortar accurately and mix thoroughly with the maximum amounts of water to produce a workable
consistency for at least 5 minutes in a mechanical batch mixer. Keep tools and mixing equipment clean. Use only a factory pre-blended mortar mix, color mortar mix, and integral water
repellent mortar mix in lieu of a field mix.
211118.00 042000-10 UNIT MASONRY B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions,
and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. Provide the following types of mortar
for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry. 1. For masonry below grade use Type M, where indicated only. 2.
For masonry, use Type S, unless otherwise noted. D. Use natural (noncolored) mortar for the following: 1. Concrete masonry units, unless otherwise noted. E. Pointing mortar shall conform
to ASTM C270, except that all sand shall pass a No. 16 sieve. Nonstaining and dirt resistant mortar shall be used to which ammonium stearate or calcium stearate is added to the amount
equal to 3 percent of the weight of the cement used. 1. Pointing mortar shall be proportioned by volume with one part portland cement, 1/8 part Type S hydrated lime, and 2 parts graded
(50 mesh or finer) sand to which ammonium stearate or calcium stearate is added in an amount equal to 2 percent of the weight of the cement used. Use mortar within 30 minutes of final
mixing; do not retemper or use partially hardened material. 2. Use pointing mortar to repair chipped CMU units. F. Grout for Unit Masonry (by Strength): Comply with ASTM C 476. Grout
mixes shall be designed by strength, unless specifically noted otherwise in the Contract Documents. 1. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigment, air-entraining agents, accelerators,
retarders, water repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. Do not lower the freezing point of grout by use of admixtures or antifreeze
agents. a. Admixtures containing chlorides in excess of 0.2 percent chloride ions are not permitted to be used. b. Antifreezes are prohibited for use in grouts. c. Flyash: ASTM C618-89a,
Type C or F F may be substituted for up to 20 percent of the total cementitious materials in the gout mix. 2. Grout mixes shall be plant mix or factory blended (dry mix with water added
at Project site). a. Field mixed grout designs are not acceptable. 3. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table
1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 4. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 10 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143. PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. For
the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. 2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify
that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. 4. Verify critical steel elevations to ensure flashing will be installed at proper locations. B. Before installation, examine rough-in and
built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections. C. Verify substrate and surface conditions are in accordance with flexible flashing manufacturer
recommended tolerances prior to installation.
211118.00 042000-11 UNIT MASONRY 1. Review requirements for sequencing of installation of flexible flashing assembly with installation of windows, doors, louvers and wall penetrations
to provide a weathertight flashing assembly. 2. Verify flexible flashing will be continuously supported by substrate, and not span any gaps or voids in excess of 1/2 inch. 3. Do not
apply over (apply under) mechanically-attached water-resistive barriers such as felt, building paper or wrap. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths
of masonry units, using units of widths indicated. 1. Note: In lieu of double wythe foundation walls, single wythe matching nominal overall width of double wythe may be provided. B.
Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections. Provide not less than than 8 inches of masonry between chases or recesses and jamb of openings, and
between adjacent chases and recesses. C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction
immediately adjacent to opening. D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units
with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible,
cut edges concealed. E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. 1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.
F. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. General: Comply with construction tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS
602 and the following: B. Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 1. For dimension in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch. 2. For location
of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch. 3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or
minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total. C. Lines and Levels 1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet or
1/2 inch maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or
1/2 inch maximum. 3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 4. For conspicuous vertical lines,
such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
211118.00 042000-12 UNIT MASONRY 5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 6. For vertical alignment
of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet or 1/2 inch maximum. 7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment
by more than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units. D. Joints 1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more
than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.\ 2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch.
3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch. 4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by
more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch. 5. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do
not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next. E. Reinforcing Bars: Tolerances for placing reinforcing bars are: 1. Variation from d for flexural
elements (measured from center of reinforcement to the extreme compressive face of masonry): a. d < 8 inch + 1/2 inch b. 8 inch < d < 24 inch + 1 inch c. d < 24 inch + 1-1/4 inch 2.
For vertical bars in walls 2 inch from the location along the length of the wall indicated on the project drawings. 3. In addition, a minimum clear distance between reinforcing bars
and the adjacent face of a masonry unit of 1/4 inch for fine grout or 1/2 inch for coarse grout must be maintained so that grout can flow around the bars. 3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A.
Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.
Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. 1. Do not install cracked, broken, or chipped masonry units exceeding
ASTM allowances. 2. Clean units of surface dirt and contaminants before placing in contact with mortar. 3. Lay-up walls plumb and true and with courses level, accurately spaced, within
specified tolerances, and coordinated with other work. Do not wedge partitions tight against structural ceiling or beams, but provide a caulk or insulation filled joint between masonry
and the structural roof deck, structural steel framing or structural floor deck at nonrated conditions. At rated walls, provide firestopping. Refer to Division 07 Section “Fire-Resistive
Joint Systems.” a. Cut masonry as required to maintain 2 inches clearance between masonry and all steel or reinforced concrete structural members that pass through or above walls, but
are not to be supported by the walls. 4. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors
and push tubes down into grout to provide 1/2-inch clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors, unless otherwise indicated. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry:
Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not use units with less than nominal 4 inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. 1. One-half running bond with vertical
joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below, unless otherwise noted.
211118.00 042000-13 UNIT MASONRY C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 2 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each
wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. 1. Align unit cells or cores that are to be grouted. D. Stopping and
Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove
loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry. E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections.
Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. 1. Install adjustable hollow metal frame anchors, locating anchors on jambs in horizontal bed courses near the top and bottom of each
frame and at intermediate points not over 24 inches apart. 2. Fill jambs of hollow metal door and window frames solid with grout. 3. Rake joints around exterior side of exterior hollow
metal door frames for sealant under Division 7. 4. Protect inside (concealed) faces of door frames in exterior masonry walls, using fibered asphalt emulsion coating. Apply over shop
primer approximately 1/8 inch thick and allow to dry before handling. 5. Where hollow metal frames do not wrap around masonry jambs and heads, rub exposed corners of block to remove
sharp, irregular edges. 6. Take particular care to embed all conduits and pipes with concrete masonry without fracturing exposed shells and to fit units around switch, receptacle and
other boxes set in walls. Where electric conduits, outlets, switch boxes, and similar items occur, grind and cut units before building in services. 7. Install anchors, reglets, and nailers
for flashing and related work built into masonry work, where indicated. F. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a grout stop (a layer of metal
lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh) in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. G. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams,
lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Mortar Bedding; Brick and Concrete Masonry Units as follows: 1. Mix mortar ingredients
for a minimum of 5 minutes in a mechanical batch mixer. Use water clear and free of deleterious materials that would impair the work. Each mortar batch is allowed only one retempering.
Do not use mortar, which has begun to set after the first retempering, or if more than 2-1/2 hours has elapsed since initial mixing. Retempering will be permitted only within 1-1/2 hours
of mixing, to replace moisture lost by evaporation. Discard any mortar or grout that is partially set. 2. Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and
vertical face shells; also bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and foundation walls, in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities
to be filled with grout. a. Construct bed joint of the starting course of foundation with a thickness not less than 1/4 inch and not more than 3/4 inch. 3. Remove mortar protruding into
cells or cavities that will be grouted. Do not permit mortar droppings to fall into cells, cavities of multi-wythe walls or to block weep holes. Maintain clear cavity width between facing
and backing material and keep clear of mortar droppings by back beveling the mortar bed to prevent excess from extruding into cavity. Clean any excess that does occur by parging it to
back of unit. 4. Fill holes not specified in exposed and below grade masonry with mortar.
211118.00 042000-14 UNIT MASONRY B. Joints: Maintain joint widths shown, except for minor variations required, to maintain bond alignment. Lay walls with 3/8 inch joints. Tool joints
consistently with the same type round jointer when the mortar is thumb print hard. Tool joints in exposed masonry walls at uniform moisture content to avoid color variations. Cut joints
flush for masonry walls that are to be concealed or to be covered by other materials. For exposed masonry, provide joints as follows: 1. Exterior Joints a. Concave tooled, unless otherwise
noted. 2. Interior (Room Side) Joints a. Concave tooled, unless otherwise noted. 3.6 COMPOSITE MASONRY A. Bond wythes of composite masonry together using one of the following methods:
1. Individual Metal Ties: Provide ties as shown installed in horizontal joints, but not less than one metal tie for 2.67 sq. ft. of wall area spaced not to exceed 24 inches o.c. horizontally
and 16 inches o.c. vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide additional ties ties within 12 inches of openings and space not more than 36 inches apart around perimeter of
openings. At intersecting and abutting walls, provide ties at no more than 24 inches o.c. vertically. a. Where bed joints of wythes do not align or when wythes are not laid at the same
time, use adjustable (two-piece) type ties. 2. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints. a. Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder-type reinforcement
extending across both wythes. b. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable (two-piece) type reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties.
B. Collar Joints: Solidly fill collar joints by parging face of first wythe that is laid and shoving units of other wythe into place. C. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond
in each wythe and course at corners, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide continuity with masonry joint reinforcement at corners by using prefabricated Lshaped units as well as masonry
bonding. D. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at juncture, bond walls together as follows: 1. Provide individual metal ties not more
than 16 inches o.c. 2. Provide continuity with masonry joint reinforcement by using prefabricated T-shaped units. 3. Provide rigid metal anchors not more than 24 inches o.c. If used
with hollow masonry units, embed ends in mortar-filled cores. 3.7 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover
of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise noted. 2. Space
reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches
beyond openings. a. Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement. 4. Provide reinforcement in every other course of concrete masonry veneer, but not in the same course
as the tie. B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped
units.
211118.00 042000-15 UNIT MASONRY D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units. E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity
at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 3.8 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry
abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise indicated.
Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Anchor masonry to structural members with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors
as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches o.c. horizontally. 3.9 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials
in unit masonry
as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for inplane wall or partition movement. 1. Install an elastomeric tubing
sealant backer rod at each control joint to compartmentalize masonry cavity. B. Form control joints in concrete masonry using one of the following methods: 1. Fit bond-breaker strips
into hollow contour in ends of concrete masonry units on one side of control joint. Fill resultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for application of sealant. 2.
Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. 3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint. Keep head
joints free and clear of mortar or rake out joint for application of sealant. 4. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is complete
for application of sealant. C. Form expansion joints in brick made from clay or shale as follows: 1. Build flanges of factory-fabricated, expansion-joint units into masonry, where indicated.
2. Build in compressible joint fillers, unless otherwise noted. D. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible filler of
width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch. 1. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath
shelf angles supporting masonry. E. Control Joint Locations in CMU: Provide vertical control joints in CMU where called for on the Drawings, in accordance with NCMA TEK Bulletins 10-1A,
10-2A, 10-2B, and 10-4, and at all offsets, returns, openings, and intersections with dissimilar materials and as follows to prevent cracking: 1. At change from wall setting on foundation
to wall setting on floor slab. 2. At change from exterior wall to interior wall. 3. At walls setting on floors that cross floor construction. 4. At columns within masonry walls. 5. At
changes in wall thickness. 6. Stop joint reinforcement bars on either side of control joints. Extend reinforcing bars in bond beams continuously through control joints and sleeves for
bond break 18 inches each side of joint. 7. Install control joints in concrete masonry units with prefabricated shear key. 8. At end of lintel bearing on one end of openings less than
or equal to 6'-4" and at both ends of openings greater than 6'-4".
211118.00 042000-16 UNIT MASONRY 9. Straight runs as indicated below, with spacing related to wall height as follows: a. Walls less than 8 feet: Not more than 3 times wall height. b.
Walls 8 feet or higher: Maximum 25 feet. 10. Distance between joints should not exceed the lesser of the following: a. A length-to-height ratio of 3 to 2. b. 25 feet. F. Building Expansion
Joint Through Masonry 1. Expansion joints indicated as 2 inches or less: Form an open joint for installation of expanding foam secondary sealant and sealant specified in Division 07
Section “Joint Sealants”. Maintain joint free and clear of mortar. 3.10 LINTELS A. Install loose steel lintels furnished under Division 05. 1. Store steel lintels until the masonry has
attained sufficient strength to carry its own weight. This shoring period should not be less than 24 hour. This minimum time period should be increased to three days when there are imposed
loads to be supported. If the masonry is built in cold weather construction conditions, the length of cure should be increased. B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings
of more than 8 inches for brick size units and 16 inches for block size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. Provide prefabricated or formed-in-place
masonry lintels. Do not use precast concrete lintels without A/E approval, unless precast lintels are specifically indicated. Thoroughly cure prefabricated lintels before handling and
installation. Temporarily support formed-in place lintels. 1. For hollow masonry lintels, use specially formed "U"-shaped lintel units with solid bottom and reinforcing bars placed as
shown, and filled with coarse grout. Bond beam block shall not be used to form masonry lintels. 2. Bond pattern for masonry lintels shall match the pattern at the adjacent wall unless
otherwise noted. C. Provide minimum 8 inch solid bearing at each end, unless otherwise noted. 1. Provide a slip plane in the form of flashing or other bond breaker between the lintel
and masonry. D. Where formed-in-place masonry lintels are supported by steel angles over the opening during installation, the angles shall not extend more than 2-1/2 inches into the
masonry on each jamb of the opening. When the angles are removed, the void remaining shall be packed tightly with a moist mixture of Type S mortar. E. The reinforced masonry and lintel
drawings are intended to show the major lintels required for windows, doors, louvers, and other major openings. Some lintels are shown for some mechanical duct and pipe openings, but
the drawings are not intended to show all of these openings. The masonry contractor shall coordinate the size and location of openings required in masonry walls by the other contractors
and provide steel or masonry lintels for these openings according to the lintel schedules in the Contract Documents whether shown on the Contract Documents or not. 3.11 REINFORCED UNIT
MASONRY INSTALLATION A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1. Construct formwork to provide
shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position
and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.
211118.00 042000-17 UNIT MASONRY 2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that
may be placed on them during construction. B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry
to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum
grout space and maximum pour height. 2. The low-lift grouting procedure shall be used as described in the Drawings and in NCMATEK 3-2 Grouting for Concrete Masonry Walls and NEMA TEK
Bulletins 3-3 and 14-2. 3. Grout (slump 8 to 10 inches) shall be installed in the block cavities so as to completely fill each cavity with homogenous grout, extending from the lowest
course to the top of the reinforced portion of the foundation or wall. Concrete or mortar shall not be used as grout for CMU. 4. Between 5 and 20 minutes after the grout is placed, it
shall be consolidated with a mechanical vibrator. The top of the grout filling shall be stopped 1-1/2 inches below the top of the concrete block to form a key, except for the top course
in the wall where the grout shall be struck flush with the top. 5. Aggregate used in the grout shall be small enough not to interfere with placement and plasticity. 6. Caging devices
and centering clips shall be spaced vertically such that 2 clips or devices, one near its top and one near its bottom restrain every section of vertical reinforcing bar. 7. Where grouted
cores do not extend the full height of a wall, install grout stop mesh at the lower limit of the grout. 8. Where required on the plans, grouting operations shall be observed by an independent
testing agency. 3.12 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining
units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. 1. Provide a 100 square foot area of patched CMU for A/E's review.
Do not proceed with patching until area is approved. Wall shall appear uniform from a distance of 5 feet. If masonry units are colored, coordinate blend with unit manufacturer. B. Pointing:
During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to
provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated. C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove
mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. Dry brush exposed masonry with bristle brushes at end of each work day. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean
exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel;
leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes or use methods used on approved mock-up. Obtain A/E's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.
a. Where walls are a combination of CMU and brick only the less aggressive CMU cleaners shall be used. 3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by
covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.
211118.00 042000-18 UNIT MASONRY 4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean masonry
with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A and 8-3A, applicable
to type of stain on exposed surfaces. a. Water application method shall never exceed 400 psi without approval of A/E. 3.13 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess
clean masonry waste and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 042000
211118.00 055000-1 METAL FABRICATIONS SECTION 055000-METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. General: The extent of metal fabrications
includes items fabricated from iron and steel shapes, plates, bars, strips, tubes, pipes, and castings which are not a part of structural steel systems in these Specifications. 2. Steel
framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 3. Miscellaneous steel trim including concrete apron edge angles. 4. Loose Steel
Lintels. 5. Metal bollards. B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following: 1. Steel pipe sleeves, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into
concrete or built into unit masonry. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, wedge-type
inserts and other items indicated to be cast into concrete. 2. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other items indicated to be built into
unit masonry. 3. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for metal framing anchors. 4. Division 09 painting Sections and Division 09 Section “High-Performance Coatings” for surface-preparation
and priming requirements. 5. Division 22 “Plumbing” for trench drain frames and grating. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior metal fabrications that allow
for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components,
failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature
Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. 1. Include plans,
elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 2. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation
under other Sections. 3. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible
for their preparation. a. Fabricator in lieu of sealed drawings may provide a certified letter attesting to compliance with ANSI A14.3. B. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Product
Data: For the following a. Adhesive anchor bolts. b. Paint products. c. Grout. 2. Welding certificates.
211118.00 055000-2 METAL FABRICATIONS 3. Paint compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code – Steel." B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel
according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces,
unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. 2.2 FERROUS
METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36. B. Channels, Angles, M, S-Shapes: ASTM A 36 or ASTM A 572, Grade 50. C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing. D. Steel
Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. E. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal channels with continuous
slot complying with MFMA-4. 1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches. 2. Material: Steel complying with ASTM A 1008, structural steel, Grade 33; 0.0528-inch minimum thickness; coated
with rust-inhibitive, baked-on, acrylic enamel. a. Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653, structural steel, Grade 33, with G90 coating; 0.079-inch nominal thickness, where indicated.
F. Cast Iron: Either gray iron ASTM A 48, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47, unless other indicated or required by structural loads. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated,
provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, or ASTM F 1941 Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Provide
stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A307, Grade A; with
hex hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. C. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593; with hex nuts, ASTM
F 594; and, where indicated, flat washers. D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. 1. Provide hot-dip
or mechanically deposited, zinc-coated anchor bolts where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.
211118.00 055000-3 METAL FABRICATIONS E. Eyebolts: ASTM A 489. F. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3. G. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. H. Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1. I. Plain Washers:
Round, ASME B18.22.1. J. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1. K. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to four
times the load imposed, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings,
either ASTM A 47 malleable iron or ASTM A 27 cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153. L. Adhesive (Chemical) Anchor Bolts (In Concrete):
Chemically grouted adhesive (chemical) anchor bolts. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Products: a. HILTI HVA Adhesive Anchors/HILT HIT-HY 150;
Hilti, Inc. b. Ceramic 6 EPCON System Adhesive Anchors; ITW Ramset/Red Head. c. T308 + Adhesive Anchors; Powers Fasteners, Inc. d. Simpson Set Epoxy-Tie Adhesive Anchors; Simpson Strong-Tie
Company, Inc. 2. Anchors to be ASTM A36 or A307, zinc plated steel threaded rods (Fy = 36 ksi) unless otherwise noted. 3. Where noted on the drawings anchors to be ASTM F593, Condition
CW stainless steel threaded rods (Fy = 65 ksi for diameters 3/8 inch through 5/8 inch and Fy = 45 ksi for diameters 3/4 inch through 1-1/4 inch). 4. Anchors to be installed in strict
conformance to manufacturer’s installation instructions. 5. Adhesive Anchors shall have the following minimum allowable load capacities: (Based on embedment in 4000 psi concrete and
a minimum safety factor on ultimate load capacities of 3.5. Use proportional allowable loads for other strengths of concrete. Note: Actual anchor load capacity varies with spacing and
edge distance.) Size Allowable Shear Allowable Tension Minimum Embedment 3/8 inch 1000 lbs. 2100 lbs. 3-3/8 inch 1/2 inch 1850 lbs. 3300 lbs. 4-1/4 inch 5/8 inch 2900 lbs. 5100 lbs.
5 inches 3/4 inch 4200 lbs. 6800 lbs. 6-5/8 inch 1 inch 7500 lbs. 11,000 lbs. 8-1/4 inch 6. Adhesive anchor bolt suppliers shall submit product data, including certified test results
showing the ultimate and allowable shear and tension load capacities for all anchors sizes and types to be furnished. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes:
Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead-and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79. 1.
Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer. C. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI #20 and compatible with topcoat.
211118.00 055000-4 METAL FABRICATIONS D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints
specified to be used over it. E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187 or SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide
inert type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur compounds, and other deleterious impurities. F. Nonshrink, Metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, ferrous-aggregate grout
complying with ASTM C 1107, specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy-duty loading applications. G. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. H. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply
with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, unless
otherwise indicated. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only
as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed
surfaces. C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate
angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength
and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces
smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth,
using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where
least conspicuous. G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Cut, reinforce,
drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure.
Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. 1. Where Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry,
equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches
o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
211118.00 055000-5 METAL FABRICATIONS 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the
Work. B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to
receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. 1. Furnish inserts if units are installed after
concrete is placed. C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. D. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated. 2.7 STEEL WELD
PLATES AND ANGLES A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each
unit with not less than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes,
plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible. B. Provide cutouts, fittings,
and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. 1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction.
C. Concrete apron edge angle: Galvanized angle of size indicated with integral anchors for casting into concrete. D. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim and interior miscellaneous
steel trim, where indicated. E. Prime interior miscellaneous steel trim, where indicated with zinc-rich primer. 2.9 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles
and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.
B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings not less than 8 inches, unless otherwise indicated. C. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.
2.10 METAL BOLLARDS A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe. 1. Bollards shall be galvanized.
211118.00 055000-6 METAL FABRICATIONS 2.11 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and
designating finishes. B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. C. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface. 2.12
STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below: 1. ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products.
2. ASTM A 153, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for
SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: 1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B) and Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer:
SSPCSP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." C. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications,
except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application
Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1. Paint items embedded in concrete with two coats of bituminous paint. 2. Stripe paint corners,
crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established
lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because
of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain
fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing
and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to
be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors.
211118.00 055000-7 METAL FABRICATIONS E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. F. Coat concealed
surfaces of steel embedded in concrete with two coats of bituminous paint. G. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete,
masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. 3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements
of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. B. Anchor supports for hoists securely to and rigidly braced from
building structure. 3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean
bottom surface of plates. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not
remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. 1. Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations
where not exposed to moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure
that no voids remain. 3.4 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS A. Anchor bollards in concrete. Fill annular space around bollard solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout; mixed and placed to comply
with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 1/8 inch toward bollard. B. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water. 3.5
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds,
bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted
surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing
to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 055000
211118.00 061053-1 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY SECTION 061053 -MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wood blocking and
nailers. 2. Miscellaneous plywood panels. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is
indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to
receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece. 3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content
specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Maximum Moisture Content of
Lumber: 19 percent. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the
ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is
warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. Application:
Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing,
vapor barriers, barriers, and waterproofing. 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements
in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with firetest-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method
indicated by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM
E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m)
beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.
211118.00 061053-2 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements
specified above for fireretardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations
and where indicated. C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Concealed blocking. 2. Wood cants,
nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, and similar members in connection with roofing. 3. Plywood backing panels. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous
lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide
Construction or No. 2 grade lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content of any species. C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of
the following species and grades: 1. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north), Construction or 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Spruce-pine-fir (south)
or spruce-pine-fir, Construction or 2 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of
any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment
of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. 1. Provide No. 2 grade Douglas Fir or Southern Yellow
Pine nailers associated with roofing and roof flashing. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS PLYWOOD PANELS A. General: Where plywood panels will be used for the following concealed types of applications,
provide APA performance rated panels complying with requirements indicated for grade designation, span rating, exposure durability classification, edge detail (where applicable), and
thickness. B. Plywood Shims, Nailers, and Blocking for Roof Insulation Stops: Shall be APA UNDERLAYMENT C-C PLUGGED EXT. 2.6 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type
indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture.
211118.00 061053-3 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide
fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or Type 304 stainless steel. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: ICC-ES ESR-1539.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer
for material being fastened. F. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. H. Expansion
Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry
assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.
1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product
consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness
of not less than 0.025 inch. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry
to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Where
wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. C. Framing Standard: Comply with
AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. D. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated. E. Provide blocking
and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections
where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c. F. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and
other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows:
211118.00 061053-4 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or
noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces. 2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story,
and at not more than 96 inches o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal-thickness.
3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. and to solidly fill space below partitions.
4. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more than 20 feet o.c. G. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere
with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum
number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. H. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that
are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. I. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring
and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. J.
Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with
other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that
has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution
by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. B. Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, miscellaneous rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered
borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. END OF SECTION 061053
211118.00 071300 – 1 SHEET WATERPROOFING SECTION 071300 – SHEET WATERPROOFING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following: 1. Below grade wall (vertical) waterproofing.
Provide one of the following: a. Modified bituminous sheet waterproofing. b. Pre-molded membrane. c. Adhesive-coated HDPE sheet waterproofing. B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint-sealant materials and installation. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Acronyms: 1. HDPE = High-density polyethylene. 2. XEPS = Extruded expanded polystyrene.
B. Reference Standards: The publications listed below form a part of this Section to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation
only. 1. ASTM International: a. Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile (ASTM C67). b. Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry
Units and Related Units (ASTM C140). c. Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation (ASTM C578). d. Standard Specification for High Solids Content, Cold
Liquid-Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane for Use with Separate Wearing Course (ASTM C836/C836M). e. Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Bitumen-Saturated Felts and
Woven Fabrics for Roofing and Waterproofing (ASTM D146). f. Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic elastomers – Tension (ASTM D412). g. Standard Test Method for
Water Absorption of Plastics (ASTM D570). h. Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting (ASTM D882). i. Standard Test Method for Peel or Stripping Strength
of Adhesive Bonds (ASTM D903). j. Standard Test Method for Peel Resistance of Adhesives (T-Peel Test) (ASTM D1876). k. Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous
Sheet Materials Used As Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection (ASTM D1970). l. Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating (ASTM D4258). m. Standard Test
Method Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method (ASTM D4263). n. Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles (ASTM D4533). o. Standard
Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles (ASTM D4632). p. Standard Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance of Geomembranes, and Related Products (ASTM D4833).
211118.00 071300 – 2 SHEET WATERPROOFING q. Standard Test Method for Determining the Coefficient of Soil and Geosynthetic or Geosynthetic and Geosynthetic Friction by the Direct Shear
Method (ASTM D5321). r. Standard Test Method for Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance of Waterproofing Membranes (ASTM D5385). s. Standard Test Method for Swell Index of Clay Mineral Component
of Geosynthetic Clay Liners (ASTM D5890). t. Standard Test Method for Fluid Loss of Clay Component of Geosynthetic Clay Liners (ASTM D5891). u. Standard Guide for Flood Testing Horizontal
Waterproofing Installations (ASTM D5957). v. Standard Practice for Application of Self-Adhering Modified Bituminous Waterproofing (ASTM D6135). w. Standard Specification for Asphalt
Based Protection Board for Below-Grade Waterproofing (ASTM D6506). x. Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials (ASTM E96). y. Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor
Retarders Used in Contact with Earth under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or As Ground Cover (ASTM ASTM E154). z. Standard Specification for Bituminous Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact
with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs (ASTM E1993). aa. Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission Rate through Plastic Film and Sheeting Using a Modulated Infrared
Sensor (ASTM F1249). 2. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA): NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual (NRCA ML104, Fifth Edition). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Assurance/Control
Submittals: 1. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties
of waterproofing. 2. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that installers comply with requirements. 3. Qualification Data: For Installer. 4. Sample Warranties:
For special warranties B. Closeout Submittals (Warranties): Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that is approved or
licensed by waterproofing manufacturer for installation of waterproofing required for this Project. B. Perform work in accordance with NRCA ML104. 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation
Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review waterproofing requirements including surface preparation, substrate condition and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted
weather conditions, special details and sheet flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and protection and repairs.
211118.00 071300 – 3 SHEET WATERPROOFING 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace waterproofing material
that does not comply with requirements or that fails to remain watertight within specified warranty period. 1. Failure includes, but is not limited to, failure of waterproofing due to
failure of substrate prepared and treated according to requirements or formation of new joints and cracks in substrate exceeding 1/16 inch in width. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from
date of Contract Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET WATERPROOFING (VERTICAL) A. General: For vertical applications, select from one of the following types of sheet waterproofing.
B. Modified Bituminous Sheet: 60-mil thick, self-adhering sheet consisting of 56 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil thick polyethylene film with release liner on adhesive
side. 1. Physical Properties: a. Tensile Strength: 250 psi minimum per Die C, modified, in ASTM D412. b. b. Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent minimum per Die C, modified, in ASTM D412.
c. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at negative 20 degrees Fahrenheit per ASTM D1970. d. Crack Cycling: Unaffected after 100 cycles of 1/8-inch movement per ASTM C836/C836M. e. Puncture
Resistance: 40 pound-force minimum per ASTM E154. f. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 150 feet minimum per ASTM D5385. g. Water Absorption: 0.15-percent weight-gain maximum after 48-hour
immersion at 70 degrees Fahrenheit per ASTM D570. h. Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perms per Water Method of ASTM E96. C. Pre-Molded Membrane: Waterproofing membrane must be seven-ply, weather-coated,
permanently bonded, semi-flexible bituminous core board composed of a three-ply plasmatic matrix sealed between liners of asphalt-impregnated felt and a glass-mat liner. Waterproofing
membrane shall consist of an asphalt weather coat and covered with a polyethylene anti-stick sheet. Waterproofing membrane shall meet all requirements of ASTM E1993 and shall have the
following characteristics: 1. Minimum Permeance: 0.0011 perms per ASTM F1249, calibrated to Water Method of ASTM E96. 2. Tensile Strength: 156 pound-force per inch per Section 9 of ASTM
E154. 3. Puncture-Resistance: 149 pound-force per ASTM E154. D. Adhesive-Coated HDPE Sheet for Vertical Applications: 32-mil thick, uniform, flexible sheets consisting of 16-mil thick,
HDPE sheet coated with a pressure-sensitive rubber adhesive, a protective adhesive coating, and a release liner. 1. Physical Properties: a. Tensile Strength, Film: 4000 psi minimum per
ASTM D412. b. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at negative 10 degrees Fahrenheit per ASTM D1970. c. Peel Adhesion to Concrete: Five pound-force per inch per ASTM D903, modified. d.
Lap Adhesion: 2.5 pound-force per ASTM D1876, modified. e. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 231 feet per ASTM D5385, modified. f. Vapor Permeance: 0.01 perms per Water Method of ASTM E 96.
g. Water Absorption: 0.5 percent per ASTM D570. E. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. American Hydrotech, Inc.; VM 75. b. Carlisle Coatings
& Waterproofing Inc.; CCW MiraDRI 860/861.
211118.00 071300 – 4 SHEET WATERPROOFING c. CETCO Building Materials Group; Envirosheet. d. Grace, W. R. & Co.; Bituthene 3000/Low Temperature or Bituthene 4000 e. Henry Company; Blueskin
WP 100/200. f. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; SealTight Mel-Rol. g. Nervastral, Inc.; BITU-MEM. h. Polyguard Products; Polyguard 650. i. Soprema; Colphane 3000. j. Tamko Roofing Products, Inc.;
TW-60. k. York Manufacturing, Inc.; HydroGard. l. W.R. Meadows; Premolded Membrane Vapor Seal with Plasmatic Core. m. Grace, W. R. & Co., Preprufe 160R, vertical. 2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with sheet waterproofing. 1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials
that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material. C. Surface
Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne surface conditioner recommended for substrate by manufacturer manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material. D. Liquid Membrane: Elastomeric, two-component
liquid, cold fluid applied, trowel grade or low viscosity. E. Substrate Patching Membrane: Low-viscosity, two-component, asphalt-modified coating. F. Sheet Strips: Self-adhering, rubberized-asphalt
sheet strips or same material and thickness as sheet waterproofing. G. Mastic, Adhesives, and Tape: Liquid mastic and adhesives, and adhesive tapes recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
1. Detail Tape: Two-sided, pressure-sensitive, self-adhering reinforced tape, 4-inches wide, with a tack-free protective adhesive coating on one side and release film on self-adhering
side. 2. Detail Strips: 62.5-mil thick, felt-reinforced self-adhesive strip, 8-inches wide, with release film on adhesive side. H. Metal Termination Bars: Aluminum bars, approximately
1-by 1/8-inch thick, predrilled at 9-inch centers. I. Protection Course: ASTM D6506, semi-rigid sheets of fiberglass or mineral-reinforced-asphaltic core, pressure laminated between
two asphalt-saturated fibrous liners and as follows: 1. Thickness: 1/8 inch, nominal, for vertical applications; 1/4 inch, nominal, or two layers 1/8 inch, under concrete slabs. 2. Adhesive:
Rubber-based solvent type recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for type of protection course. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according
to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application.
211118.00 071300 – 5 SHEET WATERPROOFING B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction. C. Remove grease,
oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete. D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections
and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids. E. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according
to ASTM D4258. 1. Install sheet strips and center over treated construction and contraction joints and cracks exceeding a width of 1/16 inch. F. Corners: Prepare, prime, and treat inside
and outside corners according to ASTM D6135. 1. Install membrane strips centered over vertical inside corners. Install 3/4-inch fillets of liquid membrane on horizontal inside corners
and as follows: a. At footing-to-wall intersections, extend liquid membrane each direction from corner or install membrane strip centered over corner. G. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical
and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at drains and protrusions according to ASTM D6135. 3.2 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING APPLICATION
A. Install modified bituminous sheets according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and according to recommendations in ASTM D6135. B. Apply primer to substrates at
required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by sheet waterproofing in same day. Re-prime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. C. Apply and firmly adhere
sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform 2 1/2-inch minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams and stagger end laps to ensure
watertight installation. 1. When ambient and substrate temperatures range between 25 and 40 degrees Fahrenheit, install self-adhering, modified bituminous sheets produced for lowtemperature
application. Do not use low-temperature sheets if ambient or substrate temperature is higher than 60 degrees Fahrenheit. D. Apply continuous sheets over sheet strips bridging substrate
cracks, construction, and contraction joints. E. Seal exposed edges of sheets at terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with mastic. F. Install sheet
waterproofing and auxiliary materials to tie into adjacent waterproofing. G. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements. Slit and flatten
fish-mouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofing extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in all directions. H. Install protection course with butted joints over waterproofing
membrane immediately. 1. Insulation drainage panels or board insulation may be used in place of a separate protection course to vertical applications when approved by waterproofing manufacturer
and installed immediately.
211118.00 071300 – 6 SHEET WATERPROOFING I. Correct deficiencies in or remove sheet waterproofing that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and
repair sheet flashings. 3.3 PREMOLDED MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING APPLICATION A. Install membrane according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to provide a monolithic vapor
seal without voids or open seams. 1. Application: Vertical or horizontal under slabs. B. Ensure accessory materials are compatible with membrane and approved by membrane manufacturer.
C. Place membrane in position by either Dutch-lap method with laps sealed with bonding asphalt or by butt-joint method with joints sealed with joint tape. D. Point exposed edges with
pointing mastic to prevent water from traveling under membrane. E. Place membrane collar around protrusions through concrete slab, including sewer pipes, water pipes, and utility inlets
to create a positive seal between protrusions and membrane. Seal-inplace with joint tape and point around protrusions with pointing mastic. F. Adhere membrane to vertical surface with
adhesive. 3.4 ADHESIVE-COATED HDPE SHEET WATERPROOFING APPLICATION A. Install adhesive coated HDPE sheets according to manufacturer’s written instructions. B. Vertical Applications:
Install adhesive-coated HDPE sheet with HDPE face against substrate. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform 3-inch minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams and stagger
and tape end laps to ensure watertight installation. Mechanically fasten to substrate. 1. Securely fasten top termination of membrane with continuous metal termination bar anchored into
substrate and cover with detailing tape. C. Corners: Seal lapped terminations and cut edges of sheet waterproofing at inside and outside corners with detail tape. D. Seal penetrations
through sheet waterproofing to provide watertight seal with detail tape patches or wraps and a liquid-membrane troweling. E. Install sheet waterproofing and auxiliary materials to produce
a continuous watertight tie into adjacent waterproofing. F. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements. Tape perimeter of damaged or nonconforming
area extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in all directions. Apply a patch of sheet waterproofing and firmly secure with detail tape. G. Correct deficiencies in or remove waterproofing
that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Engage a site representative qualified by waterproofing
membrane manufacturer to inspect substrate conditions; surface preparation; membrane application, flashings, protection, and drainage components; and to furnish reports to A/E. 1. Provide
full-time inspection when required by warranty conditions.
211118.00 071300 – 7 SHEET WATERPROOFING 3.6 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane. B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear
during remainder of construction period. C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION 071300
211118.00 072100-1 THERMAL INSULATION SECTION 072100 -THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Foam-plastic board insulation. B. Related Sections: 1. Division
07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for insulation
installed as part of a perimeter fire-resistive joint system. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 2. Certification:
Certify materials contain less than one percent asbestos. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84
by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Products shall comply with ASTM E136, where indicated. B. Materials containing
more than one percent asbestos will not be acceptable. 1.4 SEQUENCING A. Sequence and coordinate application of sprayed-on insulation with other related Work specified in other Sections
to comply with the following requirements: 1. Ensure that insulating material is installed prior to installation of enclosing or concealing work, with sufficient time allowed for observation,
testing, and correction of defective insulation work. 2. Plumbing, wiring (including telephone and other low-voltage work) shall be completely roughed in stud cavities before beginning
insulation work. B. Coordinate installation of sprayed insulation with other Work in order to minimize the need for other trades to cut or remove insulation. As other trades successively
complete installation of their Work, maintain integrity of insulation coating by patching areas that have been removed or damaged prior to concealment by other Work. C. Ducts, piping,
conduit, or other suspended equipment that interfere with the uniform application of the insulation material shall be positioned after the application of the sprayed insulation. PART
2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and minimum compressive strength indicated below, with maximum flame-spread
and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. DiversiFoam
Products. b. Dow Chemical Company (The). c. Owens Corning. d. Pactiv Building Products.
211118.00 072100-2 THERMAL INSULATION 2. Type VI, 40 psi. B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging
insulation and substrates. 2.2 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS A. Sprayed Polyurethane Foam Sealant: 1 or 2 component, foamed-in-place, polyurethane foam sealant, 1.5 to 2.0 lb/cu.ft.
density; flame spread index of 25 or less according to ASTM E162; with primer and noncorrosive substrate cleaner recommended by foam sealant manufacturer. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or that interfere with insulation attachment. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written
instructions applicable to products and applications indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at
any time. C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with
placement. D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce
thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. E. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior
walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF BELOW-GRADE INSULATION A. On vertical
footing and foundation wall surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's recommended adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. If not otherwise indicated,
extend insulation a minimum of 36 inches below exterior grade line. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other
causes. causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.
211118.00 072100-3 THERMAL INSULATION 3.5 INSULATION SCHEDULE A. General: Contractor may select any of the following insulation materials that meet application requirements and manufacturer
recommendations, unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Extruded-Polystyrene (XPS-INSUL) 1. Application a. Under slab-on-grade. b. Exterior foundation wall insulation, supporting backfill.
END OF SECTION 072100
211118.00 078413-1 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SECTION 078413 – PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Tested or engineering judgment based firestopping
materials and systems for entire project. Section includes firestopping for the following: 1. Through-Penetration Firestop Systems a. Penetrations through fire resistance rated floor
and roof construction including both empty openings and openings containing cables, pipes, ducts, conduits, and other penetrating items. 1) Water tight firestop systems for penetrations
in fire-resistance-rated floor assemblies. b. Penetrations through fire resistance rated walls and partitions including both empty openings and openings containing cables, pipes, ducts,
conduits, and other penetrating items. c. Penetrations through smoke barriers and construction enclosing compartmentalized areas involving both empty openings and openings containing
penetrating items. d. Penetrations through partitions that enclose incidental use areas – that are not required to be fire-resistance-rated due to the presence of automatic fire-extinguishing
systems – but are still required to resist the passage of smoke. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 07 Section “Fire-Resistive Joint Systems” for joints: a. In or between fire-resistance-rated
construction. b. At exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections. c. In or between smoke barriers. d. In or between partitions that enclose incidental use areas – that are not required
to be fire-resistance-rated due to the presence of automatic fire-extinguishing systems – but are still required to resist the passage of smoke. 2. Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants”
for joint sealants used at penetrations through non-fire-resistance-rated construction that does not enclose an incidental use area. 3. Division 21 Sections specifying fire-suppression
piping penetrations. 4. Division 22 and 23 Sections specifying duct and piping penetrations. 5. Division 26, 27, and 28 Sections specifying cable and conduit penetrations. 1.2 DEFINITIONS
DEFINITIONS A. Firestopping: Material or combination of materials to retain integrity of fire rated construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke,
and gases through penetrations in fire rated wall and floor assemblies. 1. Exception: When used in non-fire-resistance-rated partitions that enclose incidental use areas, firestopping
shall be applied to the exposed face of mineral wool, glass fiber, or other approved non-rigid materials to maintain an effective resistance to the passage of smoke. See required L-rating
below. B. Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: An assemblage of specific materials or products that are designed, tested and fire-resistance-rated to resist for a prescribed period
of time the spread of fire, the passage of hot gases, and the transfer of heat through penetrations. C. Through-Penetration Firestop Devices: Factory built products designed to resist
fire spread. Complete when delivered to site ready for installation. D. Assembly: Particular arrangement of materials specific to a given type of construction described or defined in
referenced documents.
211118.00 078413-2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING E. Engineering Judgment: Evaluations that are developed by a manufacturer for a new firestop system that complies with similar UL approved
designs or tests that are acceptable to the code enforcing authorities. F. Intumescent: Materials that expand with heat to seal around objects threatened by fire. G. Penetration: Opening
or foreign material passing through a floor, wall or ceiling barrier such that the full thickness of the rated material(s) is breached either in total or in part. H. Sleeve: Metal fabrication
or pipe section that is part of a system that extends through a barrier. I. Annular Space: The opening around the penetrating item. Since the penetrating item cannot be perfectly centered
in the hole, the annular space has a minimum and maximum dimension. J. Approved: Acceptable to the code official or authority having jurisdiction. K. F-Rating: The time period that the
through-penetration firestop system limits the spread of fire through the penetration when tested in accordance with ASTM E 814. L. Fire Barrier: A fire-resistance-rated wall assembly
of materials designed to restrict the spread of fire in which continuity is maintained. M. Fire Partition: A vertical assembly of materials designed to restrict the spread of fire in
which openings are protected. Fire partitions are used as wall assemblies to enclose corridors. N. Fire Wall: A fire-resistance-rated wall having protected openings, which restricts
the spread of fire and extends continuously from the foundation to or through the roof, with sufficient structural stability under fire conditions to allow collapse of construction on
either side without collapse of the wall. A fire wall is commonly used to divide a structure into separate buildings – or to separate a new addition from the existing portion of a structure.
O. Fireblocking: Building materials installed to resist the free passage of flame, gases, heat, smoke, and other products of combustion to other areas of the building through concealed
spaces. The term “draftstopping” is also used to define building materials installed to resist the movement of smoke, gases, and flames to other areas – but through relatively larger
concealed spaces. Examples of fireblocking materials include – but are not limited to – the following: 1. 2-inch nominal lumber. 2. Two thicknesses of 1-inch nominal lumber with broken
lap joints. 3. One thickness of 0.75-inch particleboard with backed-up joints. 4. Gypsum board. 5. Cement fiber board. 6. Batt-type or roll-type blankets of mineral wool, glass fiber,
or other approved non-rigid materials installed in such a manner as to be securely retained in place. Loose-fill insulation material shall not be used as a fireblock unless specifically
tested in the form and manner intended for use to demonstrate its ability to remain in place and to retard the spread of fire and hot gases. P. Horizontal Assembly: A fire-resistance-rated
floor or roof assembly of materials designed to restrict the spread of fire in which continuity is maintained. Q. Incidental Use Area: Rooms or areas that constitute special hazards
or risks to life safety beyond the protection provided by the general building code requirements for the occupancy in which they are located. The building code requirements applicable
to the main use group classification are not adequate enough in order to protect against hazards that are unique to these areas. Examples include – but are not limted to – the following:
1. Furnace rooms where any piece of equipment is over 400,000 Btu per hour input. 2. Rooms with boilers where the largest piece of equipment is over 15 psi and 10 horsepower. 3. Refrigerant
machinery rooms.
211118.00 078413-3 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 4. Laboratories and vocational shops in schools. 5. Storage rooms over 100 square feet. 6. Waste collection rooms over 100 square feet. R.
L-Rating: The quantitative indication of a through-penetration firestop system’s ability to resist the passage of smoke when tested in accordance with UL 2079. S. Membrane-Penetration:
An opening made through one side (wall, floor or ceiling membrane) of an assembly. T. Smoke Barrier: A continuous membrane, either vertical or horizontal, such as a wall, floor, or ceiling
assembly, that is designed and constructed to restrict the movement of smoke. U. Smoke Partition: A non-fire-resistance-rated wall designed to resist the spread of fire and the unmitigated
movement of smoke for an unspecified period of time. A smoke partition is not required to be continuous through ceilings and other concealed spaces. V. T-Rating: The time period that
the penetration firestop system, including the penetrating item, limits the maximum temperature rise to 325 degrees Fahrenheit (163 degrees Celsius) above its initial temperature through
the penetration on the non-fire side when tested in accordance with ASTM E 814. W. Through-Penetration: An opening that passes through an entire assembly. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General,
Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: For penetrations through the following fireresistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items,
provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and
maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. 1. Fire-resistance-rated walls including fire walls, fire partitions, fire barriers, and smoke barriers as indicated
on “Code Drawing.” 2. Fire-resistance-rated horizontal assemblies including floors, floor/ceiling assemblies, and ceiling membranes of roof/ceiling assemblies as indicated on “Code Drawing.”
3. Install complete through penetration firestop systems that have been tested and/or listed by recognized testing agencies per ASTM E814 or UL 1479 fire tests in a configuration that
is representative of site conditions. B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479: 1. F-Rated Through-Penetration
Firestop Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F ratings indicated as determined per ASTM E814, UL 1479 but not less than that equaling or exceeding the fire resistance
rating of the constructions penetrated. 2. T-Rated Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with T ratings, in addition to F ratings, as determined
per ASTM E814 and ASTM E119, where indicated and where systems protect penetrating items exposed to contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas. T-rated assemblies are
required where specified by codes or where the following conditions exist: a. Where firestop systems protect penetrations located outside of wall cavities. b. Where firestop systems
protect penetrations located outside fire resistive shaft enclosures. c. Where firestop systems protect penetrations located in construction containing doors required to have a temperature
rise rating. d. Where firestop systems protect penetrating items larger than a 4-inch diameter nominal pipe or 16 square inch in overall cross sectional area. 3. L-Rated Systems: Provide
firestop systems with L-ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM UL1479, where systems maintain a barrier to smoke at: a. Penetrations.
211118.00 078413-4 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING b. Connections with other surfaces. c. Separations required to permit building movement. d. Sound or vibration absorption. e. Other construction
gaps. 4. For firestopping exposed to traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions and will meet load requirements.
a. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-resistant through-penetration firestop systems. b. For floor penetrations with annular spaces
exceeding 4 inches in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads involved either by installing floor plates or by other
means. c. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems not required removal of insulation. 5. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed
to view, provide products with flame spread of less than 25 and smoke developed ratings of less than 450, as determined per ASTM E 84. 6. W-Rated of Class 1 when tested in accordance
with UL Water Leakage Test for systems tested and listed in accordance with ANSI/UL 1479, where indicated or required by authority having jurisdiction. 7. For piping penetration for
plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moistureresistant through-penetration firestop systems. 8. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop
systems not requiring removal of insulation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Assurance/Control Submittal: 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data for each material
including the composition and limitations, documentation of UL or other nationally recognized independent testing laboratories firestop systems to be used, and manufacturer's installation
instructions. Product characteristics, typical uses, installation procedures, performance, and limitation criteria. a. Manufacturer's engineering judgment identification number and drawing
details when no tested system is available. 2. Certificates: a. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of firestopping products certifying that their products and installation
comply with specified requirements. Installer shall sign certification. b. Certification is required from manufacturer that Installer has been trained in the handling and installation
of their products. c. The Firestopping Contractor shall provide a letter of certification stating that all firestopping systems have been installed in accordance with the Contract Documents.
3. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the “Quality Assurance” article, to demonstrate their capabilities and experience, include a list of names and addresses of
completed projects, Architects and Owners, and other information specified. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer (including
individual trades people such as: electrical, mechanical, insulators, etc.) who is qualified by having at least 3 firestop projects similar in type and size to that of this project and
has the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements, plus the following: a. Acceptable to or licensed by manufacturer, state
or local authority. b. Establish a record of successful in-service experience with firestop systems or completion of manufacturer’s certified product installation training.
211118.00 078413-5 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING c. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its firestopping products to the Contractor or to an Installer engaged by the Contractor does not
itself confer qualification on the buyer. d. Any firm that has been approved by FM according to FM 4991, “Approval of Firestopping Contractors,” or been evaluated by UL and found to
comply with its “Qualified Firestop Contractors Program Requirements” shall be acceptable as well. 2. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of firestopping systems in project
to a single qualified installer. 3. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems for kind of penetration and construction condition indicated from a single
manufacturer. 4. Provide firestopping products containing no detectable asbestos as determined by the method specified in 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart F, Appendix A, Section 1, "Polarized
Light Microscopy" or ASTM D6620. 5. Do not use any product containing solvents that require hazardous waste disposal or which after curing dissolve in water. B. Regulatory Requirements
1. Proposed firestop materials and methods shall conform to applicable governing codes having local jurisdiction. 2. Meet requirements of ASTM E814, UL1479, UL2079, or ASTM E2307 tested
assemblies that provide a fire rating equal to that of construction being penetrated and other ASTM Standards as applicable for the installation. a. ASTM E84 "Test Method for Surface
Burning Characteristics of Building Materials." b. ASTM E119 "Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials." 3. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration
firestop systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in "Performance Requirements" article: a. A qualified testing and inspection agency shall perform firestopping
tests. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL or another agency performing test and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
b. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E 814. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: 1) Through-penetration firestop
system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 2) Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to through-penetration
firestop system listed by the following: a) UL in "Fire Resistance Directory". b) Intertek ETL SEMKO in its “Directory of Listed Building Products”. c) FM Global in its “Building Materials
Approved Guide”. 4. For those firestop applications that exist for which no UL tested system is available through a manufacturer, an engineering judgment derived from similar UL system
designs or other tests will be submitted to local authorities having jurisdiction for their review and approval prior to installation. Engineer judgment drawings must follow requirement
set forth by the International Firestop Council (September 7, 1994, as may be be amended from time to time). 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver firestopping undamaged products
to project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer; date of manufacturer; lot number; shelf
life, if applicable; qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project; curing time; and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. 1. Comply
with recommended procedures, precautions, or remedies described in material safety data sheets as applicable.
211118.00 078413-6 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING B. Store and handle firestopping materials to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or
other causes. C. Do not use damaged or expired materials. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside
limits permitted by firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Ventilation: Ventilate firestopping per firestopping manufacturers'
instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced air circulation. C. Existing Conditions: Verify the condition of the substrates and correct unsatisfactory conditions
before installing products. Follow manufacturers’ instructions. D. Protection: Provide masking and drop cloths to prevent contamination of adjacent surfaces, if required. 1.8 SEQUENCING
A. Coordinate this Work as required with work of other trades. Coordinate sizing of of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate through-penetration firestop
systems. 1. Coordinating Work: Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that designated through-penetration firestop systems are installed per specified requirements.
2. Schedule firestopping after installation of penetrants but prior to concealing the openings. B. Do not cover up those firestopping installations that will become concealed behind
other construction until Owner's inspection agency and authorities having jurisdiction, if required, have examined each installation. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the manufacturers specified. 1. Hilti Inc. 2. Specified Technologies, Inc., (STI) 3. 3M Fire Protection Products
4. The Rectorseal Corporation 5. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group 6. Nelson Firestop Products 7. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. 8. Johns Manville 9. USG Corp. 10.
Passive Fire Protection Partners 11. NUCO Inc. B. Products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional
qualities of the specified product. The “Substitution Request Form” and complete technical data for evaluation must accompany requests for A/E’s approval. All materials for evaluation
must be received by the Project Manager and Specification Department at least 10 days prior to bid due date. Additional approved manufacturers will be issued by Addendum.
211118.00 078413-7 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements
indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fireresistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with
one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any. B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined
per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg. 1. Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire walls, fire-barrier walls, smoke-barriers,
and fire partitions. 2. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with
ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg. 1. Horizontal assemblies include floors, floor/ceiling assemblies,
and ceiling membranes of roof/ceiling assemblies. 2. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 3. T-Rating: At least 1 hour,
but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall. D. Penetrations through Smoke Barriers, Smoke Partitions,
and partitions that enclose incidental use areas – that are not required to be fire-resistance-rated due to the presence of automatic fire-extinguishing systems – but are still required
to resist the passage of smoke: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per UL 1479. 1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. of penetration opening at 0.30-inch wg
at both ambient and elevated temperatures. E. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping showing no evidence of water leakage when tested according to UL 1479. F. Exposed Penetration
Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. G. VOC Content: Provide penetration firestopping
that complies with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for
Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. H. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping systems, including primers and
forming materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved
by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated. 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following: a. Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber
insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. c. Fire-rated form board. d. Fillers for
sealants. 2. Temporary forming materials 3. Substrate primers 4. Collars 5. Steel sleeves
211118.00 078413-8 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 2.3 FILL MATERIALS A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting of
an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.
B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that after cure do not re-emulsify during exposure to moisture. C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized
steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant. D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric sheet
bonded to galvanized steel sheet. E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds. F. Intumescent
Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side. G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement,
fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar. H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags
consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing
wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily removed. I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce
a flexible, nonshrinking foam. J. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below: 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling)
formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces, unless indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag
grade for both opening conditions. 2.4 MIXING A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's written instructions
for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed
to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with
Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of firestopping. Do not proceed
with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Verify penetrations are properly sized and in suitable condition for application of materials.
211118.00 078413-9 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 2. Conduct tests according to firestop systems manufacturer’s written recommendations to verify that substrates are free of oil, grease, rolling
compounds, incompatible primers, loose mill scale, dirt or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fire resistive materials. 3. Verify objects penetrating firestop materials,
including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates. 4. Verify substrates are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, and other suspended
construction that will interfere with applying fire resistive materials. B. Verify that environmental conditions are safe and suitable for installation of firestop materials. C. Do not
proceed with installation of firestop system until the Contractor in a manner acceptable to the A/E has corrected unsatisfactory conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean
out openings immediately prior to installing firestopping to comply with recommendations of firestopping manufacturer and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign materials
from surfaces of openings and from penetrating items that could interfere with adhesion of firestopping. 2. Clean openings and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable
of developing optimum bond with firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. 4. Do not apply firestopping
and smoke seals to surfaces previously painted or treated with sealers, curing compounds, water repellent or other coatings unless tests have been performed to ensure compatibility of
materials. Remove coatings as required. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended
products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Ensure that anchoring devices, back-up materials, clips, sleeves,
and supports and other related materials used in the actual fire tests are provided. D. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through-penetration firestop systems from contacting
adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears
from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestop systems seal with substances. 3.3 INSTALLING THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOPS A. General: Comply
with the "Performance Requirements" in Part 1 and the through-penetration firestop manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products and applications indicated.
B. Install forming/damming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce the cross sectional
shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings of designated through-penetration firestop systems. After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other
accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems. C. Install fill materials for through-penetration firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following
results: 1. Completely fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates
formed by openings and penetrating items.
211118.00 078413-10 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining
finishes. 4. Where through-penetration firestops are indicated to be watertight, they shall meet UL Water Leakage Test – Class I requirements for systems tested and listed in accordance
with the criteria of ASTM E814 (UL1479) Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops. W Rated – Class I requirements include a minimum water column exposure
of 3 feet for 72 hours prior to the standard time/temperature curve for the fire test. 5. Through Penetration Sealants with a Fungicide. Sealants must meet the requirements of ASTM G21
Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify penetration firestop systems with pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive,
preprinted vinyl labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of firestopping edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating
items or firestop systems. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "Warning – Through-Penetration Firestop System – Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any
Damage". 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5.
Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name. B. Marking and Identification: In addition to identification of firestop systems, fire walls, fire barriers,
fire partitions, smoke barriers and smoke partitions or any other wall required to have protected openings or penetrations shall be effectively and permanently identified with signs
or stenciling. Such identification shall: 1. Be located in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling, or attic spaces; and 2. Be repeated at intervals not exceeding 30 feet measured
horizontally along the wall or partition; and 3. Include lettering not less than 3 inches in height, incorporating the suggested wording: "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER – PROTECT ALL OPENINGS."
Other wording must be pre-approved by Authorities with Jurisdiction. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean off excess fill materials and sealants adjacent to openings as work progresses by methods and
with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of firestopping products and of products in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after
installation that ensure through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration
occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install new materials to produce through-penetration firestop system complying
with specified requirements. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration
firestopping is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements. C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with
other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements. END OF SECTION 078413
211118.00 078446-1 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS SECTION 078446 – FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Tested or engineering judgment based firestopping
materials and systems for entire project. Section includes firestopping for the following: 1. Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions. 2. Joints at exterior curtain-wall/floor
intersections. 3. Joints in or between smoke barriers, smoke partitions, and partitions that enclose incidental use areas – that are not required to be fire-resistance-rated due to the
presence of automatic fire-extinguishing systems – but are still required to resist the passage of smoke. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping” for penetrations
in fire-resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers and partitions that enclose incidental use areas – that are not required to be fire-resistance-rated due to
the presence of automatic fire-extinguishing systems – but are still required to resist the passage of smoke. 2. Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants” for joint sealants used in joints
in and between non-fire-resistance-rated construction that does not enclose an incidental use area. 3. Division 21 Sections specifying fire-suppression piping penetrations. 4. Division
22 and 23 Sections specifying duct and piping penetrations. 5. Division 26, 27, and 28 Sections specifying cable and conduit penetrations. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Firestopping: Material or
combination of materials to retain integrity of fire rated construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke, and gases through joints in or between
fire rated wall and floor assemblies. 1. Exception: When used in non-fire-resistance-rated partitions that enclose incidental use areas, firestopping shall be applied to the exposed
face of mineral wool, glass fiber, or other approved non-rigid materials to maintain an effective resistance to the passage of smoke. See required L-rating below. B. Assembly: Particular
arrangement of materials specific to a given type of construction described or defined in referenced documents. C. Construction Gap: Any joint or opening, whether static or dynamic,
within or between adjacent sections of interior or exterior walls, floors, ceilings, or roof decks. D. Engineering Judgment: Evaluations that are developed by a manufacturer for a new
fire-resistive joint system that complies with similar UL approved designs or tests that are acceptable to the code enforcing authorities. E. Intumescent: Materials that expand with
heat to seal around objects threatened by fire. F. Approved: Acceptable to the code official or authority having jurisdiction. G. F-Rating: The time period that the fire-resistive joint
system limits the spread of fire through the joint when tested in accordance with ASTM E 814. H. Fire Barrier: A fire-resistance-rated wall assembly of materials designed to restrict
the spread of fire in which continuity is maintained.
211118.00 078446-2 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS I. Fire Partition: A vertical assembly of materials designed to restrict the spread of fire in which openings are protected. Fire partitions
are used as wall assemblies to enclose corridors. J. Fire Wall: A fire-resistance-rated wall having protected openings, which restricts the spread of fire and extends continuously from
the foundation to or through the roof, with sufficient structural stability under fire conditions to allow collapse of construction on either side without collapse of the wall. A fire
wall is commonly used to divide a structure into separate buildings – or to separate a new addition from the existing portion of a structure. K. Fireblocking: Building materials installed
to resist the free passage of flame, gases, heat, smoke, and other products of combustion to other areas of the building through concealed spaces. The term “draftstopping” is also used
to define building materials installed to resist the movement of smoke, gases, and flames to other areas – but through relatively larger concealed spaces. Examples of fireblocking materials
include – but are not limited to – the following: 1. 2-inch nominal lumber. 2. Two thicknesses of 1-inch nominal lumber with broken lap joints. 3. One thickness of 0.75-inch particleboard
with backed-up joints. 4. Gypsum board. 5. Cement fiber board. 6. Batt-type or roll-type blankets of mineral wool, glass fiber, or other approved non-rigid materials installed in such
a manner as to be securely retained in place. Loose-fill insulation material shall not be used as a fireblock unless specifically tested in the form and manner intended for use to demonstrate
its ability to remain in place and to retard the spread of fire and hot gases. L. Horizontal Assembly: A fire-resistance-rated floor or roof assembly of materials designed to restrict
the spread of fire in which continuity is maintained. M. Incidental Use Area: Rooms or areas that constitute special hazards or risks to life safety beyond the protection provided by
the general building code requirements for the occupancy in which they are located. The building code requirements applicable to the main use group classification are not adequate enough
in order to protect against hazards that are unique to these areas. Examples include – but are not limited to – the following: 1. Furnace rooms where any piece of equipment is over 400,000
Btu per hour input. 2. Rooms with boilers where the largest piece of equipment is over 15 psi and 10 horsepower. 3. Refrigerant machinery rooms. 4. Laboratories and vocational shops
in schools. 5. Storage rooms over 100 square feet. 6. Waste collection rooms over 100 square feet. N. Joint: The linear opening in or between adjacent fire-resistance-rated assemblies
that is designed to allow independent movement of the building in any plane caused by thermal, seismic, wind, or any other loading. O. L-Rating: The quantitative indication of a fire-resistant
joint system’s ability to resist the passage of smoke when tested in accordance with UL 2079. P. Smoke Barrier: A continuous membrane, either vertical or horizontal, such as a wall,
floor, or ceiling assembly, that is designed and constructed to restrict the movement of smoke. Q. Smoke Partition: A non-fire-resistance-rated wall designed to resist the spread of
fire and the unmitigated movement of smoke for an unspecified period of time. A smoke partition is not required to be continuous through ceilings and other concealed spaces.
211118.00 078446-3 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General, Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed
to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assembly in which fireresistive
joint systems are installed. B. Joint Systems in and between Fire-Resistance-Rated Constructions: Provide systems with assembly ratings equaling or exceeding the fire-resistance ratings
of construction that they join, and with movement capabilities and L-ratings indicated as determined by UL 2079. 1. Load-bearing capabilities as determined by evaluation during the time
of test. C. Perimeter Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: For joints between edges of fire-resistance-rated floor assemblies and exterior curtain walls, provide systems of type and with ratings
indicated below and those indicated in the Fire-Resistive Joint System Schedule at the end of Part 3, as determined by NFPA 285, UL 2079, and ASTM E2307. 1. UL-Listed, Perimeter Fire-Containment
Systems: Integrity ratings equaling or exceeding fire-resistance ratings of floor or floor/ceiling assembly forming one side of joint. 2. OPL-Listed, Perimeter Fire-Barrier Systems:
F-ratings equaling or exceeding fireresistance ratings of floor or floor/ceiling assembly forming one side of joint. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Fire-Resistive Joint System Location Plan and Schedule:
Include location of each fire-resistive joint system and its respective design designation assigned by a qualified testing agency. 1. Where project conditions require modification to
a qualified testing agency’s illustration for a particular fire-resistive joint system condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by fire-resistive joint system
manufacturer’s fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly. B. Quality Assurance/Control Submittal: 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's
specifications and technical data for each material including the composition and limitations, documentation of UL or other nationally recognized independent testing laboratories firestop
systems to be used, and manufacturer's installation instructions. Product characteristics, typical uses, installation procedures, performance, and limitation criteria. a. Manufacturer's
engineering judgment identification number and drawing details when no tested system is available. 2. Certificates: a. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of firestopping products
certifying that their products and installation comply with specified requirements. Installer shall sign certification. b. Certification is required from manufacturer that Installer
has been trained in the handling and installation of their products. c. The Firestopping Contractor shall provide a letter of certification stating that all firestopping systems have
been installed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the “Quality Assurance” article, to demonstrate their capabilities
and experience, include a list of names and addresses of completed projects, Architects and Owners, and other information specified. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Installer
Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer (including individual trades people such as: electrical, mechanical, insulators, etc.) who is qualified by having at least 3 firestop
projects similar in type and size to that of this project and has the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements, plus the
following:
211118.00 078446-4 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS a. Acceptable to or licensed by manufacturer, state or local authority. b. Establish a record of successful in-service experience with
firestop systems or completion of manufacturer’s certified product installation training. c. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its firestopping products to the Contractor or to an
Installer engaged by the Contractor does not itself confer qualification on the buyer. d. Any firm that has been approved by FM according to FM 4991, “Approval of Firestopping Contractors,”
shall be acceptable as well. 2. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of firestopping systems in project to a single qualified installer. 3. Single Source Responsibility:
Obtain fire-resistive joint systems for kind of joint and construction condition indicated from a single manufacturer. 4. Provide firestopping products containing no detectable asbestos
as determined by the method specified in 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart F, Appendix A, Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy" or ASTM D6620. 5. Do not use any product containing solvents
that require hazardous waste disposal or which after curing dissolve in water. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Fire-resistive joint systems shall comply with the following requirements:
1. Fire-resistive joint system tests shall be performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Fire-resistive joint systems shall be identical
to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Fire-resistive joint system
products shall bear classification marking of qualified testing agency. b. Fire-resistive joint systems shall correspond to those indicated by reference to designations listed by the
following: 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 2) Intertek ETL SEMKO in its "Directory of Listed Building Products." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver firestopping
undamaged undamaged products to project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer; date of
manufacturer; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project; curing time; and mixing instructions for
multicomponent materials. 1. Comply with recommended procedures, precautions, or remedies described in material safety data sheets as applicable. B. Store and handle firestopping materials
to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. C. Do not use damaged or expired materials. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental
Conditions: Do not install firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost,
condensation, or other causes. B. Ventilation: Ventilate firestopping per firestopping manufacturers' instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced air circulation.
C. Existing Conditions: Verify the condition of the substrates and correct unsatisfactory conditions before installing products. Follow manufacturers’ instructions.
211118.00 078446-5 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS D. Protection: Provide masking and drop cloths to prevent contamination of adjacent surfaces, if required. 1.8 SEQUENCING A. Coordinate
construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed according to specified requirements. B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire-resistive joint
systems. C. Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven days in advance of fire-resistive joint system installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the manufacturers specified. 1. Hilti Inc. 2. Specified Technologies,
Inc., (STI) 3. 3M Fire Protection Products 4. The RectorSeal Corporation 5. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group 6. Nelson Firestop Products 7. A/D Fire Protection Systems
8. Johns Manville 9. USG Corp. 10. NUCO Inc. 11. Passive Fire Protection Partners B. B. Products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed
the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product. The “Substitution Request Form” and complete technical data for evaluation must accompany requests for A/E’s
approval. All materials for evaluation must be received by the Project Manager and Specification Department at least 10 days prior to bid due date. Additional approved manufacturers
will be issued by Addendum. 2.2 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS A. Where required, provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according
to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which fire-resistive joint systems are installed.
Fire-resistive joint systems shall accommodate building movements without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases. B. Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated
Construction: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079: 1. Joints include those installed in or between fire-resistance-rated walls, floor
or floor/ceiling assemblies, and roofs or roof/ceiling assemblies. 2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of construction they will join. C. Joints
at Exterior Curtain-Wall/Floor Intersections: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with rating determined by ASTM E 119 based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch
wg (2.49 Pa) or ASTM E 2307. 1. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the floor assembly.
211118.00 078446-6 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS D. Joints in or between Smoke Barriers, Smoke Partitions, and partitions that enclose incidental use areas – that are not required to
be fire-resistance-rated due to the presence of automatic fire-extinguishing systems – but are still required to resist the passage of smoke: Provide fireresistive joint systems with
ratings determined per UL 2079. 1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/ft (0.00775 cu. m/s x m) of joint at 0.30 inch wg (74.7 Pa) at both ambient and elevated temperatures. E. Exposed Fire-Resistive
Joint Systems: Provide products with flame-spread and smokedeveloped indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. F. VOC Content: Provide fire-resistive
joint systems that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant
Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. G. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and
forming materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved
by the qualified testing agency for systems indicated. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2
PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire-resistive joint systems to comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions
and the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of fill materials. 2. Clean joint substrates to produce
clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from
concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers
to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire-resistive joint system from contacting
adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove
stains. Remove tape as
soon as possible without disturbing fire-resistive joint system's seal with substrates. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's
written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indic
ated. 211118.00 078446-7 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in position
needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible
forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of fire-resistive joint system. C. Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques
to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to achieve fireresistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply fill materials so
they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are
flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify fire-resistive joint systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to
and within 6 inches of joint edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove or penetrate joint system. Use mechanical fasteners or selfadhering-type labels with adhesives
capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "Warning -Fire-Resistive Joint System -Do Not
Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's
name. 6. Installer's name. B. Marking and Identification: In addition to identification of firestop systems, fire walls, fire barriers, fire partitions, smoke barriers and smoke partitions
or any other wall required to have protected openings or penetrations shall be effectively and permanently identified with signs or stenciling. Such identification shall: 1. Be located
in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling, or attic spaces; and 2. Be repeated at intervals not exceeding 30 feet measured horizontally along the wall or partition; and 3. Include
lettering not less than 3 inches in height, incorporating the suggested wording: "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER – PROTECT ALL OPENINGS". Other wording must be pre-approved by Authorities
having Jurisdiction. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Where deficiencies are found or
fire-resistive joint systems are damaged or removed due to testing, repair or replace fire-resistive joint systems so they comply with requirements. C. Proceed with enclosing fire-resistive
joint systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Clean off excess fill materials
adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers and that do not damage materials
in which joints occur.
211118.00 078446-8 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure fireresistive joint systems are without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire-resistive joint
systems immediately and install new materials to produce fireresistive joint systems complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 078446
211118.00 079200-1 JOINT SEALANTS SECTION 079200 -JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes joint sealants for the applications indicated in the Joint-Sealant
Schedule at the end of Part 3. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 03 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete” for sealing of joints in slabs-on-grade or below grade. 2. Division
04 Section "Unit Masonry" for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and gaskets. 3. Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for sealing joints in fire-resistancerated
construction. 4. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in pavements, walkways, and curbing. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's
authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project, when required by terms of warranty. B. Source Limitations: Obtain
each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.3 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty:
Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section
within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric
sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within
specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric
joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and
compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.
3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.
211118.00 079200-2 JOINT SEALANTS PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles.
B. Products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product. The “Substitution
Request Form” and complete technical data for evaluation must accompany requests for A/E’s approval. All materials for evaluation must be received by the Project Manager and Specification
Department at least 10 days prior to bid due date. Additional approved manufacturers will be issued by Addendum. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings,
and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based
on testing and field experience. B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. C. Liquid-Applied
Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications
for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. 1. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously
immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated. D. Stain-Test-Response
Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained
porous joint substrates indicated for Project. E. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food,
provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600. F. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified, provide products with the capability, when tested
for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width existing at the time of installation and remain
in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses indicated. G. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by A/E from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790 or NS Parking Structure Sealant. b. GE Advanced Materials -Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. c. Bondaflex/May National Associates,
Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 290 or Bondaflex Sil 728 NS.
211118.00 079200-3 JOINT SEALANTS d. Pecora Corporation; 301 NS, 311 NS, 890NST, or 890FTS. e. Sika Corporation; Sikasil WS-290 or Sikasil 728 NS. f. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1
or Spectrem 800. B. Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide one of the following: a. BASF Building Systems; Omniseal 50. b. Dow Corning Corporation; 756 SMS, 791, 795, or 995. c. GE Advanced Materials -Silicones; SilGlaze II SCS2800,
SilPruf NB SCS9000, or SilPruf SCS2000. d. Bondaflex/May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 295. e. Pecora Corporation; 864NST, 895NST, or 898. f. Polymeric Systems, Inc., Whitford
Worldwide; PSI-641. g. Sika Corporation; Sikasil WS-295. h. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 2 or 3. C. Multiple-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type
M, Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Pecora Corporation; 890FTS-TXTR. b. Sika Corporation; Sikasil
WS-295 FPS. c. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 4-TS. D. Single-Component, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for
Use T. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790 or NS Parking Structure Sealant. b. Bondaflex/May National
Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 728 NS. c. Pecora Corporation; 301 NS or 311 NS. d. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 800. e. Sika Corporation; SikaSil 728 NS. E. Single-Component, Pourable,
Traffic-Grade, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 100/50, for Use T. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 890-SL or SL Parking Structure Sealant. b. Bondaflex/May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 728 SG or Sil 728 SL. c. Pecora Corporation; 300 SL or 310
SL. d. d. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 900 SL. e. Sika Corporation; SikaSil 728 SL. F. Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Acid-Curing or Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM
C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Building Systems; Omniplus. b. Dow Corning
Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant. c. GE Advanced Materials -Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700. d. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 100 WF. e. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200
Sanitary. f. Pecora Corporation; 898. g. Sherwin-Williams; White Lightning Silicone Ultra Low Odor All Purpose Sealant. 2.4 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane
Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic
NP1, Sonalastic TX1, or Sonolastic Ultra.
211118.00 079200-4 JOINT SEALANTS b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 900, 915, or 916 Textured. c. Pacific Polymers Division, ITW; Elasto-Thane 230. d. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I-XL. e.
Polymeric Systems, Inc., Whitford Worldwide; Flexiprene 1000. f. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex -1a. g. Tremco Incorporated; Dymonic or Vulkem 116. h. Henkel
(fka OSI); EP-1000. i. Sherwin-Williams; Stampede 1 Polyurethane Sealant. B. Single-Component, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920. Type S, Grade NS, Class 25,
for Use T. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP1 or Sonolastic Ultra. b. Pacific Polymers Division,
ITW; Elasto-Thane 230. c. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex -1a. d. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 116. e. Sherwin-Williams; Stampede 1 Polyurethane Sealant. C.
Single-Component, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one
of the following: a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic SL 1. b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 950. c. Pecora Corporation; NR-201. d. Polymeric Systems, Inc., Whitford Worldwide; Flexiprene
952. e. Sika Corporation. Construction Products Division; Sikaflex-1c SL. f. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 45. g. Sherwin-Williams; Stampede 1SL Polyurethane Sealant. D. Multi-component,
Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50, for USE NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requiremnents. a. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol II b. Polymeric
Systems, Inc., Whitford Worldwide; PSI-275. c. Tremco Incorporated; Dymeric 240 or Dymeric 240 FC. E. Multi-component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class
25, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP 2. b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 500. c. Pacific
Polymers International, Inc.; Elasto-Thane 227 High Shore Type II, Elasto-Thane 227 R Type II or Elasto-Thane 227 Type II. d. Pecora Corporation; Dynatred. e. Sika Corporation, Construction
Products Division; Sikaflex – 2c NS or Sikaflex – 2c NS EZ Mix. f. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 227. F. Multi-component, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type
M, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP 2. b. LymTal International,
Inc.; Iso-Flex 885 SG. c. Pacific Polymers International, Inc.; Elasto-Thane 227 High Shore Type II or Elasto-Thane 227 Type II. d. Pecora Corporation; Dynatred. e. Sika Corporation,
Construction Products Division; Sikaflex – 2c NS or Sikaflex – 2c NS EZ Mix. f. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 227.
211118.00 079200-5 JOINT SEALANTS G. Immersible, Single-Component, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Uses T and I. 1. Products:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP1. b. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex – 1a. c.
Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 116. H. Immersible Multi-component, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, for Uses T and I. 1. Products:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP 2. b. LymTal International, Inc.; Iso-Flex 885 SG. c. Sika Corporation;
Sikaflex 2c NS. d. Pecora Corporation; Dynatred. e. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 227. I. Immersible Multi-component Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M,
Grade P, Class 25, for Use T and I. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of of the following: a. LymTal International, Inc.; Iso-Flex 880 GB. b. Sika Corporation;
Sikaflex 2c SL. c. Tremco Incorporated Vulkem 245. 2.5 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. 1. Products:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac. b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 600. c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex
AC600 or Bondaflex Sil-A 700. d. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. e. Schnee-Morehead, Division, ITW; SM 8200. f. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834. g. Sherwin-Williams; 950A Siliconized Acrylic
Latex Caulk. 2.6 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS A. Preformed Foam Sealant: Manufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, open-cell foam sealant that is manufactured from high-density urethane
foam impregnated with a nondrying, water-repellent agent; is factory produced in precompressed sizes in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated; is coated on one side with a
pressure-sensitive adhesive and covered with protective wrapping; develops a watertight and airtight seal when compressed to the degree specified by manufacturer; and complies with the
following: 1. Products: a. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd.; Emseal 25V. b. Willseal USA, LLC; Willseal 150 or 250. c. Dayton Superior Specialty Chemicals; Polytite B/Polytite Standard. d.
Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Polyseal. e. Schul International, Inc.; Sealtite or Sealtite 50N. 2. Properties: Permanently elastic, mildew resistant, nonmigratory, nonstaining, and
compatible with joint substrates and other joint sealants. a. Density: Manufacturer's standard. 2.7 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that
are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field
experience and laboratory testing.
211118.00 079200-6 JOINT SEALANTS B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer
for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings:
Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F. Provide
products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. D. Bond-Breaker
Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at
back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide selfadhesive tape where applicable. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant
manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous
Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates
and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible
with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting jointsealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written
instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except
for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents,
water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean,
sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free
compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. d. Exterior insulation and finish system. 3. Remove laitance
and form-release agents from concrete.
211118.00 079200-7 JOINT SEALANTS 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with
adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint
substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant
manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where
required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant
smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation
instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. 1. Mix and apply multi-component sealants in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
2. Apply joint sealants prior to applying penetrating water repellents. Joint sealants need to cure 7 days prior to application of penetrating masonry sealers. B. Sealant Installation
Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. 1. Interior joints that require caulking
are to be caulked with the specified caulking compound, unless noted otherwise. 2. Exterior joints that require sealant are to be filled with one of the specified sealants even though
the note may read "Caulked". 3. Joints to be filled shall be thoroughly dry and free from dust, dirt, oil, and grease at the time of application of caulks or sealants. 4. Expansion Expansion
and control joints in exterior walls shall have the joint filler material built into the wall, or between wall and slab, at the time of construction. 5. Masking: Metal shall be masked
with masking tape, as well as other surfaces where it’s required to prevent the sealant smearing the adjacent surface. Upon completion of the caulking, remove the tape. C. Install sealant
backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths
that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent
sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used
between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they
directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths
that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
211118.00 079200-8 JOINT SEALANTS F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified
below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant
from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. Avoid “over-tooling”
or “stretching” sealant material during application. 3. Dry tool only, no wet tooling permitted. 4. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193. 6. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure 8C in ASTM
C 1193. a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints. G. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing
protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, producing seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures
where expansion of sealant requires acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess
sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which
joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations
or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged
or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Joint-Sealant Application (JS-A):
Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and non-traffic horizontal surfaces. 1. Joint locations such as, but not limited to: a. Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete. b.
Joints between architectural precast concrete units. c. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. 1) Provide joint sealants slightly darker than the adjacent masonry units. Provide
multiple colors as may be required for match. 2) Provide expanding foam secondary sealant where a 2 inch building expansion joint is indicated. d. Joints in dimensional stone cladding,
limestone, and cast stone. e. Perimeter joints between masonry, concrete, or stone and frames of doors, windows, storefronts, louvers, and similar openings. f. Lintels and shelf angles
to masonry construction. g. Bed joints between stone and masonry. h. Butt joints between metal panels. i. Control and expansion joints in ceiling/soffit and similar overhead surfaces.
j. Exterior joints between dissimilar materials where the joining of the two surfaces leaves a gap between the meeting materials or components as may be dictated by various methods of
construction to make building watertight.
211118.00 079200-9 JOINT SEALANTS 2. Provide one of the following acceptable sealants as approved by manufacturer for substrates and uses indicated: a. Silicone Joint Sealant: Single-Component,
Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS,
Class 100/50, for Use NT, or Multiple-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT. b. Preformed Joint Sealant: Preformed
foam sealant. 3. Color: Custom color to match A/E’s sample of adjacent materials. B. Joint-Sealant Application (JS-B): Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 1. Joint locations
such as, but not limited to: a. Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. 2. Provide one of the
following acceptable sealants as approved by manufacturer for substrates and uses indicated: a. Silicone Joint Sealant: Single-Component, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Neutral-Curing Silicone
Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use T or Single-Component, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade P, Class
100/50, for Use T. b. Urethane Sealant: Single-Component, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T or multi-component, nonsag,
traffic grade, Class 50, or multi-component, nonsag, Class 25. 3. Color: As selected by A/E from manufacturer’s full range of colors. C. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in
horizontal traffic surfaces subject to water immersion (JS-C). 1. Joint locations: a. Joints in pedestrian plazas. b. Joints in swimming pool decks. c. Joints at trench drains. d. Other
joints as indicated. 2. Urethane Joint Sealant: Immersible, single component, nonsag, traffic grade, immersible, single component, pourable, traffic grade, immersible, multi-component,
nonsag, traffic grade, or immersible, multi-component, pourable, traffic grade. D. Joint-Sealant Application (JS-D): Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 1. Joint locations
such as, but not limited to: a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Perimeter of floor slabs or concrete curbs which abut vertical surfaces. c. Areas around all piping
systems that penetrate the slab or foundation walls below grade (utility trenches, electrical conduits, plumbing penetrations, etc.). 2. Provide the following acceptable sealants as
approved by manufacturer for substrates and uses indicated: a. Silicone Joint Sealant: Single-component, nonsag, traffic grade, neutral curing. b. Urethane Joint Sealant: Single-Component,
Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T or multicomponent, nonsag, traffic grade, Class 50x, or multi-component, nonsag, Class
25. 3. Color: As selected by A/E from manufacturer’s full range of colors. E. Joint-Sealant Application (JS-E): Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces,
subject to movement, unless otherwise noted. 1. Joint locations such as, but not limited to: a. Control joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Joints in precast beams
and planks. c. Interior joints where interior partitions meet exterior walls of dissimilar materials and components. 2. Provide the following acceptable sealants as approved by manufacturer
for substrates and uses indicated.
211118.00 079200-10 JOINT SEALANTS a. Urethane Joint Sealant: Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT or multi-component,
nonsag, Class 25. 3. Color: Custom to match A/E’s sample. F. Joint-Sealant Application (JS-F): Interior joints in vertical surfaces subject to abuse and movement. 1. Joint locations
such as, but not limited to: a. Vertical joints, including control joints and joints between masonry and structural support members, on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry walls
and partitions. 2. Provide the following acceptable sealants as approved by manufacturer for substrates and use indicated: a. Urethane Joint Sealant: Single-Component, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade,
Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T. 3. Color: Custom to match A/E’s sample. G. Joint-Sealant Application (JS-G): Interior joints in vertical surfaces
not subject to movement. 1. Joint locations such as, but not limited to: a. Interior perimeter joints of exterior openings. b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames
of interior doors, windows, and elevator entrances. c. Interior joints between dissimilar materials where a gap is created where materials meet, unless otherwise noted. 2. Provide the
following acceptable sealants as approved by manufacturer for substrates and uses indicated: a. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C834, Type OP, Grade
NF. 3. Color: As selected by A/E from manufacturer’s full range. H. Joint-Sealant Application (JS-H): Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic
surfaces. 1. Joint locations such as, but not limited to: a. Interior joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. b. Joints between countertops and backsplashes
and walls. c. Exterior and interior joints in vertical and horizontal surfaces of potable water storage areas. d. For interior joints in vertical and horizontal surfaces where incidental
incidental food contact may occur. 2. Provide the following acceptable sealants as approved by manufacturer for substrates and uses indicated: a. Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component,
Acid-Curing, or Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT. 1) For potable water storage sealant shall be certified by National Sanitation
Foundation as conforming to the requirements of NSF Standard 61 – Drinking Water System Components – Health Effect. 2) For surfaces where incidental food contact may occur sealant must
comply with United States Department of Agriculture (USDA) guidelines for incidental food contact with cured sealant. 3. Color: As selected by A/E from manufacturer’s full range of colors.
I. Joint-Sealant Application (JS-I): Interior or exterior joints in vertical surfaces between laps in fabrications of sheet metal. 1. Provide one of the following acceptable sealants
as approved by manufacturer for substrates and uses indicated: a. Urethane Joint Sealant: Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for
Use NT or Single-Component, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T.
211118.00 079200-11 JOINT SEALANTS 2. Color: Not applicable. J. Joint-Sealant Application (JS-J): Exterior joints under metal thresholds and saddles or as bedding sealant for sheet metal
flashing and frames of metal or wood. 1. Provide one of the following acceptable sealants as approved by manufacturer for substrates and use indicated. a. Silicone Joint Sealant: Single-Component,
Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT or Multiple-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C920,
Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT. b. Urethane Joint Sealant: Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT, Single-Component,
Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T. 2. Color: Not applicable. END OF SECTION 079200
211118.00 083613-1 SECTIONAL DOORS SECTION 083613 -SECTIONAL DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes electrically operated sectional doors. B. Related Sections: 1. Division
05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports. 2. Division 13 Section “Metal Building Systems” for jambs and framing. 3. Division 26 Sections for electrical service
and connections for powered operators and accessories. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Sectional doors shall meet performance requirements specified without failure
due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction and without requiring temporary installation of reinforcing components. B. Delegated Design:
Design sectional doors, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. C. Structural
Performance: Exterior sectional doors shall withstand the effects of gravity loads, and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI
7. 1. Wind Loads: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 25 lbf/sq. ft., acting inward and outward, unless otherwise noted. a. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph, unless otherwise noted. b. Importance
Factor: As indicated. c. Exposure Category: As indicated. 2. Deflection Limits: Design sectional doors to withstand design wind loads without evidencing permanent deformation or disengagement
of door components. Deflection of door in horizontal position (open) shall not exceed 1/120 of the door width. D. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate not more than indicated when tested according
to ASTM E 283 or DASMA 105. 1. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate of 0.08 cfm/sq. ft. at 15 and 25 mph. E. Operation Cycles: Provide sectional door components and operators capable of operating
for not less than number of cycles indicated for each door. One operation cycle is complete when a door is opened from the closed position to the fully open position and and returned
to the closed position. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and
location and size of each field connection. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared
on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Flat Door Sections: 6 inches square.
211118.00 083613-2 SECTIONAL DOORS C. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Product Data: For each type and size of sectional door and accessory. Include the following: a. Construction
details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profile door sections, and finishes. b. Rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics,
and furnished accessories. 2. Delegated-Design Submittal: For sectional doors indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. a. Summary of forces and loads on walls and jambs. b. Detail fabrication and assembly of seismic restraints.
3. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. D. Closeout Submittals: 1. Maintenance Data: For sectional doors to include in maintenance manuals. 2. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this
Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain sectional doors from single source from single manufacturer. 1. Obtain operators and controls from sectional door manufacturer. C. Electrical Components,
Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. Standard for Sectional Doors:
Fabricate sectional doors to comply with DASMA 102 unless otherwise indicated. E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation
Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" and ICC/ANSI A117.1. 1.5
WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sectional doors that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Faulty operation
of hardware. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use; rust through. d. Delamination of exterior or interior facing materials.
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components
that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
211118.00 083613-3 SECTIONAL DOORS PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the manufacturers specified.
1. Clopay Building Products, Inc., a Griffon Company 2. Raynor 3. Wayne-Dalton Corp. 4. Overhead Door Corp. 5. C.H.I. Overhead Doors 6. Martin Door Manufacturing B. Products of other
manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product. Requests for A/E’s approval
must be accompanied by the “Substitution Request Form” and complete technical data for evaluation. All materials for evaluation must be received by the Project Manager and Specification
Department at least 10 days prior to bid due date. Additional approved manufacturers will be issued by Addendum. 2.2 STEEL DOOR SECTIONS A. Exterior Section Faces and Frames: Fabricate
from zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet, complying with ASTM A 653/653/A 653M, with indicated zinc coating and thickness. 1. Fabricate section faces from
single sheets to provide sections not more than 24 inches high and of indicated thickness. Roll horizontal meeting edges to a continuous, interlocking, keyed, rabbeted, shiplap, or tongue-in-groove
weathertight seal, with a reinforcing flange return. 2. For insulated doors, provide sections with continuous thermal-break construction, separating the exterior and interior faces of
door. B. Section Ends and Intermediate Stiles: Enclose open ends of sections with channel end stiles formed from galvanized-steel sheet not less than 0.064-inch-nominal coated thickness
and welded to door section. Provide intermediate stiles formed from not less than 0.064-inch thick galvanized-steel sheet, cut to door section profile, and welded in place. Space stiles
not more than 48 inches apart. C. Reinforce bottom section with a continuous channel or angle conforming to bottom-section profile and allowing installation of astragal. D. Reinforce
sections with continuous horizontal and diagonal reinforcement, as required to stiffen door and for wind loading. Provide galvanized-steel bars, struts, trusses, or strip steel, formed
to depth and bolted or welded in place. Ensure that reinforcement does not obstruct vision lites. E. Provide reinforcement for hardware attachment. F. Foamed-in-Place Thermal Insulation:
Insulate interior of steel sections with door manufacturer's standard CFC-free polyurethane insulation, foamed in place to completely fill interior of section and pressure bonded to
face sheets to prevent delamination under wind load, and with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84. Enclose insulation
completely within steel sections that incorporate the following interior facing material, with no exposed insulation: 1. Interior Facing Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled,
commercial steel (CS) sheet, complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with indicated thickness. G. Fabricate sections so finished door assembly is rigid and aligned, with tight hairline joints
and free of warp, twist, and deformation.
211118.00 083613-4 SECTIONAL DOORS 2.3 TRACKS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES A. Tracks: Manufacturer's standard, galvanized-steel track system of configuration indicated, sized for door
size and weight, designed for lift type indicated and clearances shown on Drawings, and complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M for minimum G60 zinc coating. Provide complete track assembly
including brackets, bracing, and reinforcement for rigid support of ballbearing roller guides for required door type and size. Slot vertical sections of track spaced 2 inches apart for
door-drop safety device. Slope tracks at proper angle from vertical or design tracks to ensure tight closure at jambs when door unit is closed. B. Track Reinforcement and Supports: Galvanized-steel
track reinforcement and support members, complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M and ASTM A 123/A 123M. Secure, reinforce, and support tracks as required for door size and weight to provide strength
and rigidity without sag, sway, and vibration during opening and closing of doors. 1. Vertical Track Assembly: Track with continuous reinforcing angle attached to track and attached
to wall with jamb brackets. 2. Horizontal Track Assembly: Track with continuous reinforcing angle attached to track and supported at points from curve in track to end of track by laterally
braced attachments to overhead structural members. 3. All supplementary framing to support track assembly from the building structure shall be provided as part of Sectional Door work.
C. Weatherseals: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping gaskets of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene fitted to bottom and top of sectional door unless
otherwise indicated. D. Windows: Manufacturer's standard window units of type and size indicated and in arrangement shown. Set glazing in vinyl, rubber, or neoprene glazing channel for
metal-framed doors and elastic glazing compound for wood doors, as required. Provide removable stops of same material as door-section frames. E. Exhaust Ports: Galvanized steel or Aluminum
with hinged cover. 2.4 HARDWARE A. General: Provide heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant hardware, with hot-dip galvanized, stainlesssteel, or other corrosion-resistant fasteners, to suit
door type. B. Hinges: Heavy-duty, galvanized-steel hinges of not less than 0.079-inch nominal coated thickness at each end stile and at each intermediate stile, according to manufacturer's
written recommendations for door size. Attach hinges to door sections through stiles and rails with bolts and lock nuts or lock washers and nuts. Use rivets or self-tapping fasteners
where access to nuts is not possible. Provide double-end hinges where required, for doors over 16 feet wide unless otherwise recommended by door manufacturer. C. Rollers: Heavy-duty
rollers with steel ball-bearings in case-hardened steel races, mounted with varying projections to suit slope of track. Extend roller shaft through both hinges where double hinges are
required. Provide 3-inch diameter roller tires for 3-inch wide track and 2-inch diameter roller tires for 2-inch wide track. D. Push/Pull Handles: For push-up or emergency-operated doors,
provide galvanized-steel lifting handles on each side of door. 2.5 COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM A. Torsion Spring: Counterbalance mechanism consisting of adjustable-tension torsion springs
fabricated from steel-spring wire complying with ASTM A 229/A 229M, mounted on torsion shaft made of steel tube or solid steel. Provide springs designed for number of operation cycles
indicated.
211118.00 083613-5 SECTIONAL DOORS B. Weight Counterbalance: Counterbalance mechanism consisting of filled pipe weights that move vertically in a galvanized-steel weight pipe. Connect
pipe weights with cable to weight-cable drums mounted on torsion shaft made of steel tube or solid steel. C. Cable Drums and Shaft for Doors: Cast-aluminum or gray-iron casting cable
drums mounted on torsion shaft and grooved to receive door-lifting cables as door is raised. Mount counterbalance mechanism with manufacturer's standard ball-bearing brackets at each
end of torsion shaft. Provide one additional midpoint bracket for shafts up to 16 feet long and two additional brackets at one-third points to support shafts more than 16 feet long unless
closer spacing is recommended by door manufacturer. D. Cables: Galvanized-steel lifting cables with cable safety factor of at least 7 to 1. E. Cable Safety Device: Include a spring-loaded
steel or spring-loaded bronze cam mounted to bottom door roller assembly on each side and designed to automatically stop door if either lifting cable breaks. F. Bracket: Provide anchor
support bracket as required to connect stationary end of spring to the wall and to level the shaft and prevent sag. G. Provide a spring bumper at each horizontal track to cushion door
at end of opening operation. 2.6 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS A. General: Electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door and "operation
cycles" requirement specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, remote-control stations, control
devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation. 1. Comply with NFPA 70. 2. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1B, unless otherwise
noted, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6 at exterior and high-humidity locations, where indicated; with NFPA 70, Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V ac or dc. B. Usage Classification: Electric
operator and components capable of operating for not less than number of cycles per hour indicated for each door. C. Door-Operator Type: Unit consisting of electric motor, gears, pulleys,
belts, sprockets, chains, and controls needed to operate door and meet required usage classification. 1. Jackshaft, Side Mounted: Jackshaft operator mounted on the inside front wall
on right or left side of door and connected to torsion shaft with an adjustable coupling or drive chain. D. Electric Motors: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service
factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements specified in Division 11 Section "Common Motor Requirements for Equipment" unless otherwise indicated. 1. Electrical Characteristics:
a. Phase 1) Single phase, provide where capacitor-start type motor is 1/2 hp or less. 2) Polyphase, provide where motor is greater than 1/2 hp or required by door manufacturer. b. Volts:
120 V. Coordinate wiring requirements with building electrical system c. Hertz: 60. 2. Motor Type and Controller: Reversible motor and controller (disconnect switch) for motor exposure
indicated. 3. Motor Size: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at a speed not less
than 8 in./sec. and not more than 12 in./sec., without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor. 4. Operating Controls, Controllers (Disconnect Switches), Wiring Devices, and Wiring:
Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.
211118.00 083613-6 SECTIONAL DOORS 5. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors and other electrical devices with building electrical system and each location
where installed. 6. Use adjustable motor-mounting bases for belt-driven operators. E. Limit Switches: Equip each motorized door with adjustable switches interlocked with motor controls
and set to automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions. F. Obstruction Detection Device: Equip motorized door with indicated external automatic safety sensor capable
of protecting full width of door opening. Activation of device immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. 1. Photoelectric Sensor: Manufacturer's standard system designed to
detect an obstruction in door opening without contact between door and obstruction. a. Self-Monitoring Type: Designed to interface with door operator control circuit to detect damage
to or disconnection of sensor device. When self-monitoring feature is activated, door closes closes only with sustained pressure on close button. G. Remote-Control Station: 1. Interior
units, full-guarded, flush-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1B enclosure, “open/close” push button switch. a. Location: Interior at each door. H. Emergency
Manual Operation: Equip each electrically powered door with capability for emergency manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for door operation does not exceed 25
lbf. I. Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operator with hand-operated disconnect mechanism for automatically engaging manual operator and releasing brake for emergency manual
operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount mechanism so it is accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent
motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged. J. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency
manual operation. K. Radio-Control System: Consisting of the following: 1. Multifunction remote control, provide 2 remote control units per operator. 2. Remote antenna and mounting kit.
2.7 DOOR ASSEMBLY A. Steel Sectional Door: Sectional door formed with hinged sections. B. Operation Cycles: Not less than 50,000. C. R-Value: Not less than 14.0 deg F x h x sq.ft./Btu.
D. Steel Sections: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet with G60 zinc coating. 1. Section Thickness: As required to meet performance requirements. 2. Exterior-Face, Steel Sheet Thickness:
As required to meet performance requirements. a. Surface: Flat. 3. Insulation: Foamed in place. 4. Interior Facing Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet of manufacturer's recommended
thickness to meet performance requirements nominal coated thickness. E. Track Configuration: Standard-lift track. F. Weatherseals: Fitted to bottom and top and around entire perimeter
of door.
211118.00 083613-7 SECTIONAL DOORS G. Windows: Approximately 24 by 11 inches , with square corners, and spaced apart the approximate distance as indicated on Drawings; in one row at
height indicated on Drawings; installed with glazing of the following type: 1. Clear Polycarbonate Plastic: 3-mm-thick, transparent, fire-retardant, UV-resistant, polycarbonate sheet
manufactured by extrusion process. H. Exhaust Port: Aluminum, with hinged cover. Three locations in each door to match existing. I. Roller-Tire Material: Manufacturer's standard. J.
Counterbalance Type: Torsion spring or Weight counterbalance as standard with manufacturer. K. Electric Door Operator: 1. Usage Classification: Heavy duty, 60 to 90 cycles per hour.
2. Operator Type: Jackshaft, side mounted. 3. Motor Exposure: Exterior, dusty, wet, or humid. 4. Emergency Manual Operation: Push-up or chain type. 5. Obstruction-Detection Device: Automatic
photoelectric sensor. 6. Remote-Control Station: Interior. 7. Other Equipment: Radio-control system. L. Door Finish: 1. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coated Finish: Color and gloss as selected
by A/E from manufacturer's full range. 2. Finish of Interior Facing Material: Match finish of exterior section face. 2.8 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes
Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.9 STEEL AND GALVANIZED-STEEL
FINISHES A. Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for
cleaning, pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine locations of electrical connections. C. Proceed with installation only
after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install sectional doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers,
and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified.
211118.00 083613-8 SECTIONAL DOORS B. Tracks: 1. Fasten vertical track assembly to opening jambs
and framing, spaced not more than 24 inches apart. 2. Hang horizontal track assembly from structural overhead framing with angles or channel hangers attached to framing by welding or
bolting, or both. Provide sway bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcement as required for rigid installation of track and dooroperating equipment. 3. Repair galvanized coating on tracks
according to ASTM A 780. C. Accessibility: Install sectional doors, switches, and controls along accessible routes in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility. 3.3 STARTUP
SERVICES A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors
operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion. B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer. C. Adjust doors and seals to provide weathertight fit around
entire perimeter. D. Align and adjust motors, pulleys, belts, sprockets, chains, and controls according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Touch-up Painting: Immediately after
welding galvanized materials, clean welds and abraded galvanized surfaces and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative
to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain sectional doors. END OF SECTION 083613
211118.00 099123-1 INTERIOR PAINTING SECTION 099123 -INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on
the following interior substrates: 1. Steel. 2. Galvanized metal. 3. Cotton or canvas insulation covering. 4. ASJ insulation covering. B. Work under this contract shall also include,
but not necessarily be limited to the following: 1. Surface preparation of substrates as required for acceptance of painting, including cleaning, small crack repair, patching, caulking,
and making good surfaces and areas to the limits defined under Master Painters Institute (MPI) preparation requirements. a. Preparation and testing of existing painted surfaces, indicated
to be repainted to accommodate new work, shall be performed as work of this Section. b. Specific pre-treatments noted herein or specified in the MPI Repainting Manual. c. Sealing/priming
surfaces for repainting in accordance with MPI Repainting Manual requirements. 2. Surface preparation and prime painting surfaces for wall coverings prior to installation in accordance
with MPI and wall covering manufacturer’s requirements. 3. Priming (except where pre-primed with an approved primer under other sections of work) and painting of structural steel, miscellaneous
metal, ornamental metal and primed steel equipment. 4. Priming and back-priming of wood materials as noted herein or specified in the MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual.
5. Painting of all semi-concealed areas (e.g. inside of light troughs and valances, behind grilles, and projecting edges above and below sight lines). 6. Painting of exposed-to-view
fire suppression, plumbing, HVAC, electrical, communication, and electronic safety and security. C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating
parts, and labels. 1. Concealed surfaces including walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. Foundation spaces b. Furred areas c. Ceiling plenums d. Utility
tunnels e. Pipe spaces f. Duct shafts, unless otherwise noted g. Elevator shafts 2. Finished metal surfaces include the following: a. Anodized aluminum b. Stainless steel c. Chromium
plate d. Copper and copper alloys e. Bronze and brass 3. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment. a. Valve and damper operators (including valve stems). b. Linkages
c. Sensing devices d. Motor and fan shafts 4. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature
plates.
211118.00 099123-2 INTERIOR PAINTING D. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section. 2.
Division 09 Section “High Performance Coatings” for special finishes. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat
indicated. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample
for location and application area. B. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 2. Product List: For each product indicated, include
the following: a. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. b. Printout of current "MPI Approved
Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted. 1) Submittals without MPI numbers may be rejected as nonresponsive by A/E. 1.3 QUALITY
ASSURANCE A. MPI Standards: 1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List," unless otherwise noted. 2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply
with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated. 1.4 SCHEDULING A. Schedule painting operations to prevent disruption
of and by other trades. B. Schedule painting operations in occupied facilities to prevent disruption of occupants in and about the building. Paint shall be carried out after facility
working hours or on weekends in accordance with Owner’s operating requirements. Schedule work such that painted surfaces will have dried before occupants are affected. Obtain written
authorization from CM or Owner for changes in work schedule. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the manufacturers on the current “MPI Approved Products List”. B. Products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements
and functional qualities of the specified product. The “Substitution Request Form” and complete technical data for evaluation must accompany requests for A/E’s approval. All materials
for evaluation must be received by the Project Manager and Specification Department at least 10 days prior to bid due date. Additional approved manufacturers will be issued by Addendum.
1. Indicate reason for not being on the MPI “Approved Products List” with submittal.
211118.00 099123-3 INTERIOR PAINTING 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products
List." B. Material Compatibility: Paint materials selected for coating systems for each type of surface shall be the product of a single manufacturer. 1. Provide materials for use within
each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field
experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. Paint materials
and equipment shall be compatible in use; finish coats shall be compatible with prime coats; prime coats shall be compatible with the surface to be coated; tools and equipment shall
be compatible with the coating to be applied. 1. Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish
information on characteristic of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. D. Thinners, when used, shall be only those thinners recommended for that purpose by the manufacturer
of the material to be thinned. E. All materials used shall be lead-and mercury-free and VOC-compliant with local authorities with jurisdiction. F. Chemical Components of Field-Applied
Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, unless more stringent requirements are required by authorities with jurisdiction,
exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) and the following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply
to primers or finishes that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: VOC content
of not not more than 150 g/L. G. By submitting a proposal, the Contractor has reviewed the bidding documents with the painting subcontractor and accepts the Specifications as sufficient
to produce approved painting results. If the painting subcontractor contends that the materials or number of coats specified will not produce satisfactory results, he shall so notify
the A/E directly or indirectly through a Bidding Contractor 10 days prior to receipt of bids for proper action. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions,
with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Verify suitability of substrates, including
surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. C. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1.
Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.
211118.00 099123-4 INTERIOR PAINTING 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable
to substrates indicated. B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or
weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall
items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. 2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating,
or nomenclature plates. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Schedule cleaning
and painting application so dust and other contaminates from cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces. 2. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible
primers or provide barrier coats as required to produce paint systems indicated. Notify A/E in writing about anticipated problems using the specified finish coats materials with substrates
primed by others. D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer, but not less than the
following: 1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." E. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop
paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces. F. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease
and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.
G. Cotton or Canvas Insulation Covering Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according
to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar
exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable
or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, nonspecular black
paint. 5. Omit first coat (primer) on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touch-up painted, unless otherwise indicated. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat material to
surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. Allow sufficient
time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and
application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat.
211118.00 099123-5 INTERIOR PAINTING 2. Slightly vary the color of succeeding coats. C. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than manufacturer's recommended spreading
rate. 1. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Tint each undercoat a lighter
shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in
shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. E. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags,
ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. F. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication and Electronic Safety and Security
Work: 1. Paint for following work where exposed in equipment rooms: a. Equipment 1) Do not paint paint electrical switchgear. 2) Do not paint new electrical panelboards or existing electrical
panelboards that still have a factory finish. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Tanks
that do not have factory-applied final finishes. h. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. 2. Paint the
following work where exposed in occupied spaces: a. Equipment 1) Do not paint electrical switchgear. 2) Do not paint new electrical panelboards or existing electrical panelboards that
still have a factory finish. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Duct, equipment, and pipe
insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. 3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner behind air inlets and
outlets that are visible from occupied spaces. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by A/E,
and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
211118.00 099123-6 INTERIOR PAINTING 3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE (P-CODE) A. Steel (Ferrous) Substrates: 1. Water-Based Dry-Fall System (over shop-applied primer): MPI INT 5.1CC.
(Code #5.11). a. Prime Coat: Not applicable. b. Topcoat: Waterborne dry fall, flat or eggshell. 1) MPI #118 or #131. 2) Application includes, but is not limited to: a) Beams and joists.
2. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 5.1S. (Code #5.12) a. Prime Coat: Rust-inhibitive primer (water based). MPI #107. 1) Verify compatibility with primer, if shop-applied
primer is used. b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex (semigloss). 1) MPI #145/146 or
147 as required to comply with gloss level specified. 2) Application includes, but is not limited to: a) Hollow metal doors, including vision lite kits, frames, door mullions and astragals.
b) Railing and miscellaneous ferrous metal surfaces. c) Access doors. B. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 1. Water-Based Dry-Fall System: MPI INT 5.3H. (Code #5.31) a. Prime Coat: Waterborne
dry fall. b. Topcoat: Waterborne dry fall, flat or eggshell. 1) MPI #133 or #155. 2) Application includes, but is not limited to: a) Overhead decking, pipes, ducts, etc. b) Exposed metal
deck. 2. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 5.3N. (Code #5.32). a. Prime Coat: Waterborne galvanized-metal primer. MPI #134. 1) Note: Primer may be omitted, if not required
by paint manufacturer. b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex (semigloss). 1) MPI #147
or 148 as required to comply with gloss level specified. 2) Application includes, but is not limited to: a) Hollow metal doors, including vision lite kits, frames, door mullions, and
astragals. b) Rails and other non-ferrous surfaces. C. Cotton or Canvas and ASJ Insulation-Covering Substrates: 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 10.1D. (Code #10.11)
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. MPI #50. b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odor/VOC interior
latex (semigloss). 1) MPI #143/144, 145/146 or 147 as required to comply with gloss level specified. 2) Application includes, but is not limited to: a) Pipe and duct coverings. END OF
SECTION 099123
211118.00 099600-1 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS SECTION 099600 -HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and application of high-performance
coating systems (HPC) on the following substrates: 1. Exterior Substrates: a. Galvanized metal. 2. Interior Substrates: a. Concrete masonry units (CMU). B. Related Sections include the
following: 1. Division 05 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section. 2. Division 09 painting Sections for special-use coatings and general
field painting. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and in each color and gloss of finish coat indicated. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing,
8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. B. Quality
Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 2. Product List: For each product indicated. Cross-reference products to coating system and locations
of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. a. Submittals without MPI numbers may be rejected as non-responsive by A/E. 3. VOC content. 1.3 QUALITY
ASSURANCE A. Master Painters Institute (MPI) Standards: 1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List." 2. Preparation and Workmanship:
Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and coating systems indicated. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject
to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers on the current “MPI Approved Product List”. B. Products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance
provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product. The “Substitution Request Form” and complete technical data for evaluation
must must accompany requests for A/E’s approval. All materials for evaluation must be received by the Project Manager and Specification Department at least 10 days prior to bid due date.
Additional approved manufacturers will be issued by Addendum. 1. Indicate reason for not being on the MPI “Approved Products List” with submittal.
211118.00 099600-2 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 2.2 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL (HPC) A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and are listed in
"MPI Approved Products List." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under
conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a coating system, provide products recommended in writing
by manufacturers of topcoat for use in coating system and on substrate indicated. 3. Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system. C. VOC Content: Products
shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. 3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters:
200 g/L. 4. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. 5. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L. 6. Pre-Treatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L. 7. Floor
Coatings: 100 g/L. 8. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L. 9. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L. D. Colors: Refer to “List of Finishes”. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions,
with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates:
When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: a. Concrete: 12 percent. b. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. c. Wood: 15 percent. d. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. B. Verify
compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. C. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected and surfaces are dry. 1. Coating application indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. D. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers or other coatings
are provided to ensure compatibility of total systems for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of specified finish materials to ensure compatible primers.
1. If a potential incompatibility of primers applied by others exists, obtain the following from the primer Applicator before proceeding: a. Confirmation of primer's suitability for
expected service conditions. b. Confirmation of primer's ability to be top coated with materials specified. 2. Notify A/E about anticipated problems before using the coatings specified
over substrates primed by others.
211118.00 099600-3 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual"
applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be coated. If removal is impractical or impossible because
of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and coating. 1. After completing coating operations, reinstall items that were removed; use workers
skilled in the trades involved. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Schedule
cleaning and coating application so dust and other contaminates from cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces. 2. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate
with compatible primers as required to produce coating systems indicated. D. CMU Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of
surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. 1. Clean using methods recommended in writing
by coating manufacturer, but not less than the following: a. SSPC-SP6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." F. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections,
and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces. G. Galvanized-Metal
Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion
of subsequently applied coatings. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating
and substrate indicated. 2. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment
or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Coat back sides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Do not apply coatings over
labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification
of each coat if multiple coats of the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish
each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply
coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and color
breaks.
211118.00 099600-4 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.
B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged
condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces. 3.5 EXTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE A. Galvanized-Metal
Substrates: 1. Pigmented Polyurethane over Vinyl Wash and Epoxy Primer System: MPI EXT 5.3D (Code #5.321). a. Prime Coat: Primer, vinyl wash, MPI #80. b. Intermediate Coat: Primer, epoxy,
anti-corrosive, for metal, MPI #101 or recommended by topcoat manufacturer. c. First Topcoat: Polyurethane, two-component, pigmented gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #72. d. Second Topcoat:
Polyurethane, two-component, pigmented gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #72. e. Application includes, but is not limited to: 1) Bollards. 3.6 INTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE A.
CMU Substrates: 1. Epoxy Coating System: MPI INT 4.2R (Code #4.222). a. Prime Coat: Epoxy block filler, MPI #116. b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, high-build, low gloss, MPI #108. c. Topcoat:
Epoxy, high-build, low gloss, MPI #108 d. Application includes, but is not limited to: 1) Wet environments where additional abrasion resistance is required, e.g. pools, showers. END
OF SECTION 099600
211118.00 104416-1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS SECTION 104416 -FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets
for fire extinguishers. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."
B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.3 WARRANTY A. Special
Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. 2. Warranty Period: Five
years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers
specified. 1. Portable Fire Extinguishers a. Amerex Corp. b. Ansul Inc. c. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company d. Kidde, Residential and Commercial Div., UTC Fire and Security Co., United
Technologies Corp. e. J.L. Industries f. Larsen’s Manufacturing Company g. Potter-Roemer h. Pem All Fire Extinguisher Company, A Division of PEM System i. Pyro-Chem, Tyco Safety Products
B. Products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product. The “Substitution
Request Form” and complete technical data for evaluation must accompany requests for A/E’s approval. All materials for evaluation must be received by the Project Manager and Specification
Department at least 10 days prior to bid due date. Additional approved manufacturers will be issued by Addendum. 2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers:
Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated. 1. Valves: Manufacturer's standard, unless otherwise noted. 2. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's
standard, unless otherwise noted.
211118.00 104416-2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS a. Gauge face cover and horn cone parts shall be metal. No plastic or nylon valves, trigger/handle, casing, or gauge will be acceptable. 3. Instruction
Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging. B. Multipurpose
Dry-Chemical Type in Steel or Aluminum Container: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled container. 1. Provide this type
throughout facility, unless otherwise noted. 2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of
sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or red baked-enamel finish. B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction
for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. 1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals
applied to mounting surface. a. Orientation: Vertical or horizontal. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace
damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire
extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Mounting Brackets: 48 inches above finished floor
to top of fire extinguisher, unless required by authorities with jurisdiction. B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated. END
OF SECTION 104416
211118.00 133419-1 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS SECTION 133419 -METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes metal building systems that consist of integrated
sets of mutually dependent components including structural framing, anchor bolts, roof panels, wall panels and accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 03
Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete foundations, slabs, and anchor-bolt installation. 2. Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames." 3. Division 08 Section "Sectional
Doors." 4. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for hardware to the extent not specified in this Section. 5. Division 08 Section "Louvers and Vents" for metal louvers. 6. Division 09
painting Sections for finish painting of shop-primed structural framing. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Bay: Dimension between main frames measured normal to frame (at centerline of frame) for interior
bays, and dimension from centerline of first interior main frame measured normal to end wall (outside face of end-wall girt) for end bays. B. Building Length: Dimension of the building
measured perpendicular to main framing from end wall to end wall (outside face of girt to outside face of girt). C. Building Width: Dimension of the building measured parallel to main
framing from sidewall to sidewall (outside face of girt to outside face of girt). D. Clear Span: Distance between supports of beams, girders, or trusses (measured from lowest level of
connecting area of a column and a rafter frame or knee). E. Eave Height: Vertical dimension from finished floor to eave (the line along the sidewall formed by intersection of the planes
of the roof and wall). F. Clear Height under Structure: Vertical dimension from finished floor to lowest point of any part of primary or secondary structure, not including crane supports,
located within clear span. G. Terminology Standard: Refer to MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual" for definitions of terms for metal building system construction not otherwise defined
in this Section or in referenced standards. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide a complete, integrated set of metal building system manufacturer's standard mutually dependent
components and assemblies that form a metal building system capable of withstanding structural and other loads, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure or
infiltration of water into building interior. Include primary and secondary framing, metal roof panels, metal wall panels, and accessories complying with requirements indicated. 1. Provide
metal building system of size and with spacings, slopes, and spans indicated. B. Primary Frame Type: 1. Rigid Clear Span: Solid-member, structural-framing system without interior columns.
211118.00 133419-2 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS C. End-Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard, for buildings not required to be expandable, consisting of load-bearing end-wall and corner columns,
and rafters. D. Secondary Frame Type: Manufacturer's standard purlins and joists and exterior-framed (bypass) girts. E. Bay Spacing: As indicated. F. Roof Slope: 1/2 inch per 12 inches.
G. Roof System: Manufacturer's standard vertical-rib, standing-seam metal roof panels with insulation. H. Exterior Wall System: Manufacturer's standard field-assembled, metal wall panels
with insulation. 1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide metal building system capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads
and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Design Loads: Reduction of load due to tributary loaded area is not permitted in the design of this building. The basic
design loads shall include live loads, wind loads, and earthquake (if applicable), in addition to dead load. Other design loads, whether they be of static, dynamic, or kinetic nature,
shall be considered as auxiliary loads. a. Furnish anchor bolt diameters, calculated on the basis of stress in the steel bolt, to resist the column reactions induced by the design loads
on that structure. 2. The controlling loads, combining of normal loads and auxiliary loads, and design procedures from the following reference standards, shall be used where applicable
in the structural design of the metal building covered by this Section. a. "Recommended Design Practices Manual," Metal Building Manufacturers Association. b. "Steel Construction Manual,"
American Institute of Steel Construction. c. "Cold Formed Steel Design Manual," American Iron and Steel Institute. d. "Aluminum Construction Manual," The Aluminum Association. e. "Code
for Welding in Building Construction," American Welding Society. f. State building code having jurisdiction over the area in which the site is located. 3. In no case shall the design
loads be less than those indicated on Drawings and as required by ASCE 7, “Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and other Structures.” 4. Auxiliary loads for roof framing, including purlins:
a. Increased live loads from drifting snow adjacent to taller structures. b. Vertical hanging loads of 5 pounds per square foot. c. Hanging point load on structural frame and a lateral
impact load per A.I.S.C. code perpendicular to structural frame as indicated. d. See drawings for magnitude and location of other auxiliary loads. 5. Deflection Limits: Engineer assemblies
to withstand design loads with deflection no greater than the following: a. Rafters: Vertical deflection of L/180 of the span, unless otherwise noted. b. Purlins: Vertical deflection
of L/150 of the span, unless otherwise noted. c. Girts: Horizontal deflection of L/180 of the span, unless otherwise noted. 1) Deflection where wall supports masonry shall be limited
to 1/600. d. Metal Roof Panels: Vertical deflection of 1/180 of the span. e. Metal Wall Panels: Horizontal deflection of 1/180 of the span. 6. Design secondary framing system to accommodate
deflection of primary building structure and construction tolerances, and to maintain clearances at openings. 7. Provide metal panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of
loads and stresses indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E1592.
211118.00 133419-3 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS B. Thermal Movements: Provide metal panel systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient
and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base
engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180
deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. C. Thermal Performance: Provide insulated metal panel assemblies with the following maximum U-factors and minimum R-values for opaque elements when
tested according to ASTM C 1363 or ASTM C 518: 1. Metal Roof Panel Assemblies: a. R-Value: 19. 2. Metal Wall Panel Assemblies: a. R-Value: 13. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: For the
following metal building system components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. 1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads,
include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 2. Anchor-Bolt Plans: Submit anchor-bolt plans before foundation
work begins. Include location, diameter, and projection of anchor bolts required to attach metal building to foundation. Indicate column reactions at each location. 3. Structural-Framing
Drawings: Show complete fabrication of primary and secondary framing; include provisions for openings. Indicate welds and bolted connections, distinguishing between shop and field applications.
Include transverse cross-sections. a. Show provisions for attaching roof curbs. 4. Metal Roof and Wall Panel Layout Drawings: Show layouts of metal panels including methods of support.
Include details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and special details. Distinguish between factoryand field-assembled work;
show locations of exposed fasteners. a. Show roof-mounted items including roof hatches, equipment supports, pipe supports and penetrations, lighting fixtures, snow guards, and items
mounted on roof curbs. b. Show wall-mounted items including doors, windows, louvers, and lighting fixtures. 5. Accessory Drawings: Include details of the following items, at a scale
of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches (1:8): a. Flashing and trim. b. Gutters. c. Downspouts. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of building component with factory-applied
color finish. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of sizes indicated below. 1. Metal Roof and Wall Panels: Nominal 8 inches by
8 inches on actual substrate material. D. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes for each type of the following metal building system components: a. Structural-framing system. b. Metal roof panels. c. Metal wall panels and metal liner panels.
d. Insulation and vapor retarders.
211118.00 133419-4 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS e. Flashing and trim. f. Accessories. 2. Product Certificates: For each type of metal building system, signed by product manufacturer. a. Letter
of Design Certification: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Include the following: 1) Name and location of Project. 2) Order number. 3) Name of manufacturer. 4)
Name of Contractor. 5) Building dimensions including width, length, height, and roof slope. 6) Indicate compliance with AISC standards for hot-rolled steel and AISI standards for cold-rolled
steel, including edition dates of each standard. 7) Governing building code and year of edition. 8) Design Loads: Include dead load, roof live load, collateral loads, roof snow load,
deflection, wind loads/speeds and exposure, seismic design category or effective peak velocity-related acceleration/peak acceleration, and auxiliary loads (cranes). 9) Load Combinations:
Indicate that loads were applied acting simultaneously with concentrated loads, according to to governing building code. 10) Building-Use Category: Indicate category of building use
and its effect on load importance factors. 11) AISC Certification for Category MB: Include statement that metal building system and components were designed and produced in an AISC-Certified
Facility by an AISC-Certified Manufacturer. 3. Welding certificates. 4. Erector Certificate: Signed by manufacturer certifying that erector complies with requirements. 5. Manufacturer
Certificate: Signed by manufacturer certifying that products comply with requirements. 6. Qualification Data: For Erector, manufacturer, and professional engineer. 7. Material Test Reports:
Signed by manufacturers certifying that the following products comply with requirements: a. Structural steel including chemical and physical properties. b. Bolts, nuts, and washers including
mechanical properties and chemical analysis. c. Tension-control, high-strength, bolt-nut-washer assemblies. d. Shop primers. e. Nonshrink grout. E. Closeout Submittals: 1. Maintenance
Data: For metal panel finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 2. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Erector Qualifications: An experienced
erector who has specialized in erecting and installing work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer. B. Manufacturer
Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. 1. AISC Certification for Category MB: An AISC-Certified Manufacturer that designs and produces metal building systems and components in an
AISC-Certified Facility. 2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer. C. Welding: Qualify
procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
211118.00 133419-5 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS D. Structural Steel: Comply with AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design, Plastic Design," or AISC's "Load
and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings," for design requirements and allowable stresses. E. Cold-Formed Steel: Comply with AISI's "Specification for
the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members," or AISI's "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Steel Structural Members," for design requirements and allowable stresses.
F. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide field-insulated metal panels having thermal insulation and vapor-retarder-facing materials with the following surface-burning characteristics
as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less,
unless otherwise indicated. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less, unless otherwise indicated. G. Pre-Erection Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements
in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to metal building systems including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspect
and discuss condition of foundations and other preparatory work performed by other trades. 2. Review structural load limitations. 3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify
availability of materials, Erector's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures.
5. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures for unfavorable conditions. H. Preinstallation Roof and Wall Assembly Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
Review methods and procedures related to metal roof panel assemblies including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Examine purlin and rafter conditions for compliance with requirements,
including flatness and attachment to structural members. 2. Review structural limitations of purlins and rafters during and after roofing. 3. Review flashings, special roof details,
roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect metal roof panels. 4. Review temporary protection requirements for metal roof
panel assembly during and after installation. 5. Review roof and wall observation and repair procedures after metal roof panel installation. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations:
Proceed with installation only when weather conditions permit metal panels to be installed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. B. Field Measurements:
1. Established Dimensions for Foundations: Comply with established dimensions on approved anchor-bolt plans, establishing foundation dimensions and proceeding with fabricating structural
framing without field measurements. Coordinate anchor-bolt installation to ensure that actual anchorage dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 2. Established Dimensions for
Metal Panels: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, either establish framing and opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal panels without field
measurements, or allow for field trimming metal panels. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual building dimensions, locations of structural members, and openings correspond to
established dimensions.
211118.00 133419-6 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty on Metal Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace
metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to,
the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking,
checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Weathertightness Warranty for Standing-Seam
Metal Roof Panels: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace standing-seam, metal roof panel assemblies that fail to remain weathertight, including
leaks, within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with
requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. American Buildings Company. 2. American Steel Building Company, Inc.; Division of NCI Building
Systems, LLP. 3. Crown Metal Buildings, Inc. 4. Star Building Systems; Division of Robertson-Ceco Corporation. 5. VP Buildings, Inc.; a United Dominion Company. 6. Ceco Building Systems.
7. Chief Buildings. 2.2 STRUCTURAL-FRAMING MATERIALS A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992; ASTM A 572/, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380); or ASTM A 529, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380). B. Channels, Angles,
M-Shapes, and S-Shapes: ASTM A 36; ASTM A 572, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380); or ASTM A 529, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380). C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36; ASTM A 572, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or
380); or ASTM A 529, Grade 50 or 55 (345 or 380). D. Structural-Steel Sheet: Hot-rolled, ASTM A 1011, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 30 through 55 (205 through 380), or High-Strength
Low Low Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 45 through 70 (310 through 480); or cold-rolled, ASTM A 1008, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 25 through 80 (170 through 550), or High-Strength Low
Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 45 through 70 (310 through 480). E. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Prepainted with Coil Coating: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted
by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 33 through 80 (230 through 550) or High-Strength
Low Alloy Steel (HSLAS), Grades 50 through 80 (340 through 550); with G90 (Z275) coating designation. 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792, Structural Steel (SS), Grade
50 or 80 (340 or 550); with Class AZ50 (AZM150) coating.
211118.00 133419-7 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS F. Non-High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6), carbon-steel, hex-head bolts; ASTM A 563
(ASTM A 563M) carbon-steel hex nuts; and ASTM F 844 plain (flat) steel washers. 1. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153, Class C, unless otherwise noted. G. High-Strength Bolts,
Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel
washers. 1. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153, Class C, unless otherwise noted. 2. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy-hex-head
steel structural bolts with splined ends. 3. Finish: Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50, unless otherwise noted. H. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM
A 490 (ASTM A 490M), Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts or tension-control, bolt-nut-washer assemblies with splined ends; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon-steel nuts;
and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon-steel washers, plain. I. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6). 1. Configuration: Straight. 2. Nuts:
ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon steel. 3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36 carbon steel. 4. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon steel. 5. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating,
ASTM A 153, Class C, unless otherwise noted. J. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6), straight. 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon
steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36 carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon steel. 4. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153, Class C, unless otherwise noted.
K. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6). 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon
steel. 3. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153, Class C, unless otherwise noted. L. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, Type I, red oxide. 2.3 MATERIALS FOR FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL PANELS A. Metallic-Coated
Steel Sheet Prepainted with Coil Coating: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755. 1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Structural Steel (SS), Grades 33 through 80 (230 through 550), with G90 (Z275) coating designation. 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792, Structural
Steel (SS), Grade 50 or 80 (340 or 550); with Class AZ50 (AZM150) coating designation. 3. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 4. Exposed Finishes: Apply the following coil coating, as specified
or indicated on Drawings: a. High-Performance Organic Finish (2-Coat Fluoropolymer): AA-C12C40R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: conversion coating;
Organic Coating: manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent
polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with AAMA 2605 and with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
211118.00 133419-8 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS b. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or lightcolored backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat
with a total minimum dry film thickness of 0.5 mil. 2.4 THERMAL INSULATION FOR FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL PANELS A. Metal Building Insulation: ASTM C 991, Type II, glass-fiber-blanket insulation;
0.5-lb/cu. ft. density; 2-inch wide, continuous, vapor-tight edge tabs; and with a flame-spread index of 25 or less. B. Vapor-Retarder Facing: ASTM C 1136, with permeance not greater
than 0.02 perm when tested according to ASTM E 96, Desiccant Method. 1. Provide one of the following, unless otherwise noted. a. Composition: White polypropylene, vinyl film facing,
fiberglass scrim reinforcement, and metallized-polyester film backing. C. Retainer Strips: 0.019-inch thick, formed, galvanized steel or PVC retainer clips colored to match insulation
facing. D. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide fasteners with
heads matching color of materials being fastened by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. 1. Fasteners for Metal Roof Panels: Self-drilling or self-tapping, zinc-plated,
hex-head carbon-steel screws, with a stainless-steel cap or zinc-aluminum-alloy head and EPDM or neoprene sealing washer. 2. Fasteners for Metal Wall Panels: Self-drilling or self-tapping,
zinc-plated, hex-head carbon-steel screws, with nylon or polypropylene washer. 3. Fasteners for Metal Roof and Wall Panels: Self-drilling Type 410 stainless-steel or selftapping Type
304 stainless-steel or zinc-alloy-steel hex washer head, with EPDM or PVC washer under heads of fasteners bearing on weather side of metal panels. 4. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim:
Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws with hex washer head. 5. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets. B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic,
SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious
impurities. C. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable
for application and a 30-minute working time. D. Metal Panel Sealants: 1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper
backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape of manufacturer's
standard size. 2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; one-part elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or siliconerubber sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal
joints in metal panels and remain weathertight; and as recommended by metal building system manufacturer.
211118.00 133419-9 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Design components and field connections required for erection to permit easy assembly. 1. Mark each piece
and part of the assembly to correspond with previously prepared erection drawings, diagrams, and instruction manuals. 2. Fabricate structural framing to produce clean, smooth cuts and
bends. Punch holes of proper size, shape, and location. Members shall be free of cracks, tears, and ruptures. B. Tolerances: Comply with MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual": Chapter
IV, Section 9, "Fabrication and Erection Tolerances." C. Metal Panels: Fabricate and finish metal panels at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures
and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. 1. Provide panel profile,
including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of metal panel. 2.7 STRUCTURAL FRAMING A. General: 1. Primary Framing: Shop fabricate framing components
to indicated size and section with baseplates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other items required for erection welded into place. Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld framing for bolted
field assembly. a. Make shop connections by welding or by using high-strength bolts. b. Join flanges to webs of built-up members by a continuous submerged arc-welding process. c. Brace
compression flange of primary framing with steel angles or cold-formed structural tubing between frame web and purlin or girt web, so flange compressive strength is within allowable
limits for any combination of loadings. d. Weld clips to frames for attaching secondary framing members. e. Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces for shop priming according to SSPC-SP 2. Shop
prime primary structural members with specified primer after fabrication. 2. Secondary Framing: Shop fabricate framing components to indicated size and section by roll-forming or break-forming,
with baseplates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other plates required for erection welded into place. Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld secondary framing for bolted field connections
to primary framing. a. Make shop connections by welding or by using non-high-strength bolts. b. Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated surfaces for shop priming according to SSPCSP 2. Shop prime
uncoated secondary structural members with specified primer after fabrication. B. Primary Framing: Manufacturer's standard structural primary framing system, designed to withstand required
loads and specified requirements. Primary framing includes transverse and lean-to frames; rafter, rake, and canopy beams; sidewall, intermediate, end-wall, and corner columns; and wind
bracing. 1. General: Provide frames with attachment plates, bearing plates, and splice members. Factory drill for field-bolted assembly. Provide frame span and spacing indicated. a.
Slight variations in span and spacing may be acceptable if necessary to meet manufacturer's standard, as approved by Architect. 2. Rigid Clear-Span Frames: I-shaped frame sections fabricated
from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes. Interior columns are not permitted. 3. Frame Configuration: Single gable. 4. Exterior Column Type: Tapered. 5. Rafter
Type: Tapered. C. End-Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard primary end-wall framing fabricated for field-bolted assembly to comply with the following:
211118.00 133419-10 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 1. End-Wall and Corner Columns: I-shaped sections fabricated from structural-steel shapes; shop-welded, built-up steel plates; or C-shaped,
cold-formed, structural-steel sheet; with minimum thickness of 0.0598 inch. 2. End-Wall Rafters: C-shaped, cold-formed, structural-steel sheet; with minimum thickness of 0.0598 inch;
or I-shaped sections fabricated from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes. D. Secondary Framing: Manufacturer's standard secondary framing members, including
purlins, girts, eave struts, flange bracing, base members, gable angles, clips, headers, jambs, and other miscellaneous structural members. Fabricate framing from cold-formed, structural-steel
sheet or roll-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating, unless otherwise indicated, to comply with the following: 1. Purlins: C-or Z-shaped sections; fabricated
from minimum 0.0598-inch thick steel sheet, built-up steel plates, or structural-steel shapes; minimum 2-1/2-inch wide flanges. a. Depth: As required to comply with system performance
requirements. 2. Girts: C-or Z-shaped sections; fabricated from minimum 0.0598-inch thick steel sheet, built-up steel plates, or structural-steel shapes. Form ends of Z-sections with
stiffening lips angled 40 to 50 degrees to flange and with minimum 2-1/2-inch wide flanges. a. Depth: 8 inches 3. Eave Struts: Unequal-flange, C-shaped sections; fabricated from 0.0598-inch
thick steel sheet, built-up steel plates, or structural-steel shapes; to provide adequate backup for metal panels. 4. Flange Bracing: Minimum 2-by-2-by-1/8-inch structural-steel angles
or 1-inch diameter, cold-formed structural tubing to stiffen primary frame flanges. 5. Sag Bracing: Minimum 1-by-1-by-1/8-inch structural-steel angles. 6. Base or Sill Angles: Minimum
3-by-2-by-0.0598-inch zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet. 7. Purlin and Girt Clips: Minimum 0.0598-inch thick, steel sheet. Provide galvanized clips where clips are connected to galvanized
framing members. 8. Secondary End-Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard sections fabricated from minimum 0.0598-inch thick, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet. 9. Framing for Openings:
Channel shapes; fabricated from minimum 0.0598-inch thick, cold-formed, structural-steel sheet or structural-steel shapes. Frame head and jamb of door openings, and head, jamb, and sill
of other openings. 10. Miscellaneous Structural Members: Manufacturer's standard sections fabricated from cold-formed, structural-steel sheet; built-up steel plates; or zinc-coated (galvanized)
steel sheet; designed to withstand required loads. 11. Steel connection plates welded to primary framing members for support of additional elements connected to building structure. Coordinate
loading requirements with the additional equipment components. E. Bracing: Provide adjustable wind bracing as follows: 1. Rods: ASTM A 36; ASTM A 572, Grade 50 (345); or ASTM A 529,
Grade 50 (345); minimum 1/2-inch diameter steel; threaded full length or threaded a a minimum of 6 inches at each end. 2. Cable: ASTM A 475, 1/4-inch diameter, extra-high-strength grade,
Class B zinc-coated, 7-strand steel; with threaded end anchors. 3. Angles: Fabricated from structural-steel shapes to match primary framing, of size required to withstand design loads.
4. Bracing: Provide wind bracing using any method specified above, at manufacturer's option. F. Bolts: Provide plain finish bolts for structural-framing components that are primed or
finish painted. Provide hot-dipped galvanized bolts for structural-framing components that are galvanized. G. Factory-Primed Finish: Apply specified primer immediately after cleaning
and pretreating. 1. Prime primary, secondary, and end-wall structural-framing members to a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil.
211118.00 133419-11 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS a. Prime secondary steel framing formed from uncoated steel sheet to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.5 mil on each side. 2. Prime galvanized
members with specified primer, after phosphoric acid pretreatment. 2.8 METAL ROOF PANELS A. Vertical-Rib, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Formed with vertical ribs at panel edges and
intermediate stiffening ribs, pencil ribs, symmetrically spaced between ribs; designed for sequential installation by mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips
located under one side of panels and engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels. 1. Material: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, 0.0269 inch thick. a. Exterior Finish: Fluoropolymer.
b. Color: Color to match existing or custom color to match existing building. 2. Clips: Manufacturer's standard, floating type to accommodate thermal movement; fabricated from aluminum-zinc
alloy-coated steel sheet. 3. Joint Type: Mechanically seamed, folded as standard with manufacturer. 4. Panel Coverage: 16 inches. 5. Panel Height: 2 inches. 2.9 FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL
WALL PANELS A. Tapered-Rib-Profile, Exposed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels: Profile shall have 1-1/8 inch deep ribs reverse taper in width from 2-3/4 inch to 3/4 inch. Between each major
rib, the panel is fromed into a scuptured “valley” sahpe with six small pencil ribs in each “valley”. 1. Basis of Design: Ceco Building Systems PBA wall panel. 2. Material: Aluminum-zinc
alloy-coated steel sheet, 0.0209 inch (0.55 mm) thick. a. Exterior Finish: Fluoropolymer. b. Color: Color to match existing or custom color to match existing building. 3. Major-Rib Spacing:
12 inches o.c. 4. Panel Coverage: 36 inches. B. Tapered-Rib-Profile, Metal Liner Panels: Formed with raised, trapezoidal major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced
between major ribs; designed to be field assembled by lapping side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed fasteners in side laps. 1. Basis
of of Design: Ceco Building Systems PBU Liner. 2. Material: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, 0.0209 inch thick. a. Exterior Finish: Fluoropolymer. b. Color: Color to match existing
or custom color to match existing building.. 3. Major-Rib Spacing: 12 inches o.c. 4. Panel Coverage: 36 inches. 5. Panel Height: 1.5 inches. 2.10 ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide accessories
as standard with metal building system manufacturer and as specified. Fabricate and finish accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures
and processes. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. 1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling,
and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. B. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal
roof panel assembly including copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal
roof panels, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same material as metal roof panels.
211118.00 133419-12 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 2. Clips: Manufacturer's standard, formed from steel sheet or stainless-steel sheet, designed to withstand negative-load requirements. 3. Cleats:
Manufacturer's standard, mechanically seamed cleats formed from steel sheet or stainless-steel sheet or nylon-coated aluminum sheet. 4. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at
panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. 5. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell laminated
polyethylene; minimum 1-inch thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight
construction. 6. Thermal Spacer Blocks: Where metal panels attach directly to purlins, provide thermal spacer blocks of thickness required to provide 1 inch standoff; fabricated from
extruded polystyrene. C. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips,
sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal wall panels, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and
rakes, fabricated of same material as metal wall panels. 2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. 3.
Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded
to match metal wall panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. D. Flashing and Trim: Formed from minimum 24 gauge, metallic-coated
steel sheet or aluminumzinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match adjacent metal panels. 1. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather
and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. 2. Opening Trim: Minimum 24
gauge metallic-coated steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloycoated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating. Trim head and jamb of door openings, and head, jamb, and sill of other openings.
a. Provide channel closure trim at overhead door openings in color to match exterior wall panel. 3. Provide 24 gauge sill flashing/trim at base of metal panels secured to masonry substrate
to cover masonry wall in profile indicated on Drawings. a. At openings provide complete metal trim around bottom of wood blocking as indicated on Drawings. E. Gutters: Formed from minimum
24 gauge, metallic-coated steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloycoated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match roof fascia and rake trim. Match profile of gable trim,
complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch long sections, sized according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual."
1. Gutter Supports: Fabricated from same material and finish as gutters; spaced 36 inches o.c. 2. Strainers: Bronze, copper, or aluminum wire ball type at outlets. F. Downspouts: Formed
from 24 gauge, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match metal wall panels. Fabricate in minimum
10-foot long sections, complete with formed elbows and offsets. 1. Mounting Straps: Fabricated from same material and finish as gutters; spaced 10 feet o.c. G. Pipe Flashing: Premolded,
EPDM pipe collar with flexible aluminum ring bonded to base.
211118.00 133419-13 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS H. Roof Ventilators: Gravity type, complete with hardware, flashing, closures, and fittings. 1. Continuous or Sectional-Ridge Type: Factory-engineered
and -fabricated, continuous unit; fabricated from minimum 0.0159-inch thick, metallic-coated steel sheet or aluminumzinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished
to match metal roof panels. Fabricated in minimum 10-foot long sections. Provide throat size and total length indicated, complete with side baffles, ventilator assembly, end caps, splice
plates, and reinforcing diaphragms. a. Bird Screening: Galvanized steel, 1/2-inch square mesh, 0.041-inch wire, or aluminum, 1/2-inch square mesh, 0.063-inch wire. b. Throat Size: 9
or 12 inches, as standard with manufacturer, and as required to comply with ventilation requirements. c. Operator kits for remote operation of dampers from any location along wall. As
required provide kits allowing vent units to be tied together and operated by a single operator. I. Louvers: Size and design indicated; self-framing and self-flashing. Fabricate welded
frames from minimum 0.0428-inch thick, metallic-coated steel sheet; finished to match metal wall panels. Form blades from 0.0329-inch thick, metallic-coated steel sheet; folded or beaded
at edges, set at an angle that excludes driving rains, and secured to frames by riveting or welding. Fabricate louvers with equal blade spacing to produce uniform appearance. 1. Blades:
Fixed. 2. Free Area: Not less than 7.0 sq. ft. for 48-inch wide by 48-inch high louver. 3. Bird Screening: Galvanized steel, 1/2-inch square mesh, 0.041-inch wire; with rewirable frames,
removable and secured with clips, fabricated of same kind and form of metal and with same finish as for louvers. a. Mounting: Interior face of louvers. 4. Vertical Mullions: Provide
mullions at spacings recommended by manufacturer, or 72 inches o.c., whichever is less. 2.11 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are
within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are
within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Erector
present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Erector,
listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. B. Before erection proceeds, survey elevations and locations of concrete-and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods,
bearing plates, and other embedments to receive structural framing, with Erector present, for compliance with requirements and metal building system manufacturer's tolerances. 1. Engage
land surveyor to perform surveying. C. Proceed with erection only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
211118.00 133419-14 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate
condition. B. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural framing secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads
and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural framing, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 ERECTION
OF STRUCTURAL FRAMING A. Erect metal building system according to manufacturer's written erection instructions and erection drawings. B. Do not field cut, drill, or alter structural
members without written approval from metal building system manufacturer's professional engineer. C. Set structural framing accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according
to AISC specifications referenced in this Section. Maintain structural stability of frame during during erection. D. Base Plates: Clean concrete-and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing
materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. 1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Tighten
anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout. 3.
Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written
installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts. E. Align and adjust structural framing before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces
that will be in permanent contact with framing. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.
2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure will be completed and in service. F. Primary Framing and End Walls: Erect
framing true to line, level, plumb, rigid, and secure. Level baseplates to a true even plane with full bearing to supporting structures, set with doublenutted anchor bolts. Use grout
to obtain uniform bearing and to maintain a level base-line elevation. Moist cure grout for not less than seven days after placement. 1. Make field connections using high-strength bolts
installed according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. a. Joint Type: Snug tightened or pretensioned.
G. Secondary Framing: Erect framing true to line, level, plumb, rigid, and secure. Fasten secondary framing to primary framing using clips with field connections using non-high-strength
bolts. 1. Provide rake or gable purlins with tight-fitting closure channels and fasciae. 2. 2. Locate and space wall girts to suit openings such as doors and windows. 3. Provide supplemental
framing at entire perimeter of openings, including doors, windows, louvers, ventilators, and other penetrations of roof and walls. H. Bracing: Install bracing in roof and sidewalls where
indicated on erection drawings. 1. Tighten rod and cable bracing to avoid sag. 2. Locate interior end-bay bracing only where indicated.
211118.00 133419-15 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS I. Framing for Openings: Provide shapes of proper design and size to reinforce openings and to carry loads and vibrations imposed, including
equipment furnished under mechanical and electrical work. Securely attach to structural framing. J. Erection Tolerances: Maintain erection tolerances of structural framing within AISC's
"Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 3.4 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Examination: Examine primary and secondary framing to verify that structural panel
support members and anchorages have been installed within alignment tolerances required by manufacturer. 1. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to
verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before metal panel installation. B. General: Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely
in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. Field cut metal panels as required for doors, windows, and other openings. Cut openings as small as possible, neatly
to size required, and without damage to adjacent metal panel finishes. a. Field cutting of metal panels by torch is not permitted unless approved in writing by manufacturer. 2. Install
metal panels perpendicular to structural supports, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Flash and seal metal panels with weather closures at perimeter of openings and similar elements. Fasten
with self-tapping screws. 4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 5. Locate metal panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports with
end laps in alignment. Stagger panel splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition. 6. Lap metal flashing over metal panels to allow moisture to run over and off the
material. C. Metal Panels: Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress neoprene washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or
metal panels. Install screws in predrilled holes. 1. Arrange and nest side-lap joints so prevailing winds blow over, not into, lapped joints. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib
corrugation. Apply metal panels and associated items for neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line. D. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals
will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to
each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. E. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated
and where required for weatherproof performance of metal panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal
panel manufacturer. 1. Seal metal panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal side side joints where recommended by metal panel manufacturer. 2. Prepare
joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.5 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Provide metal roof panels of full length
from eave to ridge, unless otherwise indicated or restricted by shipping limitations. 1. Install ridge caps as metal roof panel work proceeds. 2. Flash and seal metal roof panels with
weather closures at eaves and rakes. Fasten with self-tapping screws.
211118.00 133419-16 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS B. Field-Assembled, Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing-seam joint
at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. 1. Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners. 2. Install pressure plates at locations indicated in manufacturer's
written installation instructions. 3. Snap Joint: Nest standing seams and fasten together by interlocking and completely engaging factory-applied sealant. 4. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing
seams with manufacturer-approved motorized seamer tool so clip, metal roof panel, and factory-applied sealant are completely engaged. 5. Rigidly fasten eave end of metal roof panels
and allow ridge end free movement due to thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels for fasteners. 6. Provide metal closures at peaks rake edges and each side of ridge caps.
C. Metal Roof Panel Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal roof panels within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch
offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.6 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal wall panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated
on Drawings. Install panels perpendicular to girts, extending full height of building, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal wall panels and other components of the Work securely
in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, begin metal panel installation at corners with center of rib lined up with line of framing.
2. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal wall panels. 3. When two rows of metal panels are required, lap panels 4 inches minimum. 4. When building height requires two rows
of metal panels at gable ends, align lap of gable panels over metal wall panels at eave height. 5. Rigidly fasten base end of metal wall panels and allow eave end free movement due to
thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels. 6. Flash and seal metal wall panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping
screws. 7. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes. 8. Install flashing and trim as metal wall panel work proceeds. 9. Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel
(sill angle) and concrete, and elsewhere as indicated, or if not indicated, as necessary for waterproofing. 10. Align bottom of metal wall panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts,
or self-tapping screws. 11. Provide weatherproof escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls. 12. Install subgirts/framing onto masonry substrate where indicated. Coordinate
framing installation with installation of rigid cavity wall insulation. Connect metal panel with exposed fasteners in same manner as required elsewhere. B. Field-Assembled, Metal Wall
Panels: Install metal wall panels on exterior side of girts. Attach metal wall panels to supports supports with fasteners as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Field-Insulated Assemblies:
Install thermal insulation as specified. Install metal liner panels over insulation on interior side of girts at locations indicated. Fasten with exposed fasteners as recommended by
manufacturer. C. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal wall panels within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nonaccumulative, on level, plumb, and location lines as
indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.7 THERMAL INSULATION INSTALLATION FOR FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL PANELS
A. General: Install insulation concurrently with metal wall panel installation, in thickness indicated to cover entire wall, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
211118.00 133419-17 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 1. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation
spaces, except for firestopping. 2. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.
3. Install factory-laminated, vapor-retarder-faced blankets straight and true in one-piece lengths with both sets of facing tabs sealed to provide a complete vapor retarder. B. Blanket
Roof Insulation: Comply with the following installation method: 1. Over-Purlin-with-Spacer-Block Installation: Extend insulation and vapor retarder over and perpendicular to top flange
of secondary framing members. Install layer of filler insulation over first layer to fill space formed by metal roof panel standoffs. Hold in place by panels fastened to standoffs. 2.
Retainer Strips: Install retainer strips at each longitudinal insulation joint, straight and taut, nesting with secondary framing to hold insulation in place. 3. Thermal Spacer Blocks:
Where metal roof panels attach directly to purlins, install thermal spacer blocks. C. Blanket Wall Insulation: Extend insulation and vapor retarder over and perpendicular to top flange
of secondary framing members. Hold in place by metal wall panels fastened to secondary framing. 1. Retainer Strips: Install retainer strips at each longitudinal insulation joint, straight
and taut, nesting with secondary framing to hold insulation in place. 3.8 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight
mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including
trim, copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. 2. Install components for a complete metal wall panel assembly including
trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. 3. Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation
as recommended by manufacturer. B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight
and weather resistant. 1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed
edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in in waterproof and weather-resistant performance. 2. Expansion Provisions: Provide
for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type
expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled
with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). C. Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered or lapped and sealed joints. Attach gutters to eave with gutter hangers spaced not
more than 4 feet o.c. using manufacturer's standard fasteners. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion.
211118.00 133419-18 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS D. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1 inch away from walls;
locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. in between. 1. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building. 2. Tie downspouts to underground
drainage system indicated. E. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and metal roof panels. Fasten and seal to panel as recommended by manufacturer. F. Continuous Roof
Ventilators: Set ventilators complete with necessary hardware, anchors, dampers, weather guards, rain caps, and equipment supports. Join sections with splice plates and end-cap skirt
assemblies where required to achieve indicated length. Install preformed filler strips at base to seal ventilator to metal roof panels. G. Louvers: Locate and place louver units level,
plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. 1. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces
and to make a weathertight connection. 2. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers. 3. Protect galvanized-and nonferrous-metal surfaces
from corrosion or galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals. 4. Install concealed
gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for
sealants applied during louver installation. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following tests and
inspections and to submit reports. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. High-Strength, Field-Bolted Connections: Connections shall be inspected during installation according to RCSC's "Specification
for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 2. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, field-welded connections shall be tested and inspected according to AWS
D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at inspector's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and
on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. C. Correct deficiencies
in Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents. 3.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with
galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during
construction period.
211118.00 133419-19 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS C. Touchup Painting: After erection, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted
structural framing and accessories. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as
shop primer used on adjacent surfaces. D. Metal Panels: Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed. On completion of metal panel
installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. 1. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or
have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 133419
211118.00 133419.01-GF-1 GUARANTEE FORM G U A R A N T E E F O R M (Metal Building Systems) Whereas, Of Herein called "the Contractor," has completed application of the following roof:
Owner: Address of Owner: Type and Name of Building: Location: Type of Roof: Date of Initiation of Warranty: Date Warranty Expires: Whereas, at the inception of such work, the Contractor
agreed to guarantee the aforesaid pre-engineered building components against faulty materials or workmanship for a limited period and subject to the conditions herein set forth: Now,
Therefore, the Contractor hereby guarantees, subject to the conditions herein set forth, that during a period of 5 years from the date of Substantial Completion of said pre-engineered
building he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be made such repairs to said roof resulting solely from faults or defects in material or workmanship applied by or through
the Contractor as may be necessary to maintain said pre-engineered building in weathertight condition. Guarantee shall include, but not be limited to, metal roof, roof insulation, sheet
metal fascia and soffits, sheet metal closures, trim and flashings, curbs at roof openings, gutters and downspouts, coping caps, and counterflashings. This Guarantee is made subject
to the following conditions: 1. Specifically excluded from this Guarantee is damage caused by lightning, windstorm, hailstorm, or other unusual phenomena of the elements; foundation
settlement; failure or cracking of the roof deck; defects or faulty constructions and leakage due to failure of vents, supports, or other parts of the building or damaged caused by fire.
The gutters and valleys must be kept clear and free of dirt and debris. The roof is not to be used as a promenade deck or work deck, unless specifically agreed upon or specified at time
of application of roofing. If the pre-engineered building is damaged by reason of the foregoing, this Guarantee shall thereupon become null and void for the balance of the guarantee
period unless such damage is repaired by the Contractor at the expense of the party requesting such repairs. 2. Nothing in this instrument shall render the Contractor liable for consequential
damages to the building or contents resulting from defects in said roof. 3. No work shall be done on said pre-engineered building including, but without limitation, openings made for
flues, vents, drains, sign braces, or other equipment fastened to or set on the roof unless the Contractor shall be first notified, shall be given the opportunity to make the necessary
application recommendations with respect thereto, and such recommendations are complied with. Failure to observe this condition shall render this Guarantee null and void. The Contractor
shall be paid for time and material expended in making recommendations or repairs occasioned by the work of others on said pre-engineered building.
211118.00 133419.01-GF-2 GUARANTEE FORM 4. Repairs required, either permanent or temporary, to pre-engineered building or flashings under this guarantee to keep the pre-engineered building
weather-tight shall be made within 3 days after notice of the need for repairs. Should the Contractor fail to make such repairs within the time period, the Owner may have such repairs
made and charge the cost to the Pre-Engineered Building Contractor. 5. Guarantee period shall begin on the date of Substantial Completion for the Project or such date that the roof is
accepted by the Architect and Owner. 6. Additional conditions or exclusions: In Witness Whereof, this instrument has been duly executed this day of , 20 . Notary Authorized Signature
My commission expires Title
211118.00 144500-1 VEHICLE LIFTS SECTION 144500 -VEHICLE LIFTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Vehicle lifts as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. 1. Lift
shall consist of two individual lifting assemblies in line with the longitudinal axis of the vehicle. The front lifting cylinder assembly will be moveable along the same axis for variable
spacing. The rear cylinder assembly shall be stationary 2. Under this Section provide necessary components and complete supervision and instructions for items embedded into concrete
work to be done under Division 03. 3. Under this Section furnish and install components for complete operating lifts, including all piping. 4. Rotary Accessory Jack Stands. 1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Include construction details, sizes, and layout and complete information on hardware, accessories, and components. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lift Systems: Shall comply
with the requirements of current issue of ANSI Standard B 153.1 and "Safety Requirements for the Construction, Care and Use of Automotive Lifts," as published by the National Bureau
of Standards of the United States Department of Commerce. B. Qualified lift installation contractor that is a distributor or approved supplier and installer of vehicle lift system. PART
2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Rotary Model 70P by Rotary Lift Consolidated, Madison, Indiana. B. Products
of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product. Requests for Architect/Engineer’s
approval must be accompanied by the “Substitution Request Form” and complete technical data for evaluation. All materials for evaluation must be received by the Project Manager and Specification
Department at least 10 days prior to bid due date. Additional approved manufacturers will be issued by Addendum. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Lifts shall be complete including lift, sliding pads,
positioning rod, controls, muffler, wheel dishes, pit frames, pit covers, tanks, oil, and all piping between lifts and controls. B. Set of two (2) Rotary brand “RS-18” tall adjustable
under-lift jack stands. The stands shall allow for adjustment of height from a minimum of 56.1 inches to a maximum of 82.3 inches in 1 inch increments, with 4 inches of fine adjustments
accomplished by a rotation screw spindle on the jack adapter. 1. Equip with three spring-loaded guide wheels. 2. Capacity: 18,000 pounds.
211118.00 144500-2 VEHICLE LIFTS 2.3 VEHICLE LIFT A. Type: Rotary Model 70P, continuous trench design with in-trench power unit. B. Capacity: 50,000 lbs. when supplied with a sufficient
amount of oil at 350 psi, minimum. 1. The lift shall be electric-oil operated with a high pressure oil reservoir pumping unit. 2. Capacity shall be distributed evenly with a 25,000 pound
capacity front cylinder assembly and a 25,000 pound capacity rear cylinder assembly. C. Wheel Base Adjustment: 1. Wheelbase dimensions shall be set from a minimum of 101 inches to a
maximum of 302 inches. 2. Front post shall be moveable to provide proper engagement with vehicles ranging in wheel base dimension. 3. Hydraulically operated motor and chain drive assembly
mounted at front of lift pit controls moveable front post. 4. Control: Lever located in the control box. 5. Four-way directional control valve to provide forward/rearward positioning
with spring return to neutral position. 6. Hydraulic drive motor to be rated at 376 inch/pounds minimum. D. Hydraulic Power Unit: 1. Mounted below floor level in the lift trench. 2.
Factory assembly consisting of tank, pump with motor coupling, motor/pump base, explosion proof motor/pump assembly, electrical service, wire suction screen, reservoir magnets, removable
tank cover with water tight seal, relief valve, and fluid gage. 3. PVC chaseway shall be installed to run from the lift to the closet wall or as indicated on Drawings to accommodate
air and electrical feed lines by other. 4. Provide magnetic motor starter with built-in push button start-stop controls. Mounting and wiring by others. 5. Hydraulic oil supplied in appropriate
volume for operation. E. Lifting posts: 1. Front post: 66 inch rise, 10-5/8 inch diameter 2. Rear post: 69 inch rise, 10-5/8 inch diameter 3. The front and rear cylinder assemblies shall
incorporate a flange located air bleeder and a control orifice in the oil inlet connection to control speeds during raising and lowering procedures. 4. One-piece combination packing
and wiper seal shall be standard, and not require lubrication or adjustment. 5. Cylinder assembly shall be manufactured from steel stock, ground and polished with electrically welded
stops to prevent inner cylinders form being expelled from the outer casings. F. Steel cover plates: 1. Sufficient number, size and configuration to cover the continuous lift pit. 2.
Sufficient strength to support wheel loading of 1/4 of the lift’s design capacity without deformation. 3. Automatic Shutter plate trench covers: Self-storing in-the-pit, cover plate
securely attached to the jack carriage shall move so as to keep the trench opening covered at all times. G. Front Lifting Unit Accessories: 1. Saddle and adapters. 2. Plunger and casing
assembly 3. Carriage and trench assembly. a. Channel tracks flush with floor surface.
211118.00 144500-3 VEHICLE LIFTS H. Rear Lifting Unit Accessories: 1. Saddle and adapters. 2. Rear frame unit. 3. Removable cover plates with recessed lift handles for pit access. a.
Steel cover doors shall provide a flush-floor design. 4. Rear casing and plunger assembly. I. Controls: 1. Lifting controls shall be wall mounted and consist of composite style raising/lowering
hydraulic valve for simultaneous or individual raising and lowering control of the front and rear cylinder assemblies. 2. Steel Control box for hydraulic control valve. 3. Operating
levers and handles shall be surface mounted to control box. 4. Oil control valves shall be “deadman” type. 5. Valve cores and seals shall be arranged to that they may be serviced or
replaced without removing valve body from control box. J. Lift Locks: Manufacturer’s standard for this type of vehicle lift. K. Electric-hydraulic pumping unit: 1. Model P-5122, 99 gallon
capacity, with 85 gallon useable complete with ; a 10 HP, 208 Volt, 60 cycle, 3-phase, electric motor designed for completely submersible operation, directly coupled to a 40 GPM submersible
elevator screw pump with stainless steel suction screen, factory preset relief valve, “C” flange motor/pump base, reservoir magnets, and flexible connector hose. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1
INSTALLATION A. Installation, operation, service manuals, and complete repair parts lists showing illustrations of individual components shall be provided by the manufacturer. B. The
lift shall be installed in accordance with the Rotary Lift manufacturer’s installation instructions and recommendations. C. Factory field personnel shall be available for instruction
and consultation during the complete installation. D. Final air line tie-in to the lifts shall be completed by lift installation Contractor. E. Work by Others: 1. Compressed air. 2.
Electrical wiring and mounting of supplied magnetic motor starter. 3. Concrete pit construction. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND ADJUSTING A. Test and adjust units until operating perfectly.
END OF SECTION 144500
211118.00 220002-1 WORK IN EXISTING BUILDINGS SECTION 220002 – WORK IN EXISTING BUILDINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall provide the labor, materials, equipment, appliances,
services and transportation, and perform the operations in connection with the construction and installation of the Work. Work shall be as herein specified and as denoted on the accompanying
Drawings. B. Section Includes: 1. Cutting and patching of existing material. 2. Protection of existing conditions. 3. Demolition work 4. Existing facility operation C. This Contractor
shall be responsible for cutting and patching of existing walls, roofs, floors, and ceilings required for the installation of new mechanical work. Openings shall be neatly drilled or
cut. D. Patching shall be performed by a workman skilled in the trade involved, and patch work shall match the existing surface and shall be finished in a manner completely acceptable
to the Architect. E. New Work in finished spaces of existing buildings shall be installed concealed unless directed by A/E to run exposed. F. Contractor shall visit the Project and verify
existing conditions prior to bidding. G. Protect existing work, equipment, fixtures, and systems from damage. H. Contractor shall take necessary steps to protect the building and all
interior finishes from damage during the installation of his work. I. Contractor shall take necessary steps to protect any existing ceilings from damage during installation of his work.
Where ceilings are removed, they shall be reinstalled in the same condition as they were prior to removal or shall be replaced at no expense to the Owner. J. The Contractor(s) shall
perform demolition work as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein or as may otherwise be required. 1. Plumbing and HVAC items to be removed shall be as indicated on Drawings.
2. The Owner may select items of equipment and material he wishes to retain and these items shall be moved to the location he designates. Other items shall be removed from the premises.
K. The continuity of operation of existing facilities during construction of the new work shall be required. The actual length of time for an interruption shall be held to an absolute
minimum. At least 48 hours in advance of an installation of new services, submit a specific plan to the A/E and the Owner detailing the nature and estimated duration of the interruption
and the method of procedure. Do not proceed with an interruption of service without the Owner's authorization. L. Refer to Division 01 Section “Alternates” for alternates that may affect
the Work of this Section. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
211118.00 220002-2 WORK IN EXISTING BUILDINGS PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION A. Disconnect, demolish, and remove mechanical systems, equipment, and components indicated
to be removed. 1. Piping to be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. 2. Piping to be Abandoned
in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. 3. Ducts to be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and cap remaining ducts
with same or compatible ductwork material. 4. Ducts to be Abandoned in Place: Cap ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. 5. Equipment to be Removed: Disconnect and cap services
and remove equipment. 6. Equipment to be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make
equipment operational. 7. Equipment to be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. B. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain
is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality. END OF SECTION 220002
211118.00 220500-1 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING SECTION 220500 -COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,
including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Transition fittings.
2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Mechanical sleeve seals. 4. Sleeves. 5. Escutcheons. 6. Plumbing demolition. 7. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 8. Concrete
housekeeping pads. 9. Supports and anchorages. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces
immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels. B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include
rooftop locations. D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Transition fittings. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Mechanical sleeve seals.
4. Escutcheons. 5. Supports and anchorages. 6. Mechanical sleeve seals B. Welding certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according
to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code – Steel.”
211118.00 220500-2 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and
Brazing Qualifications." 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current. C. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed
equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified,
equipment shall comply with requirements. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and
handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. B. Store PVC plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.7 COORDINATION A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for plumbing installations. B. Coordinate installation
of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors
for plumbing items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames." PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS A. Refer to individual Division
22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods. B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings. 2.3 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer
to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below. B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents. 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125,
cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges. 2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated;
and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
211118.00 220500-3 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys.
Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated;
and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated. F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness
and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. G. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping: 1. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. 2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS
A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined. 1. Manufacturers: a. Fernco b. Mission 2. Underground
Piping NPS 1-1/2 and
Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling. 3. Underground Piping NPS 2 and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling. 4. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting. B. Plastic-to-Metal
Transition and Adaptor Fittings: PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solventcement-joint end. 1.
Manufacturers: a. Fernco b. Mission 2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solderjoint, plain, or weld-neck
end connections that match piping system materials. B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. 1. Manufacturers: a. Gruvlok b. Perfection Corp. c.
Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. d. Victaulic Co. of America. 2.6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular
space between pipe and sleeve. 1. Manufacturers: a. Calpico, Inc. b. Link Seal c. Metraflex Co. 2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type
and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for
each sealing element.
211118.00 220500-4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 2.7 SLEEVES A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. 2.8 ESCUTCHEONS A. Description: Manufactured
wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening. B. One-Piece,
Cast-Brass Type: With set screw. 1. In Finished Spaces: Polished chrome-plated. C. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw. 1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
D. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With spring clips and chrome-plated finish. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PLUMBING DEMOLITION A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" and Division
02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures. B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove plumbing systems, equipment, and components indicated
to be removed. 1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. Removed shall mean
back the branch connections. 2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. 3. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and
cap services and remove equipment and all associated equipment and apparatuses.. 4. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store
equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. 5. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver
to Owner. C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal
capacity and quality. 3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS -COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Drawing
plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment
rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
211118.00 220500-5 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. F. Install piping to permit valve
servicing. G. Install piping at indicated slopes. H. Install piping free of sags and bends. I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. J. Install piping to
allow application of insulation. K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls,
ceilings, and floors according to the following: 1. New Piping: a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece,
cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces:
One-piece, castbrass type with polished chrome-plated finish. e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type. f. Bare Piping at Ceiling
Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece or split-casting, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with
spring clips. h. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate type. M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, foundation
walls, and concrete floor and roof slabs. 1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center
of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make
watertight seal. N. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials.
Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials. O. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in. P. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of
these Specifications for roughing-in requirements. 3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying
piping systems. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings
before assembly.
211118.00 220500-6 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to
ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using leadfree solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and
Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads
full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to
external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections
that have cracked or open welds. G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance"
Article. H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on
bolt threads. I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling
practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-numbe
r PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855. 3. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM
D 3139. K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212. L. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper
towels. towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657. 1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion. 3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS A. Make
connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping 2 inches and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of
equipment. 2. Install flanges, in piping 2-1/2 inches and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric
coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION -COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom
per manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise
indicated. C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference
to other installations.
211118.00 220500-7 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope. E. If equipment selected is other than the basis
of design, and is chosen from the list of acceptable manufactures, the contractor shall be responsible for providing all necessary connections, materials, and serviceability clearance
shop drawings for engineers review prior to start of work. END OF SECTION 220500
211118.00 220519-1 METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 220519 -METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions
of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Thermometers. 2. Gauges.
3. Test plugs. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for domestic and fire-protection water service meters inside the building. 2. Division 23 Section "Facility
Natural-Gas Piping" for gas meters. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated; include performance curves. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PHOTO-ELECTRIC DIGITAL THERMOMETERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable product by one of the following: 1. Palmer -Wahl Instruments Inc. 2. Trerice, H. O. Co. 3. Weiss Instruments,
Inc. 4. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div. 5. 5. Winters Instruments B. Casing: High impact ABS black plastic. C. Stem: Aluminum 6 inch. D. Sensor:
Glass passivated thermistor. E. Range: -58 to 300 deg. F. F. Display: LCD, black character, 1/2 inch high with grey background. G. Illuminance: Bi-directional photo-electric collectors,
35 Lux. 2.2 METAL-CASE, LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable product by one of the following: 1. Ashcroft
Commercial Instrument Operations; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div. 2. Palmer -Wahl Instruments Inc. 3. Trerice, H. O. Co. 4. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
211118.00 220519-2 METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 5. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div. 6. Winters Instruments B. Case: Die-cast aluminum,
9 inches long. C. Tube: Red or blue reading, organic-liquid filled, with magnifying lens. D. Tube Background: Satin-faced, non-reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings.
E. Window: Glass. F. Connector: Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane, with locking device. G. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass
for thermowell installation and of length to suit installation. H. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range. 2.3
THERMOWELLS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following: 1. Ashcroft Commercial Instrument Operations; Dresser Industries;
Instrument Div. 2. Palmer -Wahl Instruments Inc. 3. Trerice, H. O. Co. 4. Weiss Instruments, Inc. Inc. 5. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div. 6. Winters
Instruments. B. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type metal fitting made for insertion into piping and of type, diameter, and length required to hold thermometer. 2.4 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following: 1. Ashcroft Commercial Instrument Operations; Dresser Industries; Instrument
Div. 2. Palmer -Wahl Instruments Inc. 3. Trerice, H. O. Co. 4. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 5. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div. 6. Winters Instruments.
B. Direct-Mounting, Dial-Type Pressure Gauges: Indicating-dial type complying with ASME B40.100. 1. Case: Dry type, cast aluminum metal, 4-1/2-inch diameter. 2. Pressure-Element Assembly:
Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Pressure Connection: Brass, 1/4 inch, bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated. 4. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure
element and connection to pointer. 5. Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings. 6. Pointer: Red metal. 7. Window: Glass. 8. Ring: Metal. 9. Vacuum-Pressure
Range: 30-in. Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure. 10. Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure.
211118.00 220519-3 METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING C. Pressure-Gauge Fittings: 1. Valves: 1/4 inch brass or stainless-steel needle type. 2. Snubbers: ASME B40.5, 1/4 inch brass
bushing with corrosion-resistant, porous-metal disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 THERMOMETER APPLICATIONS A. Install thermometers
in the outlet of each domestic, hot-water storage tank, thermostatic mixing valves, inlet hot water return pump, all balancing stations indicated on the plumbing drawings and on the
incoming water domestic water service just upstream of the water meters. B. Provide the following temperature ranges for thermometers: 1. Domestic Hot Water: 30 to 180 deg F, with 2-degree
scale divisions. 3.2 GAUGE APPLICATIONS A. Install dry-case-type pressure gauges for discharge of each inlet and outlet pressure-reducing valve, inlet and outlet of the reduced pressure
backflow preventer, on the inlet and outlet of the water heater tank(s), upstream and down stream of the domestic water meters, on the inlet and outlet of the water softener(s), on the
inlet and outlet of thermostatic mixing valves, the inlet and outlet of domestic hot water recirculating pumps and each hot water return balancing station indicated on the plumbing drawings.
3.3 INSTALLATIONS A. Install direct-mounting thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions. B. Install thermowells with socket extending a minimum of 2 inches into fluid and
in vertical position in piping tees where thermometers are indicated. C. Install direct-mounting pressure gauges in piping tees with pressure gauge located on pipe at most readable position.
D. Install needle-valve and snubber fitting in piping for each pressure gauge. E. Install thermometers and gauges adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance
for thermometers, gauges, machines, and equipment. F. Adjust faces of thermometers and gauges to proper angle for best visibility. END OF SECTION 220519
211118.00 220523-1 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING SECTION 220523 -GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions
of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Drain valves. 2. Ball
valves. 3. Butterfly valves. 4. Check valves. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 22 plumbing piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only. 2. Division 22 Section
"Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations
for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer. B. ASME Compliance: 1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.
2. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves. C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Use the following precautions
during storage: 1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off
the ground in watertight enclosures. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. This Specification is based on products as manufactured by Milwaukee Valve Company. Equivalent products
as manufactured by Crane Co. -Valve Division, Metraflex, Nibco Inc., Nexus, Griswold, Hammond Valve Co., and Watts are acceptable. For grooved end butterfly valves use Victaulic, Anvil-Gruvlok,
Tyco-Grinnell Mechanical Products, or Nibco.
211118.00 220523-2 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 2.2 DRAIN VALVES (HOSE END) A. For Low Pressure Drainage Service: 1. Threaded Ends 2 inches and Smaller: 150 SWP, 600 CWP,
bronze body, ball valve, 3/4 inch hose outlet connection. 2. Soldered Ends 2 inches and Smaller: 150 SWP 600 CWP, bronze body, ball valve, 3/4 inch hose outlet connection. 3. Provide
cap with chain for all drain connections. 2.3 BALL VALVES A. Two Piece Ball Valves 2 inches and Smaller: 600 WOG, 150 SWP, cast bronze body, ASTM B-584, B-62 or B61 teflon seats, full
port, blow-out proof stem, adjustable packing gland, stainless steel ball and stem, threaded, solder ends, or press fit ends. B. For domestic interior plumbing water piping, hot water
heating, and chilled water piping: 1. Threaded Ends 2 inches and Smaller: Class 150, full port, bronze ASTM B 584 B61 or B-62. No forged brass containing more than 15 percent zinc, 2
piece body, Stainless steel ball and stem. 2. Soldered Ends 2 inches and Smaller: Class 150, full port, bronze ASTM B 584 B61 or B-62. No forged brass containing more than 15 percent
zinc, 2 piece body, Stainless steel ball and stem. 2.4 BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Comply with MSS SP-67. Where butterfly valves are used as shutoffs for terminal or equipment removal or repair,
provide lug type valves and provide wafer type valves for other applications. Valves shall be NSF approved. B. Butterfly Valves 2-1/2 inches and Larger: Lug type body, extended neck,
200 PSI conforming to ASTM A126, Class B, cast iron, EDPM cartridge liner, aluminum bronze disc, 416 stainless steel stem. Sizes up to 6 inch lever operated, sizes 8 inches and larger
gear operated. All butterfly valves shall be suitable for bidirectional dead end service without the need for downstream flange. C. Grooved End 2-1/2 inches and Larger: Ductile iron
or ASTM A536 for body and disc, disc to be encapsulated with a elastomeric coating, Grade "E" EPDM, working pressure of 300 psi, bubble tight. 2.5 CHECK VALVES A. Comply with MSS SP-71
for design, workmanship, material, and testing. Construct pressure containing parts of valves as follows: B. Swing Check Valves 2 inches and Smaller: Class 150, 300 PSI WOG, cast iron
bronze body and cap conforming to ASTM B62. Valves shall be swing type design, threaded or solder ends. C. Swing Check Valves 2-1/2 inches and Larger: Class 125, 200 PSI WOG, cast iron
body, bronze trim and bolted cap conforming to ASTM A126, Class B. Flanged ends, swing type disk. D. Grooved Grooved End 2-1/2 inches and Larger: Ductile iron body to ASTM A536, elastomeric
encapsulated disc, Grade "E" EPDM, type 416 stainless steel shaft, nonslamming spring of 304 stainless steel, working pressure of 300 psi.
211118.00 220523-3 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING E. Unless a composition disc is specified, swing check valves 2 inches and smaller shall be bronze, regrinding, with seating
angle 40 to 45 degrees. A stop plug is required as a renewable stop for the hanger, unless otherwise specified. Disc and hanger shall be separate parts, and the disc shall be free to
rotate. Hanger pins shall be supported on both ends by removable side plug(s). F. Lift Check Valves 3 inches and Smaller: Bronze or forged steel, to suit the service. G. Check Valves
4 inches and Larger: Flanged, swing type, unless otherwise specified. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion.
Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling. B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine
guides and seats made accessible by such operations. C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause
leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects
and damage. E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves. 3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged
to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. C. Install valves in horizontal
piping with stem at or above center of pipe. D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. E. Provide a line size main gate valve on the incoming domestic water service
where it enters the building at a point +/-6” above finished floor and upstream of the domestic water meters. F. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows: 1.
Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. 2. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems
have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs. END OF SECTION 220523
211118.00 220529-1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 220529 -HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This
Section includes the following hangers and supports for plumbing system piping and equipment: 1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Metal framing systems. 4.
Fastener systems. 5. Pipe stands. 6. Equipment supports. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates
for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight
of supported systems, system contents, and test water. B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.
1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 3. Pipe positioning systems. B. Welding certificates. PART 2
-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design: Anvil International, Inc., Portsmouth, New Hampshire. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the product named or a comparable
product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 1. Manufacturers: a. Copper B-Line, Inc., Highland, Illinois b. Erico International Corp., Salon, Ohio c. PHD Manufacturing, Columbiana,
Ohio d. Gripple (for aircraft cable), Batavia, Illinois e. Amber Booth, Houston, Texas
211118.00 220529-2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT B. Products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material
requirements and functional qualities of the specified product. Requests for Architect/Engineer’s approval must be accompanied by the “Substitution Request Form” and complete technical
data for evaluation. All materials for evaluation must be received by the Project Manager and Specification Department at least 10 days prior to bid due date. Additional approved manufacturers
will be issued by Addendum. 2.2 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Beam Clamps: Anvil C-Clamp with retaining clip, Fig. #87 for 3/8 inch to 3/4 inch diameter rod. B. Beam Clamps: Anvil forged
steel beam clamp with upper nut, Fig. #228 for 5/8 inch to 7/8 inch diameter rod. C. Beam Clamps: Anvil Fig. #227 for 3/8 inch and 1/2 inch diameter rod (attachment to top members of
angle iron trusses or to top flanges of I-Beams). D. Hanger Rod: Carbon steel material of of size/diameter required, threaded one end, both ends, and/or continuous thread. Provide threaded
swivel connections to maintain the threaded rod in a vertical position. Bending threaded rod is not acceptable. E. Trapeze Type Hangers: Use structural angle, channel, beams, unistrut
or equivalent support and/or framing. Provide proper attachment for service listed below. F. Pipe Attachment: Anvil split pipe ring Fig. #108 and turnbuckle adjuster Fig. #114 (for pipe
size 3/8 inch to 8 inch, noninsulated). G. Pipe Attachment for Hot and Cold Service: Anvil adjustable clevis Fig. #260 for 1/2 inch to 30 inches noninsulated, stationary pipe lines.
Size Clevis for outer insulation diameter. Provide with galvanized insulation shield Fig. #167. H. Pipe Attachment for Independent Support of Hot Service: Anvil Fig. #181, (2-1/2 inch
to 20 inch pipe insulated) adjustable steel yoke pipe roll. I. Trapeze supported for hot and cold service 2 inch to 12 inch insulated Anvil Fig. #175 pipe roll. Roller sized for insulated
insulated diameter. J. Copper tubing 1/2 inch to 2 inch: When attached directly to copper piping or tubing, hangers shall be equipped with permanently attached factory liner of high
compression factor, chemically treated to resist moisture, abrasion, heat, cold, and vermin. Liner shall be felt or equally approvable material, or hangers shall be equal to copper plated
Anvil Fig. # CT-99. Lined or plated hangers not required when hanger is oversized to cover an insulated line. K. Pipe Attachment: Anvil adjustable clevis for storm sanitary and vent
Fig. #260, for 4 inch to 24 inch pipe. Size for insulation as required. Provide galvanized insulation shield Fig. #167. L. Pipe Attachment: Anvil adjustable clevis for insulated, steel
hot pipe, Fig. #300, for 3/4 inch to 2 inch pipe size. M. Pipe Attachment: Anvil riser clamp Fig. #261 (for either insulated or bare steel pipe, cast iron or conduit) or Fig. #261c (for
glass, copper, brass and/or aluminum pipe), for 3/4 inch to 20 inches and 3/4 inch to 6 inches respe
ctively211118.00 220529-3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PIPE INSTALLATION A. Pipe attachments shall be located adjacent to fittings at
each offset or change in direction, at ends of branches over 5 feet long, at riser pipes, and along piping where necessary to prevent sags, bends, or vibration. Piping risers shall be
supported at each floor level. B. No pipe will be hung from another pipe or pipes. C. Hanger rod must hang perpendicular before and after pipe covering or insulation is applied. 1. Support
piping from rolled steel beams or channels from any point on either top or bottom flanges. 2. Support piping from open web steel joists from hangers connected to either top or bottom
chords within 3 inches of center of chord panel points (intersection of diagonal or vertical chord with top or bottom chord). Joist reinforcement will be required if hangers are not
installed at panel points. Refer to structural details. 3. In addition to
maximum spacing of hangers or supports specified below, the number and spacing of hangers and supports shall be such as to equally distribute loads to all structural members in the system.
4. Connections to structural members shall be clamping devices which do not damage or deform structural elements. Welding to or drilling holes in structural members is not permitted
unless specifically approved by Architect. 5. Hanger rods cannot be bent. D. The maximum horizontal spacing between hangers or supports, measured along the piping for steel pipe, shall
be as follows: Pipe Size Rod Diameter Maximum Spacing* Up to 1-1/4 inch 3/8 inch 8 feet 1-1/2 inch and 2 inch 3/8 inch 9 feet 2-1/2 inch and 3 inch 1/2 inch 10 feet 4 inch and 5 inch
5/8 inch 12 feet 6 inch 3/4 inch 12 feet 8 inch 7/8 inch 12 feet *Provide hangers on all sides of valves, strainers, elbows, tees, check valves, etc. E. The maximum spacing between hangers
or supports, measured along the piping for plastic DWV pipe, shall be 4 feet on center and, at end of branches change in direction and trap arms, 3 feet or greater. F. The maximum horizontal
spacing between hangers or supports, measured along the piping for copper tubing, shall be as follows: Nom. Tubing Size Rod Diameter Maximum Spacing Up to 1 inch 3/8 inch 5 feet 1-1/4
inch and 1-1/2 inch 3/8 inch 8 feet 2 inch 3/8 inch 8 feet 2-1/2 inch 1/2 inch 9 feet 3 inch and 4 inch 1/2 inch 10 feet 6 inch 1/2 inch 12 feet H. Where vertical support locations are
not indicated on the Drawings, support cast iron soil pipe, steel, and copper pipe at every floor. Use friction clamps anchored to building construction with not less than two-point
bearing.
211118.00 220529-4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT I. Where several pipes occur at the same elevation, trapeze type hangers may be used. For parallel runs, use
unistrut or equivalent capped pipe and approved supports and/or framing. The following general rules shall be followed for attachment: 1. Uninsulated steel piping, use clamps. For copper
tubing, the clamps shall be copper plated or lined. 2. Insulated piping 2 inches and smaller, use 18 gauge galvanized steel shield over the insulation in 180 degree segments, minimum
12 inches long with clamp. 3. Insulated piping 2-1/2 inches and larger, use pipe covering protection saddle with roller supports. 4. Trapezing is not allowed for 8 inch diameter and
larger pipes. These pipes must be supported individually. 5. The load on the end of any trapeze shall not be greater than 600 pounds when supported from steel open web joists and 1000
pounds when supported from rolled beams. J. Hangers for pipe shall be of a compatible material or coating. Where pipe insulation is continuous through hangers, insulation blocks shall
be of compressed insulation material of the same thickness as the specified covering and will be equal to or larger in size than the metal insulation protector saddle specified to be
installed. Hangers will be isolated from dissimilar metal unless they are of a compatible material. K. Continuous threaded rod may be used wherever possible. No chain, wire, or perforated
strap shall be used. Threaded rod may not be bent. Threaded swivel connections shall be utilized for attachment to sloping structure. L. Hanger rod shall not be supported from the second
floor or the roof deck. M. Clamp connection on sloped structure shall be provided with swivels so threaded pad will hang vertically. END OF SECTION 220529
211118.00 220553-1 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 220553 -IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings
and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:
1. Equipment labels. 2. Warning signs and labels. 3. Pipe labels. 4. Ceiling tags. 5. Valve tags. 6. Warning tags. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device. C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment
to be labeled with the proposed content for each label. D. Valve numbering scheme. E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate
installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations
of access panels and doors. C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Brady USA B. 3M C. Seton
D. Connecticut E. Bran Ford
211118.00 220553-2 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 2.2 EQUIPMENT LABELS A. Metal Labels for Equipment: 1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch, stainless steel,
0.025-inch, aluminum, 0.032-inch or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 2. Minimum Label Size: Length and
width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 inches by 3/4-inch. 3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4-inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2-inch
for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal
lettering. 4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets. 5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. B. Plastic Labels for Equipment: 1. Material
and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8-inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 2. Letter Color: White. 3. Background
Color: Red. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 inches
by 3/4-inch. 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4-inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2-inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger
lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to threefourths the size of principal lettering. 7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type
permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is
indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be
labeled, labeled, on 8-1/2 by 11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules),
plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. 2.3 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS A.
Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. B. Letter Color: Black.
C. Background Color: White. D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less
than 2-1/2 inches by 3/4-inch. F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4-inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2-inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately
larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
211118.00 220553-3 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets. H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with
substrate. I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions. 2.4 PIPE LABELS A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels:
Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction. B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of
pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive. C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing. D. Pipe Label Contents: Include
identification of pipe service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with
piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high. 3. Included
piping labels are cold water, hot water, hot water return, sanitary, storm, and gas. 2.5 CEILING TAGS A. Additional location and identification of plumbing system valves shall be accomplished
using 1/2 inch diameter colored, pressure-sensitive, adhesive circles. Apply circles to ceiling grid below location of system valves per following color code: Domestic Cold Water = Blue
Domestic Hot Water = Red 2.6 VALVE TAGS A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers. 1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch
minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2 by 11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number,
piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification.
Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. 1. Valve-tag schedule shall be located on the Plumbing Drawings. 2.7 WARNING TAGS A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially
preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing. 1. Size: 4 inches by 7 inches. 2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire. 3. Nomenclature:
Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO NOT OPERATE." 4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.
211118.00 220553-4 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification
devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants. 3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install or permanently fasten labels on
each major item of mechanical equipment. B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible. 3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified
in Division 09 Section "High-Performance Coatings." B. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe labels, at Installer's option. Install
stenciled pipe labels with painted, color-coded bands on each piping system. 1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background. 2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking. C. Locate
pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed
locations as follows: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious,
mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view
of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet
in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels. D. Pipe Label Color Schedule: 1. Low-Pressure, Compressed-Air
Piping: a. Background Color: White. b. Letter Color: Black. 2. Medium-Pressure, Compressed-Air Piping: a. Background Color: White. b. Letter Color: Black. 3. Domestic Water Piping: a.
Background Color: White. b. Letter Color: Black. 4. Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage Piping: a. Background Color: White. b. Letter Color: Black. 3.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION A. Install
tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose
connections; and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.
211118.00 220553-5 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar
to those indicated in the following subparagraphs: 1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape: a. Cold Water: 2 inches, round. b. Hot Water: 2 inches, round. c. Low-Pressure Compressed Air: 2 inches,
round. d. High-Pressure Compressed Air: 2 inches, round. 3.5 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.
END OF SECTION 220553
211118.00 220700-1 PLUMBING INSULATION SECTION 220700 -PLUMBING INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Insulation Materials for Piping and Equipment: a. Provide
the labor, materials, equipment, appliances, services and transportation, and perform operations in connection with the construction and installation of the Work. Work shall be as herein
specified and as denoted on the accompanying Drawings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation." 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type
of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any). B. Shop Drawings: 1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles,
and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. 2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation. 3. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings,
flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation. 4. Detail application of field-applied jackets. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation
and related materials shall have fire-testresponse characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable
testing and inspecting agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. B. Insulation shall meet the latest requirements
of ASHRAE 90.1. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and
grade, and and maximum use temperature. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports
for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
211118.00 220700-2 PLUMBING INSULATION B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application.
Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and fieldapplied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.
C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing. 1.7 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing
heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Insulating and covering materials have been
selected on the basis of mechanical strength, sound transmission characteristic, durability under adverse conditions, vapor impermeability, and appearance, in addition to thermal insulating
value. Materials of lesser performance than specified or materials of less less thickness than specified, will be ordered removed and replaced with acceptable materials. B. The use of
wheat paste, in lieu of lagging adhesives specified, is absolutely forbidden. Vapor barriers on cold surfaces and piping must be continuous through sleeves, hangers, supports, etc. Stapling
of vapor barrier jackets shall be permitted only if staples are sealed with an approved vapor barrier mastic or vapor barrier tape. Maintain the vapor barrier seal throughout each system.
No clips or other attachments shall be used that require the perforation or puncturing of any duct or plenum panel. The Insulating Contractor is hereby notified that any duct or panel
found punctured or penetrated by clips, screws, or any other device for holding insulating materials, even though penetration is not complete, shall be removed and replaced with new
duct or panel at his expense. C. Protection of Insulation: In general, it is intended that insulation located in areas subject to damage such as mechanical equipment rooms, combined
traffic and pipe tunnels or crawl space, and the like, shall be of a dense material to eliminate the possibility of physical damage. Piping insulation installed below 10 feet above finish
floor in unfinished spaces shall be protected with an aluminum jacket or PVC pipe cover. D. Vapor Barriers -General: Vapor barrier facings shall have a maximum flame spread rating of
25 and smoke developed rating not exceeding 50. E. Flame Spread and Smoke Ratings: Components of the insulation for piping, including coverings, mastics, and adhesives shall have a flame
spread rating of not over 25 and the smoke development rating of not over 50. Rating shall be established by tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E84 -Surface Burning characteristics
of building materials, NFPA 255 -Surface burning characteristics of building materials, and UL 723 -Surface burning characteristics of building materials. F. Jacketing: It is imperative
that the jacketing used throughout the systems shall have the flame spread ratings and smoke development ratings herein specified as a maximum limit. Where canvas is required to be used
as jacketing, the Contractor must include the cost in his bid for finishing with suitable mastics, finishing coats, etc., as required to provide fire resistance. 2.2 PIPE INSULATION
211118.00 220700-3 PLUMBING INSULATION A. This Specification is based on products as manufactured by Johns-Manville. Equivalent products as manufactured by Knauf Fiberglass, Nomaco,
CertainTeed, and Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp are acceptable. The following are acceptable manufacturers for elastomeric foam insulation -Rubatex Corp., Armstrong and IMCOA. B. Type
A; Glass Fiber: Johns-Manville Micro-Lock meeting ASTM C547; Class 1, rigid molded, nonflammable. 1. “K” Value: 0.23 at 75 deg F. 2. Maximum Services Temperature: 850 deg F. 3. Vapor
Retarder Jacket: AP-T PLUS White kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminum foil, secure with self sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips or AP jacket with
outward clinch expanding staples or vapor barrier mastic as needed. C. Type B; Hydrous Calcium Silicate: Johns-Manville Thermo-12/Blue ASTM C553; Type 1; rigid molded pipe; asbestos-free
coded throughout material thickness and maintained throughout temperature range. 1. “K” Value: 0.40 at 300 deg F. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 1200 deg F. 3. Compressive Strength
(block): Minimum of 160 psi to produce 5 percent compression at 1-1/2 inch thickness. 4. Tie Wire: 16 gauge stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers. D. Type C; Elastomeric
Foam: Rubatex R-180-FS/R-1800-FS meeting ASTM C534; flexible, cellular elastomeric, molded or sheet. Equivalent products as manufactured by Armacell LLC are also acceptable. 1. “K” Value:
0.23 at 75 deg F. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 220 deg F. 3. Maximum Flame Spread: 25. 4. Maximum Smoke Developed: 50 (3/4 inch thick and below) 100 (above 3/4 inch thick) 5. Connection:
Waterproof vapor retarder adhesive as needed; Rubatex R-373 Adhesive. 6. UV-Protection: Outdoor protective coating; Rubatex 374 Coating. Equivalent products as manufactured by Armacell
LLC are also acceptable. 7. Insulated piping exposed outdoors shall be covered with a 0.016-inch aluminum jacket with each end and all seams sealed to protect from moisture and Ultra-violet
violet exposure. E. Type D; Cellular Glass: ASTM C552; "k" value of 0.35 at 75 degrees F; 8.0 lb/cu ft density. F. Field Applied Jackets: 1. Indoor, exposed applications and mechanical
equipment Rooms. PVC Plastic: Johns-Manville Zeston 2000. One piece molded type fitting covers and jacketing material, gloss white. a. Connections: Tacks; pressure sensitive color matching
vinyl tape. 2. Indoor concealed application canvas jacket: UL listed fabric, 6 oz/sq yd, plain weave cotton treated with dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive. 3. Exterior Applications
Aluminum Jacket: 0.016-inch thick sheet, (smooth) finish, with longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps, die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner. 4. Buried Piping:
Provide factory prefabricated pre-insulated assembly with inner polyurethane foam insulation. Outer surface faced with PVC jacket. 2.3 EQUIPMENT INSULATION A. This Specification is based
on products as manufactured by Johns-Manville. Equivalent products as manufactured by Knauf Fiberglass, CertainTeed, Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp., Rubatex, Armacell LLC, Nomaco, Accessible
Products are acceptable. B. Type E; Flexible Fiberglass Blanket: Johns-Manville 812 Spin-Glas meeting ASTM C612; flexible. 1. "K" Value: 0.24 at 75 degrees F.
211118.00 220700-4 PLUMBING INSULATION 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 450 degrees F. 3. Density: 1.5 lb/cu ft density. 4. Vapor Retarder Jacket: Aluminum foil reinforced with fiber
glass yarn and laminated to fire-resistant kraft, secured with UL listed pressure sensitive tape and/or outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic as needed. C. Type F;
Rigid Fiberglass Board: Johns-Manville 814 Spin-Glas meeting ASTM C612; rigid. 1. "K" Value: 0.23 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 450 degrees F. 3. Density: 3.0 lb/cu
ft density. 4. Vapor Retarder Jacket: Aluminum foil reinforced with fiber glass yarn and laminated to fire-resistant kraft, secured with UL listed pressure sensitive tape and/or outward
clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic as needed. 5. Facing: 1 inch galvanized hexagonal wire mesh stitched on one face of insulation (optional). D. Type G; Rigid Fiberglass
Board: Johns-Manville 1000 Spin-Glas meeting ASTM C612; rigid, noncombustible. 1. "K" Value: 0.23 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 850 degrees F. 3. Density: 3.0 lb/cu
ft density. 4. Facing: 1 inch galvanized hexagonal wire mesh stitched on one face of insulation (optional). E. Type H; Elastomeric Foam: Rubatex R-180-FS/R-1800-FS meeting ASTM C534;
Type II; flexible, cellular elastomeric, molded or sheet. Equivalent products as manufactured by Armacell LLC are also acceptable. 1. "K" Value: 0.23 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum Service
Temperature: 220 degrees F. 3. Maximum Flame Spread: 25. 4. Maximum Smoke Developed: 50 (3/4 inch thick and below) 100 (above 3/4 inch thick) 5. Connection: Waterproof vapor retarder
adhesive as needed; Rubatex R0373 Adhesive. 6. UV-Protection: Outdoor protective coating; Rubatex 374 Coating. Equivalent products as manufactured by Armacell LLC are also acceptable.
PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. 3. Proceed with installation
only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect
insulation application. B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows: 1. Stainless
Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F. Consult coating
manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.
211118.00 220700-5 PLUMBING INSULATION 2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer
for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range. C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact
with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
211118.00 220700-6 PLUMBING INSULATION 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free
of voids throughout the length of equipment and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties. B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and
thicknesses required for each item of equipment and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable
for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at
top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to
piping, fittings, and specialties. G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and
joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams,
and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper
and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts
with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket,
arranged to to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and
dry film thicknesses. L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch wide strips, of same
material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least
1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at
2 inches o.c. a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material
manufacturer to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings. M. Cut insulation
in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
211118.00 220700-7 PLUMBING INSULATION N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. O. Repair damaged insulation
facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. P. For above
ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes.
6. Cleanouts. 3.4 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install
insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches
below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with
sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications
requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor
insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches. 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition
Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install
insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. 1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping"irestopping and fire-resistive
joint sealers. F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies.
Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." 3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges,
and Unions:
211118.00 220700-8 PLUMBING INSULATION 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity,
unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece
shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform
contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. 3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used
for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. 4. Insulate valves using preformed
fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the
thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints,
seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. 5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as
used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams,
and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide
a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. 6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed
pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. 7. Cover segmented insulated
surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce
the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour. 8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric
and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using
PVC tape. 9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels. B. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers,
pressure gauges, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections
by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant. C. Install removable insulation covers at locations
indicated. Installation shall conform to the following: 1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install
same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation. 2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two
times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainlesssteel or aluminum bands. Select band material
compatible with insulation and jacket. 3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of
valve body.
body.211118.00 220700-9 PLUMBING INSULATION 4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure
this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange
or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to
a smooth finish. 5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket. 3.6 CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation
Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers
are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient
services, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure
tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings
and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. When preformed
sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. C. Insulation Installation on Valves
and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.7 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Seal longitudinal seams and
end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe
insulation. 4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed valve
covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available.
211118.00 220700-10 PLUMBING INSULATION 2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit
access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to
valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. 3.8 PIPING INSULATION,
GENERAL A. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation of the following: 1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Underground piping. 3. Chrome-plated
pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury. B. Insulation shall extend through all hangers and shall not be interrupted by any clamps. 3.9 PIPING INSULATION
SCHEDULE Type "A" Type "C" Pipe Insulation Insulation Piping Service Type Size Thickness Thickness Domestic Hot Water Supply (Above Ground) A or C All 1" 1" Domestic Cold, Soft Cold,
Tempered Water and Trap Primer Water piping Supply (Above Ground) A or C All 1" 1" Notes: 1. Vapor barrier is not required for elastomeric foam insulation. 2. Vapor barrier and waterproof
adhesive are required for Type A glass fiber piping insulation. END OF SECTION 220700
211118.00 221116-1 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SECTION 221116 -DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes domestic water piping and water meters inside the building.
B. Water meters will be furnished and installed by utility company. C. Water meters will be furnished by utility company for installation by Contractor. D. Related Sections include the
following: 3. Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for water distribution piping specialties. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide components and installation capable
of producing domestic water piping systems with 125 psig, unless otherwise indicated. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings and water meters, if provided
by the Contractor. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components
-Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9," for potable domestic water piping and components. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 DOMESTIC WATER (COLD WATER, HOT WATER, HOT WATER RETURN, SOFT COLD WATER,
TEMPERED WATER, TRAP PRIMER WATER) A. Piping shall be copper tube complying with ANSI/ASTM B88, Type “L” (above floor) and Type “K” (below floor). Fittings shall be wrought copper, solder-joints
conforming to ANSI B16.22. B. Victaulic, Anvil-Gruvlok, or Tyco-Grinnell Mechanical Products grooved copper connection may be used for -30 deg F to 230 deg F water service. Coupling
shall be Victaulic Style 606, Anvil-Gruvlok Figure No. 7400, or Tyco-Grinnell Mechanical Products No. 772, with Type "E" EPDM gasket. Coupling housing shall be ductile iron conforming
to ASTM A536. Fittings 2 through 4 inches shall be wrought copper conforming to ASTM B75, alloy C12200. Fittings 5 and 6 inches shall be cast bronze conforming to ASTM B584-87 copper
alloy CDA 844 (81-3-7-9). Hanger spacing shall conform to ANSI B31.9. Hanger selection shall conform to MSS-SP-69. C. Piping fittings for pipe sizes 1/2 inch through 4 inch shall be
Type “L” (above floor) and Type “K” (below floor) copper tube complying with ANSI/ASTM B88. Fittings shall be as described in subparagraph below:
211118.00 221116-2 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 1. Fittings for pipe sizes 4 inch and smaller shall be Type “L” (above floor) and Type “K” (below floor). Piping and fittings shall be joined
by a crimping process. D. Per the Owner’s request, there shall be no exceptions or substitutions for the methods and materials described in this Article. E. See Specification Section
222114 for optional piping materials. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section “Earth Moving.” 3.2 PIPE AND FITTING
APPLICATIONS A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. B. Flanges may be
used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated. C. Grooved joints may be used on aboveground grooved-end piping. D. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints
may be used on aboveground copper tubing. 3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Shut Off Duty: Use bronze ball valves. For 2 inch and smaller. Use flanged and ball valves with flanged ends for piping
2-1/2 inches and larger. B. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves. C. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment, on each water
supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball valves. D. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser,
at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping. 1. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches. 2. Install stop-and-waste
drain valves where indicated. 3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." B. Install under-building-slab
copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." C. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gauge, and test tee with valve, inside the building at each
domestic water service entrance. Pressure gauges are specified in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gauges for Plumbing Piping," and drain valves and strainers are specified in Division
22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialities." D. Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb. E. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according
to utility company's requirements.
211118.00 221116-3 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 3.5 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing.”
B. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated. C. Grooved Joints: Assemble
joints with grooved-end-pipe or grooved-end-tube coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions. 3.6 HANGER AND
SUPPORT INSTALLATION – REFER TO SPECIFICATION SECTION 220529 “HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT” 3.7 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping,
fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use
transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve, and extend and connect to the following: 1. Booster
Pumps: Cold-water suction and discharge piping. 2. Water Heaters: Cold-water supply and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
3. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold-and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Fixtures." 4. Equipment:
Cold-and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for 2-1/2
inches and larger. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect domestic water piping as follows: 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved
by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in
presence of authorities having jurisdiction: a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. 3. Reinspection: If authorities
having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. 4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed
by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Test domestic water piping as follows: 1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping
is full of water. 2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit
separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
211118.00 221116-4 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work
that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping
system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. 5. Repair leaks and defects with new
materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.9 ADJUSTING A. Perform the following
adjustments before operation: 1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Adjust balancing
valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow. a. Manually adjust adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide flow of
hot water in each branch. b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated. 5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of piping during
installation. 6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. 7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified
for application where used and are clean and ready for use. 8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. 3.10 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect
potable domestic water piping as follows: 1. Purge new piping and parts of existing domestic water piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using. 2. Use purging and
disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if methods are not prescribed, procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or as described below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following: 1) Fill system or part
thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours. 2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution
with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours. c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing
time. d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. B. Prepare and submit reports of
purging and disinfecting activities. C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. END OF SECTION 221116
211118.00 221316-1 SANITARY, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM SECTION 221316 – SANITARY, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions
of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following for
soil, waste, and vent piping inside the building: 1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Floor drains. 3. Cleanouts. 4. Precast trench drain and catch basin system. 5. Adapter fittings. B.
Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 22 Section "Sanitary Sewerage Pumps." 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding
the following minimum working pressure, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water. 2. Sanitary Sewer, Force-Main Piping: 150 psig. 1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, couplings, floor drains, and trench drains. B. Field quality-control inspection and test reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials
shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. All cast iron soil piping and fittings shall comply with ASTM A 888 (or A 74) and be marked with the collective
trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) and be listed by NSF International. C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic
piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping; "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping;
and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Cleanouts and Floor Drains: Wade, Josam Company, Zurn, J. R. Smith, Mifab, Watts,
Blucher/Josam 2. Adapter Fittings: Fernco 3. Trench Drains: Aco, Polydrain 4. Pipe Tube and Fittings: Tyler, Charlotte, AB&I
211118.00 221316-2 SANITARY, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM 2.2 CLEANOUTS A. Floor: Cast iron, inside caulking, with adjustable nickel-bronze round tops; Josam No. 55000-1. Provide Josam
“-CFC” carpet cleanout flange in carpeted areas. Review Finish Schedule for locations. 1. Acid waste floor cleanouts shall be Orion FCO corrosion resistant finished floor cleanout. Manufactured
from fire retardant polypropylene material, ferrule supplied with countersunk plug and adjustable top with round nickel bronze cover with “AWCO” cast in cover. B. Wall: Concealed screw
plug with countersunk wrench hole and stainless steel screwed flush cover and frame. Josam No. 58600-PLG. C. Review Finish Schedule for locations. 2.3 ADAPTER FITTINGS A. Adaptor fittings
shall be used where changing from one type of material to another such as: "DWV" to cast iron soil pipe shall be with an approved brass adapter ferrule and caulk "DWV" into cast iron
hub. Leaded joint against "DWV" copper is not permitted. Cast iron soil pipe to vitrified tile connection shall be made using ABS "Fernco Donut" gasket. 2.4 FLOOR DRAINS A. Floor Drain
(all finished areas on or above grade conditions). B. Floor Drain “FD-1” (Mechanical Equipment Rooms on or above grade conditions): Cast iron body and flashing collar with square cast
iron grate and slotted sediment bucket, provided with deep seal ‘P’ trap; Josam No. 32200-SD-81. C. Size: As described on the Drawings. D. Tops: Adjustable nickel-bronze. E. Strainers:
6 inch round. All strainers shall be adjustable nonclog style. (Exception: FD-4) F. Bodies: Cast iron, double drainage type. G. Flashing Rings: Nonpuncture clamping rings are required
wherever membrane waterproofing occurs. H. Traps: All traps shall be cast iron, deep seal (4 inches minimum seal). I. Cleanouts: As shown and as required by Code. 2.5 PRECAST TRENCH
DRAIN AND CATCH BASIN SYSTEM (TD-1) A. Description B. Work Includes 1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for all trench drains and catch basins as indicated
and in accordance with provisions of the Contract Documents. 2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades. 3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and
install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances, and devices incidental to or necessary for sound, secure, and complete installation. 4. See Division 01 Section “General
Requirements.”
211118.00 221316-3 SANITARY, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM C. System 1. Description: System of a presloped, 1 meter long sections of polymer concrete with builtin 0.6 percent slope with
drainage accessories and grating. 2. Location of Work: As indicated. D. References and Quality Assurance 1. References a. Ductile iron complying with ASTM A576-80. b. Design Criteria:
Gratings and covers to withstand loadings of Class E heavy duty and hard tire 24-40 Kg/Scm (326-575 psi). c. Installer Qualifications 1) Use only persons thoroughly familiar with manufacturer’s
installation requirements. d. Testing Agency Qualifications 1) Independent laboratory listed in National Directory of Approved Testing Laboratories. e. Allowable Tolerances f. Setting:
Plus/minus 1.55 mm. E. Submittals – See Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures.” 1. Shop Drawings a. Indicate layout of system with connections and accessories. 2. Project Closeout
Data a. Operating and maintenance data, indicating requirements for periodic inspection. b. Warranty. c. Drawings indicating as constructed system with locations of all components. F.
Delivery, Storage, and Handling 1. Perform in a manner to preclude damage to components and surroundings. G. Project Conditions 1. Project Conditions: a. Verify that base to receive
system has been compacted to specified requirements. 2. Environmental Requirements a. Assure that all joints in systems carrying toxic fluids are sealed to preclude leakage. 3. Protection
a. Assure installed system is protected from damage. 4. Sequencing a. Assure
that system is completed and tested prior to placing surrounding paving. H. Warranty 1. Written Warranty: a. Signed jointly by installer, manufacturer, and Contractor. b. Warrant installation
for a period of 1 year from Date of Substantial Completion. I. Surface Drain System 1. ACO Chem Drain – C100. J. Components 1. Drain Trench: Fabricated of polyester polymer concrete,
150 mm wide, 100 mm inside diameter with radiused bottom, having the following attributes: a. Lengths: 1,000 mm and 500 mm. b. Bottoms: Sloped to provide 0.6 percent slope. c. Anchoring
Ribs: Full length. d. Grate Locking Slots: Blind, vibration damping, thermoplastic. e. Interlocking ends. f. Available to 90 meter, continuous slope using sidewall extensions.
211118.00 221316-4 SANITARY, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM 2. Grates a. Ductile iron. 3. Accessories a. End plates. b. Outlet plates. c. Locking devices. d. Sidewall extenders as required.
e. Installation device. f. Catch basins: ACO Type 630 with top section with slotted grate, catch basin base and plastic trash bucket. K. Mixes 1. Concrete to support and surround drain
system, minimum 100 mm thick, 3500 psi, or as specified by Structural Engineer. L. Fabrication 1. By manufacturer’s standards and quality control system. M. Inspection 1. Assure that
substrate is level to within 1 in 1,000. N. Preparation 1. Assure that substrate is compacted per requirements. 2. Where sealant is required, roughen surface and acetone-wash areas to
receive sealant. O. Installation 1. In accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Utilize manufacturer’s approved installation device to assure proper joints, drawn tightly together
with device. P. Field Quality Control 1. Assure that units are installed so drain slopes are correct, and that units align with adjacent paving. Q. Cleaning 1. Leave system and surrounding
area broom clean. R. The trench drain design basis for this Project is Polydrain as manufactured by ABT, Inc. There shall be no substitution for this product. 2.6 SANITARY, WASTE, AND
VENT PIPING A. Aboveground Piping: 1. Pipe size 1-1/2 inches through 15 inches: Hubless cast iron soil pipe, service weight; hubless cast iron soil pipe fittings, hubless joints, ASTM
A-74; CISPI 301. All cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall bear the collective mark of the cast iron soil pipe institute. Copper D.W.V., ASTM B306 piping and fittings is also acceptable.
2. Hubless cast iron soil pipe shall be joined using “Heavy Weight” couplings torqued to 80 inch/lbs meeting the requirements of ASTM by Clamp-All, Mission or Husky. Couplings shall
be constructed of type 304 stainless steel with 305 Stainless Steel worm drive screws; 4 bands 4 inch and below, 6 bands 5 inch and above. The gasket material shall be neoprene and conform
to ASTM C-564. 3. Heavy Duty couplings as described above may be provided by the pipe manufacturer for fitting locations only. All straight runs of pipe must be joined.
211118.00 221316-5 SANITARY, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM B. Underground Piping: 1. Pipe size 2 inches through 15 inches: Cast iron hub and spigot soil pipe service weight; Cast iron
hub and spigot soil pip fittings, ASTM A-74; CISPI 301; compression gasket joints, ASTM C564-70, or lead and oakum joints are acceptable. All cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall bear
the collective mark of the cast iron soil pipe institute. 2. Hubless cast iron soil pipe shall be joined using “Heavy Weight” couplings torqued to 80 inch/lbs meeting the requirements
of ASTM by Clamp-All, Mission or Husky. Couplings shall be constructed of type 304 stainless steel with 305 Stainless Steel worm drive screws; 4 bands 4 inch and below, 6 bands 5 inch
and above. The gasket material shall be neoprene and conform to ASTM C-564. 3. Heavy Duty couplings as described above may be provided by the pipe manufacturer for fitting locations
only. All straight runs of pipe must be joined. 4. DWV PVC 40 pipes and fittings. C. Pressure Pipe 1. SDR 13 PVC with pressure fittings. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION A. Refer to
Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. 3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise
indicated. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Size same as drainage piping
up to 4 inches. Use 4 inches for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated. 2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum
intervals of 50 feet for piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack. B. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush
with finished floor. C. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall. D. Install
floor drains as noted noted on the Drawings. Set grates of drains 1/2 inch below finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
2. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. 3. Install individual
traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated. E. Install trench drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates at elevation
noted on Drawings. F. Assemble FRP channel drainage system components according to manufacturer's written instructions. Install on support devices so that top will be flush with adjacent
surface.
211118.00 221316-6 SANITARY, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM G. Assemble precast trench drain and catch basin system components according to manufacturer's written instructions. Install
on support devices so that top will be flush with adjacent surface. H. Install through-penetration firestop assemblies in plastic conductors and stacks at floor penetrations. I. Install
deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets. J. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping discharge into sanitary drainage
system. K. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof membrane. L. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. M. Install
escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe
fittings. N. All sanitary vent piping, including acid vent piping, which terminates to any exterior point, shall extend to a point 2’-0” above any outdoor air intake which are located
within 10’-0” of the intake opening. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping,
fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance. 3.5 PIPING INSTALLATION B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in
Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." C. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers. D. Install cleanout
fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary force-main piping. E. Install mechanical sleeve (in basement conditions). Select number of interlocking rubber links required
to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." F. Install wall-penetration fitting at each
service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make installation watertight. G. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter
IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
211118.00 221316-7 SANITARY, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM H. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep
bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend
fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow
more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
I. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping
upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull
past each joint as completed. J. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Building Sanitary Drain: 1/4 inch per
foot downward in direction of flow for piping 2 inches and smaller; 1/8 inch per foot downward in direction of flow for piping 3 inches and larger. 2. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward
vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack. K. Install underground soil and waste drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321. L. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until
it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 3.6 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work
Results for Plumbing." B. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints. C. Join
hubless cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints. D. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable,
lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated. E. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints Below Underground Slab: Join piping according
to ASTM D 2665. 3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Install
the following: 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs according to the following: a. MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel
clevis hangers. 3. Support stacks at each floor with two-piece risers clamps. B. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
211118.00 221316-8 SANITARY, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM 3.8 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect soil and waste piping
to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following: 1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect
drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. 2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller
than required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. 3.9 FIELD
QUALITY CONTROL A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities
having jurisdiction. 1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. 2. Final Inspection: Arrange
for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction
find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities
having jurisdiction. D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: 1. Test
for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test,
complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved.
Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside leaders, on completion of roughing-in.
Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection,
water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks. 4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove
they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use
U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect
plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks. 5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 6.
Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. E. Test force-main piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures,
as follows: 1. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced force-main piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed
before it was tested.
211118.00 221316-9 SANITARY, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM 2. Cap and subject piping to static-water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of
piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. 3. Repair leaks and defects
with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 4. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.10 CLEANING A. Clean
interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage
from traffic and construction work. C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. 3.11 PROTECTION A. Underground Slab PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents
exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-based latex paint. END OF SECTION 221316
211118.00 221329-1 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS SECTION 221329 -SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following sewage pumps and accessories for
sanitary drainage piping systems in buildings: 1. Sewage pump basins. 2. Packaged, submersible sewage pump units. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and size of sewage pump
specified. Include certified performance curves with operating points plotted on curves; and rated capacities of selected models, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings:
Diagram power, signal, and control wiring. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each sewage pump to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of sewage pumps and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product
Requirements." B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage. B. Protect bearings and couplings
against damage. C. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: ABS, Barnes, Hydromatic,
Weil 2.2 DUPLEX SEWAGE EJECTOR (WWP-1) A. Furnish and install two Stancor model SE-100 submersible sewage ejectors. B. Duplex NEMA 4X Electrical Control Panel 1. Components all factory
wired and tested before shipment and including the following items:
211118.00 221329-2 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS a. Two magnetic across-the-line motor starters with three overload protection and under voltage release with reset buttons. b. Two disconnect
switches/circuit breakers. c. One main through-the-door disconnect, lockable. d. Two test-off-auto selector switches. e. One control transformer and control fuses (control voltage 120
volts). f. One lot of terminals and 120 volt relays and liquid level controls (automatic float balls). g. One high level alarm light. h. One high level horn and silence reset button.
i. Two auxiliary contacts for remote alarm of MS system (high level, seal failure). j. Two green pump “ON” pilot lights. k. One automatic electric alternator. l. Two moisture probe sensor
relays. 2. The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish and install a 40 inch reinforced fiberglass basin with anti-floatation flange and suitable inlet hubbed fittings, heavy duty steel
basin cover epoxy coated with plate hatch is to be furnished with flush mounted access hatch, cover, cover, 3 inch vent, and guide rail stainless steel system. 3. Flanged discharge check
valves (non-slam sewage type) and flanged gate valves to be furnished with pumps and pump basin. 4. Contractor shall furnish all flanged interconnection discharge piping and interconnecting
fittings. 5. The pump manufacturer’s representative shall inspect pumps and perform initial operation services, make the necessary adjustment to the pump system to insure that the pumps
are operating properly and instruct the Owner’s maintenance staff in the proper care and maintenance of all components. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in for plumbing
piping to verify actual locations of sanitary drainage and vent piping connections before sewage pump installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified
in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." B. Install sewage pumps according to applicable requirements in HI 1.4. C. Install pumps and arrange to provide access for maintenance including
removal of motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories. D. Set submersible sewage pumps in basin floors. Make direct connections to sanitary drainage piping. E. Install sewage pump
basins and connect to drainage and vent piping. Brace interior of basins according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent distortion or collapse during concrete placement.
Set basin cover and fasten to basin top flange. Install cover so top surface is flush with finished floor. F. Construct sewage pump pits and connect to drainage and vent piping. Set
pit curb frame recessed in and anchored to concrete. Fasten pit cover to pit curb flange. Install cover so top surface is flush with finished floor. G. Install packaged, submersible
sewage pump units and make direct connections to drainage and vent piping. H. Support piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps.
211118.00 221329-3 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping." Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to sewage pumps to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect sanitary drainage and vent piping to
pumps. Install discharge piping equal to or greater than size of pump discharge piping. Install vent piping equal to or greater than size of pump basin vent connection. Refer to Division
22 Section "Sanitary Drainage and Vent Piping." 1. Install check and shutoff valves on discharge piping from each pump. Install unions on pumps having threaded pipe connections. Install
valves same size as connected piping. Refer to Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for general-duty valves for sanitary waste piping. 3.4 STARTUP SERVICE A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Verify
bearing lubrication. 3. Disconnect couplings and check motors for proper direction of rotation. 4. Verify that each pump is free to rotate by hand. If pump is bound or drags, do not
operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected. 5. Verify that pump controls are correct for required application. B. Start pumps without exceeding safe motor power: 1. Start
motors. 2. Open discharge valves slowly. 3. Check general mechanical operation of pumps and motors. C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. D. Remove and replace damaged and malfunctioning
components. 1. Pump Controls: Set pump controls for automatic start, stop, and alarm operation as required for system application. 2. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker
trip ranges as indicated, or if not indicated, for normal operation. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain controls and pumps. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION 221329
211118.00 221519-1 GENERAL-SERVICE PACKAGED AIR COMPRESSORS AND RECEIVERS SECTION 221519 -GENERAL-SERVICE PACKAGED AIR COMPRESSORS AND RECEIVERS SYSTEM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. This Section includes
piping and related specialties for general service compressed air systems operating a 200 psig or less. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Type “L” copper tubing. 2. Schedule 40 black
steel piping. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties
and accessories. 1. Compressed-air pipes, fittings, and valves. 2. Pressure regulators. Include rated capacities and operating characteristics. 3. Quick couplings. 4. Hose assemblies.
B. Brazing certificates. C. Qualification Data: For Installers. D. Field quality control test reports. E. Operation and Maintenance data: For general service compressed-air piping specialties
to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Compressed-Air Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied
by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify the Owner
no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of compressed-air service. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTNIGS A. Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Type L seamless, drawn-temper, water tube. 1. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, solder-joint pressure type
or MSS SP-73, wrought copper with dimensions for brazed joints.
211118.00 221519-2 GENERAL-SERVICE PACKAGED AIR COMPRESSORS AND RECEIVERS 2. Schedule 40 black steel piping with threaded malleable iron fittings. 2.2 JOINING MATERIALS A. Flange Bolts
and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. B. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. C. Brazing
Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for generalduty brazing, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 VALVES A. Metal Ball and Check Valves: Comply with requirements
in Division 22 Section “General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping.” 2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. General Requirements for Dielectric Fittings: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous
materials with insulating material; suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. Include threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system
materials. B. Dielectric Unions: Factory fabricated union assembly, for 250 psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F. 2.5 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance
with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. 2. Flexicraft Industries. 3. Metraflex, Inc. 4. Unaflex, Inc. 5. Universal Metal Hose; a Hyspan Company
2.6 SPECIALTIES A. Air-Main Pressure Regulators: Bronze body, direct acting, spring-loaded manual pressure-setting adjustment, and rate for 250 psig inlet pressure, unless otherwise
indicated. 1. Type: Pilot operated. B. Air-Line Pressure Regulators: Diaphragm operated, bronze body, direct acting, spring-loaded manual pressure-setting adjustment, and rated for 200
psig minimum inlet pressure, unless otherwise indicated. C. Automatic Drain Valves: Stainless-steel body and internal parts, rated for 200 psig minimum working pressure, capable of automatic
discharge of collected condensate. 2.7 QUICK COUPLINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by on the following: 1. Aeroquip Corporation; Eaton
Corp. 2. Milton Industries, Inc. 3. Parker Hannifin Corp.; Fluid Connectors Group; Quick Coupling Division 4. Rectus Corp. 5. Snap-Tile, Inc.; Quick Disconnect and Valve Division.
211118.00 221519-3 GENERAL-SERVICE PACKAGED AIR COMPRESSORS AND RECEIVERS B. General Requirements for Quick Couplings: Assembly with locking-mechanism feature for quick connection and
disconnection of compressed-air hose. C. Automatic-Shutoff Quick Couplings: Straight-through brass body with O-ring or gasket seal and stainless steel or nickel plated steel operating
parts. 1. Socket End: With one-way valve and threaded inlet for connection to piping or threaded hose fitting. D. Valveless Quick Couplings: Straight-through brass body with stainless
steel or nickel plated steel operating parts. 1. Socket End: With O-ring or gasket seal, without valve, and with barbed inlet for attaching hose. 2. Plug End: With barbed outlet for
attaching hose. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 22 Section "General-Service Compressed-Air Piping." Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. 3.2 VAVLE APPLICATIONS A. General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements
in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for metal general-duty valves. Use metal valves, unless otherwise indicated. 1. General-Duty Valves: Use valve types
specified in "Valve Applications" Article in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" according to the following: a. Low-Pressure Compressed Air: Valve types specified
for low-pressure compressed air. b. High-Pressure Compressed Air: Valve types specified for medium-pressure compressed air. c. Equipment Isolation NPS 2 inches and Smaller: Safety-exhaust,
copper-alloy ball valve with exhaust vent and pressure rating at least as great as piping system operating pressure. d. Grooved-end valves may be used with grooved-end piping and grooved
joints. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of compressed-air piping. Indicated locations and arrangements were
used to size pipe and calculate
friction loss, expansion, air-compressor sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. B. Install
piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. Install piping indicated
to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited, unless otherwise indicated. D. Install piping
above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal and to coordinate with other services occupying that space. E. Install piping adjacent to equipment and
machines to allow service and maintenance.
211118.00 221519-4 GENERAL-SERVICE PACKAGED AIR COMPRESSORS AND RECEIVERS F. Install air and drain piping with 1 percent slope downward in direction of flow. G. Install nipples, flanges,
unions, transition and special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings same as or higher than system pressure rating, unless otherwise indicated. H. Flanged joints may be used instead
of specified joint for any piping or tubing system. I. Extended-tee outlets with brazed branch connection may be used for copper tubing, within extruded-tee connection diameter to run
tube diameter ratio for tube type, according to Extruded Tee Connections Sizes and Wall Thickness for Copper Tube (Inches) Table in ASTM F 2014. J. Install eccentric reducers where compressed-air
piping is reduced in direction of flow, with bottoms of both pipes and reducer fitting flush. K. Install branch connections to compressed-air mains from bottom of main. Provide drain
leg and drain trap at end of each main and branch and at low points. L. Install piping to permit valve servicing. M. Install piping free of sags and bends. N. Install fittings for changes
in direction and branch connections. 3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris
from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp
dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless
dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
D. Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Join according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter. E. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise
indicated, to tube end. Join according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." 3.5 VAVLE INSTALLATION A. General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty
Valves for Plumbing Piping." B. Install shutoff valves and unions or flanged joints at compressed-air piping to air compressors. C. Install shutoff valve at inlet to each automatic drain
valve, filter, lubricator, and pressure regulator. D. Install check valves to maintain correct direction of compressed-air flow to and from compressed-air piping specialties and equipment.
211118.00 221519-5 GENERAL-SERVICE PACKAGED AIR COMPRESSORS AND RECEIVERS 3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports
for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support devices. B. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. C. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: 1. 100 Feet or
Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. 2. Longer than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. D. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer:
MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. E. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. F. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling.
3.7 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION A. Install identifying labels and devices for general-service compressed-air piping, valves, and specialties. Comply with requirements in Division 22
Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Piping Leak Tests for Metal
Compressed-Air Piping: Test new and modified parts of existing piping. Cap and fill general-service compressed-air piping with oil-free dry air or gaseous nitrogen to pressure of 50
psig above system operating pressure, but not less than 150 psig. Isolate test source and let stand for four hours to equalize temperature. Refill system, if required, to test pressure;
hold for two hours with no drop in pressure. 2. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Inspect filters, lubricators, and pressure regulators for proper operation. C. Prepare
test reports. END OF SECTION 221519
211118.00 223400-1 FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS SECTION 223400 -FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the
Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following fuel-fired
water heaters: 1. Tankless condesning power gas water heater (burner in tank). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater indicated. Include rated capacities,
operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring. C. Product Certificates: For each type of commercial and
instantaneous water heater, signed by product manufacturer. D. Source quality-control test reports. E. Field quality-control test reports. F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water
heaters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain same
type of water heaters through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of water heaters and are based
on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements." C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article
100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. D. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components -Health Effects; Sections
1 through 9" for all components that will be in contact with potable water. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with Architectural and Structural Drawings.
1.6 WARRANTY A. Warranty Period(s): From date of Substantial Completion:
211118.00 223400-2 FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 1. Provide basis-of-design manufacturer’s standard warranty on parts and labor as a minimum. Alternate manufacturers from the list
of acceptable manufacturers shall provide their standard warranty for parts and service, but no less than the basis-ofdesign. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject
to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Navien B. Start-Up: 1. Complete operating and start-up instructions shall be furnished with system. Manufacturer
to provide factory authorized start-up at job site. System shall meet or exceed ASHRAE 90.1-1989. Installation shall meet and/or exceed all factory requirements and recommendations.
2. Refer to Drawings for heater location and orientation. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install and place in operation the water heater system as shown on the Drawings, complete
with piping, supports, circulating pumps, etc., and as recommended by the manufacturer. System shall meet or exceed state and local codes. B. Provide shut-off valves and unions entering
and leaving heater. In addition, provide for multiple heaters, balancing valves in entering line with entering and leaving gauges, and balance for equal flow through each heater. 3.2
WATER HEATER INSTALLATION A. Install water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.
Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible. B. Install gas water heaters according to NFPA 54. C. Install gas shutoff valves on gas supplies to gas water heaters
without shutoff valves. D. Install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low
points in water piping for water heaters that do not have tank drains. Refer to Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for hose-end drain valves. E. Install thermometer
thermometer on outlet piping of water heaters. Refer to Division 22 Section "Meters and Gauges for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers. F. Fill water heaters with water. 3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent
to water heaters to allow service and maintenance. Arrange piping for easy removal of water heaters.
211118.00 223400-3 FUEL-FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and
adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections. Report results in writing. B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test
reports: 1. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, confirm proper
operation. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. Remove and replace water heaters that do not pass tests and inspections
and retest as specified above. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain instantaneous
and commercial water heaters. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION 223400
211118.00 230500-1 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC SECTION 230500 -COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,
including General and Special Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Warranty, closeout procedures, and submitted requirements are specified in
Division 01 Sections. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Transition fittings. 3.
Dielectric fittings. 4. Mechanical sleeve seals. 5. Sleeves. 6. Escutcheons. 7. Grout. 8. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 9. Painting and finishing.
10. Concrete bases. 11. Supports and anchorages. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct chases,
unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels. B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include
finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions.
Examples include rooftop locations. D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings
and chases. E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials: 1. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
2. PE: Polyethylene plastic. 3. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials: 1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene monomer rubber. 2.
NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Transition fittings.
211118.00 230500-2 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Mechanical sleeve seals. 4. Escutcheons. B. Welding certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Support Welding:
Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification
tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. C. Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished
provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. Mechanical Contractor is responsible
for all cost associated with increased electrical characteristics. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,
AND HANDLING A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of
dirt, debris, and moisture. B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. C. Sheet metal accessories shall include air distribution outlets,
air filters, sound attenuators and ductwork accessories. D. Store all insulation, ductwork, and sheet metal accessories indoors, or in a storage trailer. Do not store outdoors. Any insulation,
ductwork, or accessories stored outdoors will be rejected, and shall be removed from the project site by the Contractor. E. Do not allow insulation, ductwork, or sheet metal accessories
to be exposed to moisture, in order to avoid introduction of mold spores into the building. F. Do not run air systems prior to ductwork being insulated, in order to prevent condensation
from occurring on the ductwork. Equipment start-up schedule to be approved by Construction Manager and A/E. Startup can be rejected if project site is not clean. G. Equipment covered
under this article include the following: 1. Coils 2. Unit heaters 3. Exhaust fans 4. Pumps 5. Infrared Radiant Heaters 6. All other equipment as indicated on drawings H. Equipment shall
be stored at the site indoors, or outdoors on pallets. Do not set units directly on grade. I. Equipment shall be fully protected from moisture while being stored. Use heavy tarps with
tie down straps or other means to protect the units from moisture and outdoor weather conditions.
211118.00 230500-3 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC J. All air side devices such as, fans, terminal devices, ductwork and ductwork accessories shall be shipped, received and stored in such
a manner that moisture is not allowed to be exposed to any portion of the equipment. Any equipment that is found to have or have had moisture present shall be removed from the job site
and replaced. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for HVAC installations. B. Coordinate
installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. C. Coordinate requirements for access
panels and doors in walls, ceilings, and floors for HVAC items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors for building components are specified
in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames." Access doors for ductwork are specified in Section 233300 – Air Duct Accessories. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Unless otherwise stipulated
under a particular heading, the following rules relative to responsibilities of the several Contractors and subcontractors will apply. 1. Each Contractor shall install roughing-in work
pertaining to his trade for connection of Work performed under other Sections of these Specifications. B. Certain areas will be designated for the storage of materials and equipment
and cooperation with the Owner in minimizing interference with existing operations will be mandatory. 1. Where possible, store materials inside and protected from weather. Where necessary
to store outside, elevate above grade and enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping. 2. Follow manufacturer's instructions for receiving, inspecting, handling, storage, and protection
of products prior to final installation C. Equipment Clearances and Requirements 1. Due to the possibility of restrictions imposed by space limitations, the responsibility for resolving
conflicts resulting from the use of equipment other than the design basis shall rest with the equipment supplier and the Contractor. Submittals for this equipment will be considered
as a statement that clearances for access, service, maintenance, etc., have been checked and found adequate. 2. Alternate equipment or the equipment of additional manufacturers named
in these documents shall meet Base Bid Specifications. In the event such equipment or any equipment which the bidder proposes to furnish, deviates from the requirements of equipment
first named regarding electric service, power wiring, control wiring, plumbing or piping, sound attenuation, or vibration damping, it shall be the responsibility of the bidder to include
in his price a sufficient sum to cover additional costs or charges resulting there from. D. In general, the piping and ductwork shown on the Drawings shall be considered as diagrammatic
for clearness in indicating the general run and connections required, and may not be shown in its true position. The piping and ductwork and equipment may have to be offset, lowered
or raised, as required, or as directed at the site in order to accommodate field conditions. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections
for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods. B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
211118.00 230500-4 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 2.2 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below. B. Pipe-Flange
Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness
or specific material is indicated. a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel
flanges. 2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated. C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1,
carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. E.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for
general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated. G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12
for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping: 1. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. 2. PVC
Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. I. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer. 2.3 TRANSITION FITTINGS A. Plastic-to-Metal
Transition Fittings: CPVC and PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solventcement-joint end. B. Plastic-to-Metal
Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end. C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition
Unions: MSS SP-107, CPVC and PVC four-part union. Include brass end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut. 2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Refer to Section 232113 – Hydronic
Piping for dielectric fitting requirements. 2.5 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe
and sleeve. 1. Manufacturers: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
211118.00 230500-5 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size
of pipe. 3. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to
secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element. 2.6 SLEEVES A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
longitudinal joint. B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe,
with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and
bolts and nuts for membrane flashing. 1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws. 2.7 ESCUTCHEONS A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with
an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening. B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with
polished chrome-plated finish. C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw. 1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated. D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.
1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated. E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated finish. F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed or exposed-rivet
hinge, set screw or spring clips, and chrome-plated finish. G. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate. H. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge
and set screw. 2.8 GROUT A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout. 1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining,
noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. PART
3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS -COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems.
211118.00 230500-6 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements
were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping in general location as indicated in Contract Documents unless
deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. Minor offsets, lowering or raising the piping shall be routed to accommodate field conditions at no expense to the project.
Contractor shall verify all dimensions and clearances and all existing field conditions. C. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:
1. New Piping: a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips. d. Bare Piping at at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, castbrass type with polished chrome-plated
finish. e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type. f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass
type with polished chrome-plated finish. g. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type and set screw. h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service
Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. i. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type with hinge and set screw. j. Bare Piping
in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type. k. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set screw. l. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms:
One-piece, floor-plate type. D. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes. E. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves. F. Install sleeves for
pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs. 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a. Exception:
Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required
to secure clamping ring if ring is specified. 2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. 3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch
annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials: a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6. b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes
NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board partitions. c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install
section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing. 1) Seal space outside
of sleeve fittings with grout. 4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size,
depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation. G. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves
and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Install steel pipe for sleeves
smaller than 6 inches in diameter. 2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.
211118.00 230500-7 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe
in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand
and make watertight seal. H. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve
size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing
elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts
against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. I. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating
of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials.
J. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in. K. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements. 3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces.
Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM
D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. 3. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe
and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855. 4. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. C. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139. D.
Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212. E. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels.
Join according to ASTM D 2657. 1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion. F. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends
and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise
indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger,
adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar
metals.
211118.00 230500-8 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 3.4 DUCT SYSTEMS
– COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install ductwork according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying ductwork systems. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate
general location and arrangement of ductwork systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size ductwork and calculate friction loss, expansion, fan sizing, and other design
considerations. Install ductwork in general location as indicated in Contract Documents unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. Minor offsets, lowering or
raising the ductwork shall be routed to accommodate field conditions at no expense to the project. Contractor shall verify all dimensions and clearances and all existing field conditions.
3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION -COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated. B. Install equipment level
and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service,
maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible
locations. D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope. 3.6 PAINTING A. Painting of HVAC systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division
09 Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting." B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory
finish. 3.7 CONCRETE BASES A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions
indicated, but not less than 6 inches larger in both directions than supported unit. 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install
dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base. 3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural
concrete floor. 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items
to be embedded. 5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
7. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 3.8 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A.
Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
211118.00 230500-9 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor HVAC materials
and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. 3.9 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support,
and anchor HVAC materials and equipment. B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections
between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members. C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads. 3.10 GROUTING A. Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment
base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout. E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases. F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors. H. Cure placed grout. END OF SECTION 230500
211118.00 230513-1 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT SECTION 230513 -COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general
provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Refer to Division 23 Section “Variable-Frequency
Motor Controllers”. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors
for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation. 1.3 COORDINATION A.
Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following: 1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the
load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL MOTOR
REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in HVAC equipment schedules or Sections. B. Motor shall be Premium Efficient
as described in NEMA Standards Publication MG 1-2006. 2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level.
B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating
sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. 2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor. B. Efficiency: Premium
Efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1. C. Service Factor: 1.15. D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque. 1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding. 2. For motors
with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed. E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.
211118.00 230513-2 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage. G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial
and thrust loading. H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating. I. Insulation: Class F. J. Code Letter Designation: 1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G. 2. Motors
Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic. K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller
than 324T. 2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with
required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method. B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated
with and approved by controller manufacturer. 1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies,
and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width modulated inverters. 2. Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation. 3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature
rise; Class H insulation. 4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors. 5. All motors driven by a variable frequency controller shall include
a maintenance free, circumferential, conductive microfiber shaft grounding ring (AEGIS-SGR) to discharge shaft currents to ground. 2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS A. Motors larger than 1/20
hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application: 1. Permanent-split capacitor. 2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run.
4. Capacitor start, capacitor run. B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type. C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings bearings
suitable for radial and thrust loading. D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type. E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor
when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns
to normal range. PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 230513
211118.00 230529-1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 230529 -HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings
and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes
the following hangers and supports for HVAC system piping and equipment: 1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Metal framing systems. 4. Thermal-hanger shield
inserts. 5. Equipment supports. 6. Duct hangers and supports. 7. Pipe curbs. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel
shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports. 2. Division 21 Section "Water-Based Fire-Suppression Systems" for pipe hangers for fireprotection piping. 3. Division
23 Section " Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for vibration isolation devices. 4. Division 23 Section(s) " Metal Ducts" and "Nonmetal Ducts" for duct hangers
and supports. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology
for Pipe Hangers and Supports." 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems,
system contents, and test water. B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. C. Provide
additional supplemental steel as required to support equipment ductwork, piping, etc. from structure above. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Steel pipe hangers and
supports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 2. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding
Code--A
luminum." 211118.00 230529-2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 3. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." 4. AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing
Steel." 5. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A.
Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.
B. Manufacturers: 1. AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc. 2. Bergen-Power Pipe Supports. 3. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 4. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 5.
Empire Industries, Inc. 6. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. 7. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc. 8. Grinnell Corp. 9. GS Metals Corp. 10. National Pipe Hanger Corporation. 11. PHD Manufacturing,
Inc. 12. PHS Industries, Inc. 13. Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 14. Tolco Inc. C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating,
jacket, or liner. E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of bearing surface of piping. 2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS A. Description:
MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop-or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts. 2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Description: MFMA-3, shop-or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels and other components. B. Manufacturers: 1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div. 3. GS Metals Corp. 4. Power-Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd. 5. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 6. Tolco Inc. 7. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International,
Ltd.
211118.00 230529-3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated. D. Nonmetallic Coatings:
Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 2.5 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS A. Description: 100-psig minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal shield. B. Manufacturers:
1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. 3. PHS Industries, Inc. 4. Pipe Shields, Inc. 5. Rilco Manufacturing Company, Inc. 6. Value Engineered Products, Inc. C. Insulation-Insert
Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with vapor barrier. D. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass. E. For Trapeze or Clamped
Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe. F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. G. Insert Length: Extend
2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature. 2.6 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Description: Welded, shop-or field-fabricated equipment support made
from structural-steel shapes. 2.7 DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Support horizontal ductwork runs with suitable strap or trapeze hangers. When weight of duct between hangers does not exceed
60 pounds, hangers shall be 1 inch wide by 18 gauge. For greater weights, use trapeze hangers, as approved by A/E. B. Contractor may use load rated cable suspension system. Suspension
system shall have a specified manufacturers safe working load and supplemental safety factor of at least five times the safe working load. 1. Suspension system shall be verified by SMACNA
Testing and Research Institute to be in compliance with SMACNA Duct Construction Standards Guidelines (1995 CH.4). 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36, steel plates,
shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior
applications. 1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 2.9 STRUCTURAL ROOF CURBS A. Roof curbs with vibration isolators
and wind or seismic restraints are specified in Division 23 Section “Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment”.
211118.00 230529-4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT B. Equipment Supports: Internally reinforced metal equipment supports capable of supporting superimposed live and
dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction indicated on Drawings; with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, integral metal cant, and integrally
formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom. C. Materials: Galvanized steel with corrosion-protection coating, watertight gaskets, and factoryinstalled wood nailer; complying with
NRCA standards. 1. Curb Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. a. Materials: ASTM C1071, Type I or II. b. Thickness: 1-1/2 inches. 2. Application: Factory applied
with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to the internal surface of curb. a. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C916, Type I. b. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive
attachment, mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in cabinet. c. Liner materials
applied in this location shall have air-stream surface coated with a temperature-resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric depending on service air velocity.
d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C916, Type I. e. Metal Counterflashing: Manufacturer’s standard, removable, fabricated of same metal and finish as equipment support. Coordinate with
roofing contractor. f. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile. g. Fabricate equipment supports to minimum height of
12 inches unless otherwise indicated. h. Sloping Roofs: Where roof slope exceeds 1:48, fabricate each support with height to accommodate roof slope so that tops of supports are level
with each other. Equip supports with water diverters or crickets on sides that obstruct water flow. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS A. Specific hanger and support
requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment. B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping
system Sections. C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish. D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments
for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching. F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and
Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension
of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16, requiring up to 4
inches of insulation. 3. Carbon-or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.
4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 24, if little or no insulation is required.
211118.00 230529-5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow offcenter closure for hanger installation
before pipe erection. 6. Adjustable, Swivel Split-or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8. 7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers
(MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to
NPS 8. 9. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2. 10. Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment
Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8. 11. Extension Hinged or 2-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3. 12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion
or contraction. 14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. 15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles
(MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe. 16. Adjustable, Pipe Saddle Supports
(MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. 17. Single
Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 18. Adjustable Roller Hangers
(MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 20, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type
44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary. 20. Pipe Roll and Plate
Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 24, if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary. 21.
Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 30, if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion
and contraction. G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps
(MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20. 2. Carbon-or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required
for riser clamps. H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type
13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS
Type 11, split pipe rings. 4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building attachments. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For
120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 6. Swivel connections shall be utilized for attachment to sloping structure. Threaded rod shall not be bent. I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise
indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
211118.00 230529-6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete
ceiling. 2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape. 3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps
(MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. 4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments
(MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25):
For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange edge. 8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. 9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For
attaching to bottom of steel Ibeams for heavy loads. 10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel Ibeams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel. 12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above
by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb. 13. Side-Beam
Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. 15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS
Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited. J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. 3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47):
Where indicated to control piping movement. 2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches. 3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type
49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs. 4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion in piping systems. 5. Variable-Spring
Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger. 6. Variable-Spring Base Supports
(MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support. 7. Variable-Spring Trapeze
Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support. 8. Constant Supports:
For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection,
hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types: a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
211118.00 230529-7 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member. L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze
pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. M. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified
in piping system Sections. N. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required
in concrete construction. The use of powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors may only be used after approval from the structural engineer. 3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.
B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze
pipe hangers. 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for
individual pipe hangers. 2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1. C. Metal Framing System Installation:
Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems. D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield
for insulated piping. E. Fastener System Installation: 1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after
concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating
manual. 2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Pipe
Stand Installation: 1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounting Type: Assemble components and mount on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane. 2. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands:
Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. Refer to Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for curbs. G. Install hangers and supports complete
with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. H. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes. I. Install hangers and supports
to allow controlled thermal movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends,
and similar units. J. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
211118.00 230529-8 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT K. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments
at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten
inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. L. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement
will not be transmitted to connected equipment. M. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for
power piping) and ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded. N. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following: 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating
above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD
of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power piping and ASME B31.9 for building services piping. 2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles
if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include
steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields
shall span an arc of 180 degrees. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS
6: 18 inchesng and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick. 5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include
wood inserts. 6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. 7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation. 3.3 EQUIPMENT
SUPPORTS A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor. B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment
and make smooth bearing surface. C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports. 3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications
for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size
limitations. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with
the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
211118.00 230529-9 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing
and contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope
of pipe. B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches. 3.6 PAINTING A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed
areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply
paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Touch Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint
on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 painting Sections. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to
comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 230529
211118.00 230548-1 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 230548 – VIBRATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general
provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following:
1. Isolation pads. 2. Isolation mounts. 3. Spring isolators. 4. Elastomeric hangers. 5. Spring hangers. 6. Steel and inertia equipment bases. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. IBC: International Building
Code. B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service. C. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development for the State of California. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Wind-Restraint Loading:
1. Minimum 10 lb/sq. ft. multiplied by the maximum area of the HVAC component projected on a vertical plane that is normal to the wind direction, and 45 degrees either side of normal.
1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device. 2. Illustrate and indicate style,
material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size component used. a. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing
laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code -Steel." PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
211118.00 230548-2 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. Isolation Technology, Inc. 3. Kinetics Noise Control. 4. Mason Industries. 5. Vibration
Eliminator Co., Inc. 6. Vibration Isolation. 7. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. B. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad
area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment. 1. Resilient Material: Oil-and water-resistant
neoprene. C. Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber, hermetically sealed compressed fiberglass, or neoprene isolator elements with factory-drilled, encapsulated
top plate for bolting to equipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range. 1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded
steel housing containing two separate and opposing, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing
during normal operation. 2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridgebearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO. D. Spring Isolators: Freestanding,
laterally stable, open-spring isolators. 1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent
of the required deflection at rated load. 3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed,
without deformation or failure. 5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch-thick, rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates
shall limit floor load to 500 psig. 6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment. E. Elastomeric Hangers: Single
or double-deflection type, fitted with molded, oil-resistant elastomeric isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color-code or otherwise
identify to indicate capacity range. F. Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in compression. 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection
to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not
less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More
than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded,
oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame. 7. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity
between hanger rod and support spring coil. 2.2 RESTRAINED VIBRATION ISOLATION ROOF-CURBS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
211118.00 230548-3 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. Isolation Technology, Inc. 3. Kinetics Noise Control. 4. Mason Industries. 5. Thybar
Corporation. 6. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 7. Vibration Isolation. 8. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. B. General Requirements for Restrained Vibration Isolation Roof-Curb: Factory-assembled,
fully enclosed, insulated, air-and watertight curb designed to resiliently support equipment and to withstand and wind forces. C. Lower Support Assembly: Formed sheet-metal section containing
adjustable and removable steel springs that support upper frame. Upper frame shall provide continuous support for equipment and shall be captive to resiliently resist seismic and wind
forces. Lower support assembly shall have a means for attaching to building structure and a wood nailer for attaching roof materials, and shall be insulated with a minimum of 2 inches
of rigid, glass-fiber insulation on inside of assembly. D. Spring Isolators: Adjustable, restrained spring isolators shall be mounted on 1/4-inch-thick, elastomeric vibration isolation
pads and shall have access ports, for level adjustment, with removable waterproof covers at all isolator locations. Isolators shall be located so they are accessible for adjustment at
any time during the life of the installation without interfering with the integrity of the roof. 1. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with wind
restraint. a. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt. b. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed
height of the spring at rated load. c. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. d. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
e. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. E. Snubber Bushings: All-directional, elastomeric snubber bushings at least
1/4 inch thick. F. Water Seal: Galvanized sheet metal with EPDM seals at corners, attached to upper support frame, extending down past wood nailer of lower support assembly, and counterflashed
over roof materials. G. Steel Base: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails. 1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch clearance
above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases or rails. a. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps. 2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes,
plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment. 3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger
isolation mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support. H. Inertia Base: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails ready for placement of cast-in-place
concrete. 1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height height with not less than 1-inch clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide
bases or rails. a. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps. 2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape
to accommodate supported equipment.
211118.00 230548-4 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation mountings and to provide for anchor
bolts and equipment support. 4. Fabrication: Fabricate steel templates to hold equipment anchor-bolt sleeves and anchors in place during placement of concrete. Obtain anchor-bolt templates
from supported equipment manufacturer. 2.3 FACTORY FINISHES A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting. B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied
to factory-assembled and -tested equipment before shipping. 1. Powder coating on springs and housings. 2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanized metal components for exterior
use. 3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use. 4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation-control devices to indicate capacity range.
PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation. C. Proceed with installation only
after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLICATIONS A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application. B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners:
Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces. C. Strength of Support
and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading
limits. 3.3 VIBRATION-CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
B. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure. C. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to
structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members. D. Drilled-in Anchors: 1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items
prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded
items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines. 2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until
concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.
211118.00 230548-5 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed
with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened. 4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation
of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.
5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior applications. 3.4
ADJUSTING A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight. B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment
installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation. C. Adjust active height of spring isolators. D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement
of equipment within normal mode of operation. END OF SECTION 230548
211118.00 230553-1 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 230553 -IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general
provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Equipment
labels. 2. Warning signs and labels. 3. Pipe labels. 4. Duct labels. 5. Stencils. 6. Valve tags. 7. Warning tags. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting
of surfaces where devices are to be applied. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors. C. Install identifying devices before installing
acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS A. Metal Labels for Equipment: 1. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch Stainless steel, 0.025-inch
Aluminum, 0.032-inch or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary
for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances
up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. 4. Fasteners:
Stainless-steel self-tapping screws. 5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. B. Plastic Labels for Equipment: 1. Material and Thickness:
Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 2. Letter Color: White. 3. Background Color: Black.
4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
211118.00 230553-2 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 6. Minimum
Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing
distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. 7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent
adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number. 2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS A. Material and
Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. B. Letter Color: Black. C. Background
Color: Yellow. D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2
by 3/4 inch. F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger
lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws. H.
Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions.
2.3 PIPE LABELS A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction. B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels:
Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive. C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type,
permanent-adhesive backing. D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating
flow direction. 1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high. 2.4 DUCT LABELS A. Material: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing. B. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures
up to 160 deg F.
211118.00 230553-3 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT C. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. D. Minimum
Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing
distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. E. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
F. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, duct size, and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. Flow-Direction
Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2
inches high. 2.5 STENCILS A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum letter height of 1-1/4 inches for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4
inch for access panel and door labels, equipment labels, and similar operational instructions. 1. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, black unless otherwise indicated. Paint may be in pressurized
spray-can form. 2. Identification Paint: Exterior, in colors according to ASME A13.1 unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 VALVE TAGS A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters
for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers. 1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 2. Fasteners:
Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook. B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as
shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff
and similar special uses. 1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. 2.7 WARNING TAGS A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention
tags, of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing. 1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum. 2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire. 3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary
caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO NOT OPERATE." 4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of
substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.
211118.00 230553-4 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment. B.
Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible. 3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting."
B. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels with painted, color-coded bands
or rectangles, complying with ASME A13.1, on each piping system. 1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background. 2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking. C. Locate pipe labels
where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations
as follows: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious,
mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view
of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet
in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings.
Omit intermediately spaced labels. 3.4 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install self-adhesive duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts. B. Stenciled Duct Label Option: Stenciled labels,
showing service and flow direction, may be provided instead of plastic-laminated duct labels, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1 inch high is needed for proper identification
because of distance from normal location of required identification. C. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet in each
space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system. 3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves;
valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections
of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule. 3.6 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items
where required. END OF SECTION 230553
211118.00 230593-1 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC SECTION 230593 -TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general
provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes TAB to
produce design objectives for the following: 1. Air Systems: a. Constant-volume air systems. b. Exhaust systems. 2. HVAC equipment quantitative-performance settings. 3. Verifying that
automatic control devices are functioning properly. 4. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate
and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce fan speed or adjust a damper. B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches,
and terminals, according to indicated quantities. C. Barrier or Boundary: Construction, either vertical vertical or horizontal, such as walls, floors, and ceilings that are designed
and constructed to restrict the movement of airflow, smoke, odors, and other pollutants. D. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors
of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated. E. NC: Noise criteria. F. Procedure:
An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable results. G. RC: Room criteria. H. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical
order. I. Smoke-Control System: An engineered system that uses fans to produce airflow and pressure differences across barriers to limit smoke movement. J. Smoke-Control Zone: A space
within a building that is enclosed by smoke barriers and is a part of a zoned smoke-control system. K. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement.
In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump. L. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side. M. System Effect:
A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
211118.00 230593-2 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC N. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a fan when installed under
conditions different from those presented when the fan was performance tested. O. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. P. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid
or energy, enters or leaves the distribution system. Q. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of systems or equipment. R. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Firm:
The entity responsible for performing and reporting TAB procedures. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved
forms certified by TAB firm. B. Warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by either AABC or NEBB. B. Certification
of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the following: 1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports.
2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification. C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC's "National
Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems," NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems,"
or SMACNA's "HVAC Systems -Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing." D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating,
Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems or NEBB's " Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems, " Section II, " Required Instrumentation for
NEBB Certification." E. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently if required by instrument manufacturer. 1. Keep an updated updated
record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the name of party performing instrument calibration. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will
occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations. B. Partial Owner Occupancy:
Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations.
211118.00 230593-3 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, HVAC
controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support and assist TAB activities. B. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include
scheduled test dates and times. C. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed. 1.8 WARRANTY A. National Project
Performance Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" forms stating that AABC will assist
in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions: 1. The certified TAB firm has
tested and balanced systems according to the Contract Documents. 2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation limits. B. Special Guarantee:
Provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee
shall include the following provisions: 1. The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract Documents. 2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance
capabilities within design and installation limits. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project
requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. 1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary
Conditions of Contract. 2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gauge cocks, thermometer wells, flowcontrol devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers,
are installed as required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient
system and equipment operation. B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment. C. Examine Project Record Documents described in Division 01 Section "Project Record
Documents." D. Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies
and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
211118.00 230593-4 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements,
including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce performance
ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air
systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the
design data and installed conditions. F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified
in individual Sections have been performed. G. Examine system and equipment test reports. reports. H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing
devices, such as test ports, gauge cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations
are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation. I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting
and balancing. J. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls
is ready for operation. K. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations. L. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or
mixing fluid flows. M. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. N. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction
piping. O. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls. P. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following: 1.
Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices are operated by the intended controller. 2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller. 3. Integrity of valves and
dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units, mixing boxes, and variable-air-volume terminals.
4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including two-way valves and three-way mixing and diverting valves, are properly connected. 5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to
avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and cold walls. 6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions. 7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the
Contract Documents. 8. Controller set points are set at indicated values. 9. Interlocked systems are operating. 10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to indicated
values. Q. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if
different from indicated values.
211118.00 230593-5 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures. B. Complete system readiness
checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following: 1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete. 2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 3. Automatic
temperature-control systems are operational. 4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 6. Isolating and balancing valves are
open and control valves are operational. 7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided. 8. Windows
and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met. 3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each
system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems", NEBB's "Procedural Standards
for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems", or SMACNA's "HVAC Systems -Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and this Section. B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and
equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch
insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project. C. Mark equipment and balancing device
settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speedcontrol levers, and similar controls
and devices, to show final settings. D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units. 3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS A. Prepare test
reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts. C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements. D. Check airflow patterns
from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return-and exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers. E. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical
interlocks, and motor starters. F. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. G. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
H. Check for airflow blockages. I. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. J. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.
211118.00 230593-6 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC K. Check for proper sealing of air duct system. 3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS A. Adjust fans to deliver
total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. 1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows: a. Measure
outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions. b. Measure static pressure directly at the
fan outlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from flexible connection
and downstream from duct restrictions. d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan. 2. Measure static pressure across each
component that makes up an air-handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment. a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance
personnel must change filters. 3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.
4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with calculated
system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions. 5. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed
higher or lower than indicated speed. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to accommodate fan-speed changes. 6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments
that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fanmotor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure
amperage in full cooling, full heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower. B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain
ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. 1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust volume dampers
until the proper static pressure is achieved. a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets
and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone. 2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated
airflows within specified tolerances. C. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments. 1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's
written instructions and calculating factors. D. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments
using volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals. 1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without
generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents. 2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. 3.6 PROCEDURES FOR
EXHAUST AIR SYSTEMS A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. 1. Measure fan static pressures to determine
actual static pressure.
211118.00 230593-7 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 2. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static pressure versus actual static
pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions.
3. Obtain approval from A/E for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to accommodate
fan-speed changes. 4. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fanmotor
amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.
B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. 1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from
the balancing damper and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved. a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse
measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone. 2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue
to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. C. Measure air devices without making adjustments. 1. Measure air devices using a direct-reading
hood or outlet manufacturer’s written instructions and calculating factors. D. Adjust air devices for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values.
Make adjustments using volume dampers. 1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above above
the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents. 3.7 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data: 1. Manufacturer,
model, and serial numbers. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating. B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual
bypass for the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial numbers, and nameplate data. 3.8 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER
COILS A. Water Coils: Measure the following data for each coil: 1. Entering-and leaving-water temperature. 2. Water flow rate. 3. Water pressure drop. 4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering
and leaving air. 5. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling cooling coils. 6. Airflow. 7. Air pressure drop.
211118.00 230593-8 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC B. Refrigerant Coils: Measure the following data for each coil: 1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 2.
Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 3. Airflow. 4. Air pressure drop. 5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature. 3.9 PROCEDURES FOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS A. During
TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic temperature-control system. B. Measure indoor wet-and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a
period of two successive eight-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied. C. Measure
outside-air, wet-and dry-bulb temperatures. 3.10 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned. B. Check transmitter and controller locations
and note conditions that would adversely affect control functions. C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements. D. Check the operation
of limiting controllers (i.e., high-and low-temperature controllers). E. Check free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators. F. Check the sequence
of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and correlate with airflow and water flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input changes. G. Check
the interaction of electrically operated switch transducers. H. Check the interaction of interlock and lockout systems. I. Check main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor
and dryer operations. J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine whether the system operates on a grounded or nongrounded power supply. K. Note operation of
electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations. 3.11 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply, Return,
and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent. 3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent. 4. Cooling-Water
Flow Rate: 0 to minus 5 percent.
211118.00 230593-9 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 3.12 REPORTING A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination"
Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring
and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices. B. Status Reports: As Work progresses,
prepare reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced.
Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors. 3.13 FINAL REPORT A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality
font, on standard bond paper, in three-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems. B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and
sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. C. Final Report Contents: In addition to
certified field report data, include the following: 1. Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Manufacturers' test data. 4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 5.
Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop Drawings and Product Data. D. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following
data in the final report, as applicable: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of TAB firm. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and
address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section
of the report. Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following: a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description
of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size,
and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet-and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan
drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
211118.00 230593-10 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and
hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following: 1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Water and steam
flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 5. Terminal units. 6. Balancing stations. 7. Position of balancing devices. F. Apparatus-Coil Test
Reports: 1. Coil Data: a. System identification. b. Location. c. Coil type. d. Number of rows. e. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c. f. Make and model number. g. Face area in sq. ft.
h. Tube size in NPS. i. Tube and fin materials. j. Circuiting arrangement. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Average face velocity in fpm. c. Air
pressure drop in inches wg. d. Outside-air, wet-and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. e. Return-air, wet-and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. f. Entering-air, wet-and dry-bulb temperatures
in deg F. g. Leaving-air, wet-and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. h. Water flow rate in gpm. i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. j. Entering-water temperature in
deg F. k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types. m. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig. n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg
F. o. Inlet steam pressure in psig. G. Gas-and Oil-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to manufacturer's
factory startup equipment reports, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial
number. f. Fuel type in input data. g. Output capacity in Btuh. h. Ignition type. i. Burner-control types. j. Motor horsepower and rpm. k. Motor volts, phase, and hertz. l. Motor full-load
amperage and service factor. m. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. n. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual
Values): a. Total airflow rate in cfm.
211118.00 230593-11 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC b. Entering-air temperature in deg F. c. Leaving-air temperature in deg F. d. Air temperature differential in deg F. e.
Entering-air static pressure in inches wg. f. Leaving-air static pressure in inches wg. g. Air static-pressure differential in inches wg. h. Low-fire fuel input in Btuh. i. High-fire
fuel input in Btuh. j. Manifold pressure in psig. k. High-temperature-limit setting in deg F. l. Operating set point in Btuh. m. Motor voltage at each connection. n. Motor amperage for
each phase. o. Heating value of fuel in Btuh. H. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following: 1. Fan Data: a. System identification. b. Location. c.
Make and type. d. Model number and size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class. g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. h. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center,
and amount of adjustments in inches. 2. Motor Data: a. Make and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave
make, size in inches, and bore. f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches. g. Number of belts, make, and size. 3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Suction static pressure in inches wg. I. Duct Traverse
Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following: 1. Report Data: a. System and air-handling unit number. b. Location and zone. c.
Traverse air temperature in deg F. d. Duct static pressure in inches wg. e. Duct size in inches. f. Duct area in sq. ft. g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm. h. Indicated velocity in fpm.
i. Actual airflow rate in cfm. j. Actual average velocity in fpm. k. Barometric pressure in psig. J. Air-Terminal-Device Reports: 1. Unit Data: a. System and air-handling unit identification.
b. Location and zone.
211118.00 230593-12 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC c. Test apparatus used. d. Area served. e. Air-terminal-device make. f. Air-terminal-device number from system diagram.
g. Air-terminal-device type and model number. h. Air-terminal-device size. i. Air-terminal-device effective area in sq. ft. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Airflow rate
in cfm. b. Air velocity in fpm. c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm. d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm. e. Final airflow rate in cfm. f. Final velocity in fpm. g. Space
temperature in deg F. K. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. System and air-handling unit identification.
b. Location and zone. c. Room or riser served. d. Coil make and size. e. Flowmeter type. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Entering-water temperature
in deg F. c. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. d. Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig. e. Entering-air temperature in deg F. f. Leaving-air temperature in deg F. L. Compressor
and Condenser Reports: For refrigerant side of unitary systems, stand-alone refrigerant compressors, air-cooled condensing units, or water-cooled condensing units, include the following:
1. Unit Data: a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Unit make and model number. d. Compressor make. e. Compressor model and serial numbers. f. Refrigerant weight in lb. g. Low ambient
temperature cutoff in deg F. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Inlet-duct static pressure in inches wg. b. Outlet-duct static pressure in inches wg. c. Entering-air, dry-bulb
temperature in deg F. d. Leaving-air, dry-bulb temperature in deg F. e. Condenser entering-water temperature in deg F. f. Condenser leaving-water temperature in deg F. g. Condenser-water
temperature differential in deg F. h. Condenser entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig. i. Condenser leaving-water pressure in feet of head or psig. j. Condenser-water pressure
differential in feet of head or psig. k. Control settings. l. Unloader set points. m. Low-pressure-cutout set point in psig. n. High-pressure-cutout set point in psig. o. Suction pressure
in psig. p. Suction temperature in deg F. q. Condenser refrigerant pressure in psig.
211118.00 230593-13 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC r. Condenser refrigerant temperature in deg F. s. Oil pressure in psig. t. Oil temperature in deg F. u. Voltage at each
connection. v. Amperage for each phase. w. Kilowatt input. x. Crankcase heater kilowatt. y. Number of fans. z. Condenser fan rpm. aa. Condenser fan airflow rate in cfm. bb. Condenser
fan motor make, frame size, rpm, and horsepower. cc. Condenser fan motor voltage at each connection. dd. Condenser fan motor amperage for each phase. M. Pump Test Reports: Calculate
impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Service. d. Make and size. e. Model and serial
numbers. f. Water flow rate in gpm. g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig. i. Pump rpm. j. Impeller diameter
in inches. k. Motor make and frame size. l. Motor horsepower and rpm. m. Voltage at each connection. n. Amperage for each phase. o. Full-load amperage and service factor. p. Seal type.
2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Static head in feet of head or psig. b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig. c. Actual impeller size in inches. d. Full-open
flow rate in gpm. e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig. f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig. g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig. h. Final total
pressure in feet of head or psig. i. Final water flow rate in gpm. j. Voltage at each connection. k. Amperage for each phase. 3.14 INSPECTIONS A. Initial Inspection: 1. After testing
and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance readings documented in
the Final Report. 2. Randomly check the following for each system: a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets. b. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals.
c. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the reading to the set point. d. Measure sound levels at two locations. e. Measure space pressure of at least
10 percent of locations. f. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.
211118.00 230593-14 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC g. Note deviations to the Contract Documents in the Final Report. B. Final Inspection: 1. After initial inspection is complete
and evidence by random checks verifies that testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a final inspection be made by Engineer. 2.
TAB firm test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of Owner, Architect, Commissioning Agent, or Construction Manager. 3. Engineer shall randomly select measurements
documented in the final report to be rechecked. The rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded, or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished
in a normal 8-hour business day. 4. If the rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements
shall be noted as "FAILED." 5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing
shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected. 6. TAB firm shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include
all changes and resubmit the final report. 7. Request a second final inspection. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner shall contract the services of another TAB firm to complete
the testing and balancing in accordance with the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the final payment. 3.15 ADDITIONAL TESTS A. Within 90 days of completing
TAB, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions. B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB
procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional testing, inspecting, and adjusting during near-peak summer and winter conditions. END
OF SECTION 230593
211118.00 231123-1 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING SECTION 231123 -FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings. 2. Piping specialties.
3. Piping and tubing joining materials. 4. Valves. 5. Pressure regulators. 6. Mechanical sleeve seals. B. Provide new piping for the natural gas service which shall be installed in strict
accordance with the latest edition of the Pressure Piping Code, NFPA Code #54, and in confirmation with the local gas utility company requirements, as approved by the Architect/Engineer.
C. Contractor shall make his own arrangements with local gas utility company for connection on house side of gas meter or regulator. D. This Contractor is responsible for all work on
the gas system which occurs downstream of the gas meter. This includes all valves, gas gas pressure regulators inside or outside of the building, gas pressure regulator vents for a complete
and operational system. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately
below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels. B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces
and mechanical equipment rooms. C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop
locations. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Natural-Gas System Pressure within Buildings: 0.5 psig but not more than 2 psig. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following:
1. Piping specialties. 2. Piping materials and associated components a specified. 3. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of selected models.
4. Pressure regulators. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code -Steel."
211118.00 231123-2 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. C. Electrical Components,
Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing natural-gas piping according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Deliver pipes and tubes
with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. C. Store and
handle pipes and tubes having factory-applied protective coatings to avoid damaging coating, and protect from direct sunlight. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Perform site survey, research
public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact utility-locating service for area where Project is located. B. Interruption of Existing Natural-Gas Service: Do
not interrupt natural-gas service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide purging and startup
of natural-gas supply according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of natural-gas service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption
of natural-gas service without Owner's written permission. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. B. Coordinate requirements
for access panels and doors for valves installed concealed behind finished surfaces. Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames." PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPES,
TUBES, AND FITTINGS A. Gas piping for pipe sizes 2 inches and smaller may be Schedule 40 steel pipe with threaded malleable iron fittings in compliance with NFPA 54 (1988) Section 2.6.8.
Gas piping and fittings for pipe sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be welded Schedule 40 black steel. Piping smaller than 1/2 inch NPS will not be allowed. B. Fittings shall be standard
weight welding fittings, Nibco, Tubeturns, Allied, or approved equal. C. Corrugated, Stainless-Steel Tubing: Comply with ANSI/IAS LC 1. (Pipe sizes 2 inches and smaller.) 1. Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. OmegaFlex, Inc. 2. Tubing: ASTM A 240/A 240M, corrugated, Series 300 stainless steel.
211118.00 231123-3 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 3. Coating: PE with flame retardant. a. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM
E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1) Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2) Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
4. Fittings: Copper-alloy mechanical fittings with ends made to fit and listed for use with corrugated stainless-steel tubing and capable of metal-to-metal seal without gaskets. Include
brazing socket or threaded ends complying with ASME B1.20.1. 5. Striker Plates: Steel, designed to protect tubing from penetrations. 6. Manifolds: Malleable iron or steel with factory-applied
protective coating. Threaded connections shall comply with ASME B1.20.1 for pipe inlet and corrugated tubing outlets. 2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Appliance Flexible Connectors: 1. Indoor,
Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24. 2. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69. 3. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply
with ANSI Z21.75. 4. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with polymer coating. 5. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig. 6. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel. 7. Threaded Ends: Comply with
ASME B1.20.1. 8. Maximum Length: 72 inches. B. Quick-Disconnect Devices: Comply with ANSI Z21.41. 1. Copper-alloy convenience outlet and matching plug connector. 2. Nitrile seals. 3.
Hand operated with automatic shutoff when disconnected. 4. For indoor or outdoor applications. 5. Adjustable, retractable restraining cable. C. Y-Pattern Strainers: 1. Body: ASTM A 126,
Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for 2 inches and smaller; flanged ends for 2-1/2 inches and larger. D. Weatherproof
Vent Cap: Cast-or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant wire screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threadedend connection.
2.3 2.3 JOINING MATERIALS A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas. B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness
and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. C. Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing
more than 0.05 percent phosphorus are prohibited. 2.4 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES A. See "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is applied in
various services. B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, 2 inches and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33. 1. CWP Rating: 125 psig. 2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 3.
Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3.
211118.00 231123-4 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual
Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1 inch and smaller. 6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4
inches to 2 inches shall have initials "WOG" permanently marked on valve body. C. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, 2-1/2 inches and Larger: Comply with ASME B16.38. 1. CWP Rating:
125 psig. 2. Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME B16.5 for steel flanges. 3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and
"Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 4. Service Mark: Initials "WOG" shall be permanently marked on valve body. D. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with
Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. b.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. c. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. 2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 5. Seats:
Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. 6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff
Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 9. Listing: Valves 1 inch and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. E. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance
with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Lee Brass Company. b. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. 2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Plug: Bronze. 4. Ends: Threaded,
socket, or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 5. Operator: Square head or lug type
with tamperproof feature where indicated. 6. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 7. Listing: Valves 1 inch and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
8. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. F. Cast-Iron, Nonlubricated Plug Valves: MSS SP-78. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide products by one of the following: a. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. b. Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div. 2. Body: Cast iron, complying with ASTM A 126, Class B. 3. Plug: Bronze or nickel-plated
cast iron. 4. Seat: Coated with thermoplastic. 5. Stem Seal: Compatible with natural gas.
211118.00 231123-5 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 6. Ends: Threaded or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve
Schedule" Articles. 7. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 8. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 9. Listing: Valves 1 inch and smaller shall be listed
and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. G. Cast-Iron, Lubricated Plug
Valves: MSS SP-78. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. b. Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div.
2. Body: Cast iron, complying with ASTM A 126, Class B. 3. Plug: Bronze or nickel-plated cast iron. 4. Seat: Coated with thermoplastic. 5. Stem Seal: Compatible with natural gas. 6.
Ends: Threaded or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 7. Operator: Square head or lug
type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 8. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 9. Listing: Valves 1 inch and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body. 2.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS A. General Requirements: 1. Single stage and suitable for natural
gas. 2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components. 3. Elevation compensator. 4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators 2 inches and smaller; flanged for regulators 2-1/2 inches
and larger. 5. Each regulator shall be vented independently to the outside atmosphere with an approved vent cap. Verify sizes and venting requirements with the gas company. 6. Gas piping
installed in a ceiling air plenum area shall not contain any valves or unions. B. Service Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide products by one of the following: a. Equimeter. b. Rockwell. 2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum. 3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 4. Diaphragm
Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the valve port. 6. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. 7. Seal Plug:
Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 8. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping
external to the regulator. 9. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed 150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff. 10. Overpressure
Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator. 11. Atmospheric Vent: Factory-or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not connected to vent piping. 12. Maximum
Inlet Pressure: 100 psig.
211118.00 231123-6 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING C. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following: a. Equimeter. b. Rockwell. 2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum. 3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated
steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the valve port. 6. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. 7. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized,
mineral-filled nylon. 8. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator.
9. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed 150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff. 10. Atmospheric Vent: Factory-or field-installed,
stainless-steel screen in opening if not connected to vent piping. 11. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig or 5 psig. D. Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18. 1. Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Equimeter. b. Rockwell. 2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum. 3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel;
interchangeable. 4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber. 6. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 7. Factory-Applied Finish: Minimum three-layer
polyester and polyurethane paint finish. 8. Regulator may include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 9. Maximum Inlet Pressure:
0.5 psig. 2.6 SLEEVES A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends. B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent
to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. 2.7 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed
for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. 2.8 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid-and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured
for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a
protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored yellow.
211118.00 231123-7 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in for natural-gas piping system to verify actual locations of piping connections
before equipment installation. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning
off natural gas to premises or piping section. B. Inspect natural-gas piping according to NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code to determine that natural-gas utilization devices
are turned off in piping section affected. C. Comply with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code requirements for prevention of accidental ignition. 3.3 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping. B. Steel Piping with Protective Coating: 1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe
after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints. 2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating manufacturer. 3. Replace pipe having damaged
PE coating with new pipe. C. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. D. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall and Slab Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves
and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Install steel pipe for sleeves
smaller than 6 inches in diameter. 2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter. E. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall
pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical
sleeve seals. F. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical
sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. G. Install pressure
gauge upstream and downstream from each service regulator. Pressure gauges are specified in Division 23 Section "Meters and Gauges for HVAC Piping." 3.4 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION A.
Comply with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement
of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
211118.00 231123-8 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical
installations. D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. E. Install piping indicated to be exposed
and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. F. Locate valves
for easy access. G. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps. H. Install piping free of sags and bends. I. Install fittings for changes
in direction and branch connections. J. Install escutcheons at penetrations of interior walls, ceilings, and floors. K. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls,
partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." L.
Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in. M. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for roughing-in requirements. N. Drips and Sediment
Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate
is subject to freezing. 1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than
3 inches long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap. O. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators,
and overpressure protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap. P. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade
or floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view. Q. Concealed Gas Supply Piping Locations: A Schedule 40 plastic coated or mill wrapped welded gas casing vent that is a minimum of
two times the pipe diameter larger than the supply pipe shall be installed on all concealed gas supply piping, i.e., below floors, in walls, and vented full size directly to atmosphere
and terminated with a 90 degree gooseneck fitting and bug screen. The vent pipe shall be sealed around the supply pipe at each point where pipe enters and exits the concealed space.
All fittings shall be coated and a test of 50 psi for 10 minutes be made before covering. Installation shall be in accordance with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code. R. All
gas valves installed shall be accessible below ceilings outside of concealed areas and no higher than 54 inches AFF. S. All gas piping and equipment regulator vent piping from a point
downstream of the gas meter to the final connection to equipment shall be painted yellow like Porter Paints No. D6209-4. 1. Prohibited Locations:
211118.00 231123-9 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING a. Do not install natural-gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating
ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator shafts. b. Do not install natural-gas piping in solid walls or partitions. T. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install
fittings with level side down. U. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping. V. Install unions in pipes 2 inches and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection
to each piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections. W. Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode. X. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure
regulator. Y. Install pressure gauge upstream and downstream from each line regulator. Pressure gauges are specified in Division 23 Section "Meters and Gauges for HVAC Piping." Z. Horizontal
runs shall grade down to riser at a pitch of 1/4 inch in 15 feet. AA. At each point where gas piping connects to equipment and at the bottom of each riser, furnish and install suitable
drip leg or moisture pocket comprising drip pocket not les than 12 inches long, unless otherwise indicated, with reducer and 125 lb. black malleable cap for blowing out drip pockets.
BB. Piping systems for natural gas shall be electrically continuous and properly bonded to an approved grounding electrode in accordance with the National Electrical Code, NFPA No. 70.
CC. Gas lines shall be purged to the outside atmosphere before being put into service. Purging must be witnessed by the Architect or an authorized person to witness purging of the lines.
3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel tubing, aluminum, or copper connector. B. Install regulators and
overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate for servicing and testing. 3.6 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. B. Remove
scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. C. Threaded Joints: 1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1.
2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. 3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe. 4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external
pipe threads unless dryseal threading is specified. 5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have
cracked or open welds.
211118.00 231123-10 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING D. Welded Joints: 1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators. 2. Bevel plain
ends of steel pipe. 3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds and where damage to coating occurs during construction. E. Brazed Joints:
Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter. F. Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness appropriate for natural-gas service.
Install gasket concentrically positioned. G. Flared Joints: Cut tubing with roll cutting tool. Flare tube end with tool to result in flare dimensions complying with SAE J513. Tighten
finger tight, then use wrench. Do not overtighten. 3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
sizes: 1. 1 inch and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. 1-1/4 inches: inches: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. 1-1/2 and 2 inches:
Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. 2-1/2 to 3-1/2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 5. 4 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size,
5/8 inch. B. Install hangers for horizontal, corrugated stainless-steel tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. 3/4 inch and Larger: Maximum span, 96 inches;
minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3.8 CONNECTIONS A. Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements. B. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous,
and bonded to gas appliance equipment grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70. C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance
of appliances. D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72 inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between
valve and appliances or equipment. E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance. 3.9 LABELING AND
IDENTIFYING A. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for piping and valve identification.Install detectable warning tape directly
above gas piping, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
211118.00 231123-11 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 3.10 CONCRETE BASES A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base. 1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not
less than 6 inches larger in both directions than supported unit. 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on
18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base. 3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete
floor. 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. B. Use 3000-psig, 28-day, compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified. C.
Perform tests and inspections. D. Tests and Inspections: 1. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas gas according to NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code and authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.11 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Valves for pipe sizes 2 inches and smaller at service meter shall be one of the following: 1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 2. Bronze plug valve. B. Valves
for pipe sizes 2-1/2 inches and larger at service meter shall be one of the following: 1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 2. Bronze plug valve. 3. Cast-iron,
nonlubricated plug valve. C. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be one of the following: 1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Two-piece, full-port, bronze
ball valves with bronze trim. 3. Bronze plug valve. END OF SECTION 231123
211118.00 233113-1 METAL DUCTS SECTION 233113 -METAL DUCTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes metal ducts for supply, return, outside, and exhaust air-distribution systems in pressure
classes from minus 2-to plus 10-inch wg. Metal ducts include the following: 1. Rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Single-wall, round, and flat-oval spiral-seam ducts and formed fittings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS A. NUSIG: National Uniform Seismic Installation Guidelines. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select size and type of air-moving
and -distribution equipment and other air system components. Changes to layout or configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Architect. Accompany requests
for layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original design results without increasing system total pressure. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings:
Drawn to 1/4 inch equals 1 foot scale. Show fabrication and installation details for metal ducts. 1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components,
and attachments to other work. 2. Duct layout indicating sizes and pressure classes. 3. Elevations of top and bottom of ducts. 4. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.
5. Fittings. 6. Reinforcement and spacing. 7. Seam and joint construction. 8. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. 9. Equipment installation based on equipment being
used on Project. 10. Duct accessories, including access doors and panels. 11. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, vibration isolation, and seismic
restraints. B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers
of the items involved: 1. Ceiling suspension assembly members. 2. Other systems installed in same space as ducts. 3. Ceiling-and wall-mounting access doors and panels required to provide
access to dampers and other operating devices. 4. Ceiling-mounting items, including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
5. In general, the piping and ductwork shown on the drawings shall be considered as diagrammatic for clearness in indicating the general run and connections required, and may not be
shown in its true position. The piping and ductwork equipment may have to be offset, lowered or raised as required to accommodate field conditions.
211118.00 233113-2 METAL DUCTS C. Air duct leakage test results. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel,"
for hangers and supports, AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum," for aluminum supporting members, and AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding. B.
NFPA Compliance: 1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." 2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." C. Comply with
NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations," Ch. 3, "Duct System," for range hood ducts, unless otherwise indicated. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall
be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having
G60 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view. C. PVC-Coated Galvanized Steel: Acceptable by authorities having jurisdiction for use
in fabricating ducts with UL 181, Class 1 listing. Lock-forming-quality, galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having G60 coating designation. Factory-applied PVC
coatings shall be 4 mils thick on sheet metal surfaces of ducts and fittings exposed to corrosive conditions and 2 mils thick on opposite surfaces. D. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366,
cold-rolled sheets; commercial quality; with oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts. E. Stainless Steel: ASTM A480, Type 304 and having a No. 20 finish for concealed ducts, and a finish
to match kitchen or dishwasher hoods for exposed ducts. F. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003, temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish
for exposed ducts. G. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts. H. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum
diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
211118.00 233113-3 METAL DUCTS 2.3 SEALANT MATERIALS A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive or mastic nature but includes tapes
and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and mastics. B. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with gypsum mineral compound and modified acrylic/silicone activator to
react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal. C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: Flexible, adhesive sealant, resistant to UV light when cured, UL 723 listed,
and complying with NFPA requirements for Class 1 ducts. D. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl sealant formulated with a
minimum of 75 percent solids. E. Flanged Joint Mastic: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O. F. Flange
Gaskets: Butyl rubber or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer. G. All sealants to be low VOC, per LEED requirements. 2.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Materials: Galvanized
sheet steel or threaded steel rod. 1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer
after installation. 2. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for steel sheet width and thickness and for steel rod diameters.
3. Galvanized-steel straps attached to aluminum ducts shall have contact surfaces painted with zinc-chromate primer. B. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping
metal screws; compatible with duct materials. C. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. 1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes
and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel support materials. 3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum support materials unless materials are electrolytically
separated from ducts. D. Contractor may use load rated cable suspension system. Suspension system shall have a specified manufacturers safe working load and supplemental safety factor
of at least five times the safe working load. 1. Suspension system shall be verified by SMACNA Testing and Research Institute to be in compliance with SMACNA Duct Construction Standards
Guidelines (1995 CH.4). 2.5 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION A. Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" and complying with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod applications, and joint types and intervals.
1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class required for pressure class. 2. Deflection: Duct systems shall not exceed deflection
limits according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
211118.00 233113-4 METAL DUCTS B. Transverse Joints: Prefabricated slide-on joints and components constructed using manufacturer's guidelines for material thickness, reinforcement size
and spacing, and joint reinforcement. 1. Manufacturers: a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Nexus Inc. c. Ward Industries, Inc. C. Formed-On Flanges: Construct according to SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, using corner, bolt, cleat, and gasket details. 1. Manufacturers: a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Lockformer. 2. Duct Size:
Maximum 30 inches wide and up to 2-inch wg pressure class. 3. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock sealed with noncuring polymer sealant. D. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break
or cross bead duct sides 19 inches and larger and 0.0359 inch thick or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of nonbraced panel area unless ducts are lined. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT APPLICATIONS
A. Static-Pressure Classes: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts according to the following: 1. Supply Ducts: 2-inch wg. 2. Supply Ducts (before Air Terminal Units): 3-inch wg.
3. Supply Ducts (after Air Terminal Units): 2-inch wg. 4. Return Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1-inch wg. 5. Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): 2-inch wg. B. Coordinate duct requirements
1. Dust Collection a. Verify with manufacturer requirements. 2. Vehicle Exhaust a. Verify with manufacturer requirements. 3. Welding and Plasma Cutter Fume Collection a. Verify with
manufacturer requirements. 3.2 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Construct and install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. C. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections. D. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface
with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches, with a minimum of 3 screws in each coupling. E. Install ducts,
unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs. F. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction,
columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. G. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
211118.00 233113-5 METAL DUCTS H. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions unless specifically indicated. I. Coordinate layout with
suspended ceiling, fire-and smoke-control dampers, lighting layouts, and similar finished work. J. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and
afterward to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws. K. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
L. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between construction openings and ducts
or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts. Overlap openings on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2 inches. M. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts
pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, install appropriately rated fire dampers, sleeves, and firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke dampers are specified in Division 23
Section "Air Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials and installation methods are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." N. Patch, seal, connect to existing duct
as required to minimize duct leakage. Seal and tape all connection points. O. Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is enclosed. Follow SMACNA's
"Duct Cleanliness for New Construction." P. Paint interiors of metal ducts, that do not have duct liner, for 24 inches upstream of registers and grilles. Apply one coat of flat, black,
latex finish coat over a compatible galvanized-steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 09 painting Sections. Q. Provide ½” square, 0.063
inches aluminum wire, mesh bird screen on open ends of ductwork in finished spaces, or as denoted on the plans. Provide framing and support as required by size of opening. 3.3 SEAM AND
JOINT SEALING A. Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for duct pressure class indicated. 1. For pressure classes lower
than 2-inch wg, seal transverse joints. B. Seal ducts before external insulation is applied. C. Pressure test before external insulation is applied. 3.4 HANGING AND SUPPORTING A. Support
horizontal ductwork runs on 6 foot centers and within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection. Where duct weight for the 6 foot length is less than 40
pounds, support hangers may be on 8 foot centers. B. Support vertical ducts at maximum intervals of 16 feet and at each floor. C. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable
load not exceeding one-fourth of failure (proof-test) load.
211118.00 233113-6 METAL DUCTS 3.5 CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." B. Comply with SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and
inspections according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual" and prepare test reports: 1. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing
and for compliance with test requirements. 2. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section being tested. If pressure classes are not indicated,
test entire system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. Give seven days' advance notice for testing. Owners representative
to be present and receive reports of all testing results. 3. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply Comply with requirements for Leakage Class 3 for round and flat-oval ducts, Leakage Class
12 for rectangular ducts in pressure classes lower than and equal to 2-inch wg (both positive and negative pressures), and Leakage Class 6 for pressure classes from 2-to 10-inch wg.
4. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is equal to or less than maximum allowable. 5. All existing to remain ductwork to have all joints sealed prior to leakage test. 6. Failure
to perform leakage test may result in removal of insulation, resealing of ductwork, and reinsulating ductwork once passed tests is completed. 3.7 CLEANING NEW SYSTEMS A. Mark position
of dampers and air-directional mechanical devices before cleaning, and perform cleaning before air balancing. B. Use service openings, as required, for physical and mechanical entry
and for inspection. 1. Create other openings to comply with duct standards. 2. Disconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. 3. Remove and reinstall ceiling sections
to gain access during the cleaning process. C. Vent vacuuming system to the outside. Include filtration to contain debris removed from HVAC systems, and locate exhaust down wind and
away from air intakes and other points of entry into building. D. Clean the following metal duct systems by removing surface contaminants and deposits: 1. Air outlets and inlets (registers,
grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers,
and drive assemblies. 3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers
and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains. 4. Coils and related components. 5. Return-air ducts, dampers, and actuators except in ceiling plenums
and mechanical equipment rooms. 6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology: 1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning
methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.
211118.00 233113-7 METAL DUCTS 2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being
cleaned are under negative pressure. 3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.
4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. 5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational.
Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins. F. Cleanliness Verification: 1. Visually inspect metal ducts for contaminants.
2. Where contaminants are discovered, re-clean and reinspect ducts. END OF SECTION 233113
211118.00 233423-1 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS SECTION 233423 -HVAC POWER VENTILATORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Utility set fans. 2. Centrifugal roof
ventilators. 3. Axial roof ventilators. 4. Upblast propeller roof exhaust fans. 5. Centrifugal wall ventilators. 6. Ceiling-mounting ventilators. 7. In-line centrifugal fans. 8. Propeller
fans. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on actual Project site elevations. B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99. 1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated and include the following: 1. Certified fan performance curves with
system operating conditions indicated. 2. Certified fan sound-power ratings. 3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. 4. Material thickness
and finishes, including color charts. 5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. 6. Roof curbs. 7. Fan speed controllers. B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans
and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 1. Roof framing and support
members relative to duct penetrations. 2. Ceiling suspension assembly members. 3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 4. Ceiling-mounted items including
light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be licensed to use the AMCA-Certified
Ratings Seal.
211118.00 233423-2 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards. D. UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with
UL 705. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled unit, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering. B. Disassemble
and reassemble units, as required for moving to final location, according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or
supporting points. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members. B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into
bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items
are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories." 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Belts: One set(s) for each belt-driven unit. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PROPELLER FANS A. Manufacturers: Subject to
compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Greenheck. 2. Loren Cook Company. 3. Penn Ventilation. B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with
requirements, provide Greenheck or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Greenheck. 2. Loren Cook Company. 3. Penn Ventilation. C. Description: Direct-or belt-driven propeller
fans consisting of fan blades, hub, housing, orifice ring, motor, drive assembly, and accessories. D. Housing: Galvanized-steel sheet with flanged edges and integral orifice ring with
baked-enamel finish coat applied after assembly. Supplied by unit manufacturer. E. Steel Fan Wheels: Formed-steel blades riveted to heavy-gauge steel spider bolted to cast-iron hub.
F. Fan Wheel: Wheel: Replaceable, cast or extruded-aluminum, airfoil blades fastened to cast-aluminum hub; factory set pitch angle of blades.
211118.00 233423-3 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS G. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to housing, statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at
maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation. 1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.4. 2. Fan Shaft: Turned,
ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub. 3. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings. a. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L10 of
100,000 hours. 4. Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory. 5. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch for
use with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions. 6. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched
sets for multiple belt drives. 7. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on outside of fan cabinet. H. Accessories: 1. Gravity Shutters: Aluminum blades in aluminum frame;
interlocked blades with nylon bearings. 2. Motor-Side Back Guard: Galvanized steel, complying with OSHA specifications, removable for maintenance. 3. Wall Sleeve: Galvanized steel to
match fan and accessory size. 4. Weathershield Hood: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size. 5. Weathershield Front Guard: Galvanized steel with expanded metal screen. 6. Variable-Speed
Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent. 7. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside fan housing,
factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit. 2.2 MOTORS A. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." B. Enclosure Type: Totally
enclosed, fan cooled. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test
fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure,
power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating." PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install power ventilators level and plumb. B. Support in-line units using restrained spring isolators having a static deflection of 1 inch. Vibration devices are specified in Division
23 Section "Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 1. Secure vibration to concrete bases using anchor bolts cast in concrete base. C. Support suspended units from structure
using threaded steel rods and elastomeric hangers or spring hangers having a static deflection of 1 inch. Vibration-control devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." D. Install units with clearances for service and mai
ntenance. 211118.00 233423-4 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS E. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections
with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.
C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables." 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection
is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. 3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction,
and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards. 5. Adjust belt tension. 6. Adjust damper
linkages for proper damper operation. 7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected
ductwork systems are in fully open position. 9. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage
and amperage. 10. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators. 11. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. B. Test and adjust
controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. B. Adjust belt tension. C. Refer
to Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. D. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.
E. Lubricate bearings. END OF SECTION 233423
211118.00 235100-1 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS SECTION 235100 -BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,
including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Waste Oil flues. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A.
Product Data: For the following: 1. Type B and BW vents. 2. Special gas vents. 3. Guy wires and connectors. B. Shop Drawings: For vents, breechings, chimneys, and stacks. Include plans,
elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, methods of field assembly,
components, hangers, and location and size of each field connection. C. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain listed
system components through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," for hangers
and supports and AWS D9.1/D9.1M, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for shop and field welding of joints and seams in vents, breechings, and stacks. C. Certified Sizing Calculations: Manufacturer
shall certify venting system sizing calculations. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division
07 Section "Roof Accessories." PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 LISTED TYPE B AND BW VENTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1.
American Metal Products; MASCO Corporation. 2. Cleaver-Brooks; Div. of Aqua-Chem Inc. 3. FAMCO. 4. Hart & Cooley, Inc. 5. Heat-Fab, Inc. 6. Industrial Chimney Company. 7. LSP Products
Group, Inc. 8. Metal-Fab, Inc.
211118.00 235100-2 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS 9. Schebler Co. (The). 10. Selkirk Inc.; Selkirk Metalbestos and Air Mate. 11. Simpson Dura-Vent Co., Inc.; Subsidiary of Simpson
Manufacturing Co. 12. Stacks, Inc. 13. Tru-Flex Metal Hose Corp. 14. Van-Packer Company, Inc. B. Description: Double-wall metal vents tested according to UL 441 and rated for 480 deg
F continuously for Type B, or 550 deg F continuously for Type BW; with neutral or negative flue pressure complying with NFPA 211. C. Construction: Inner shell and outer jacket separated
by at least a 1/4-inch airspace. D. Inner Shell: Aluminum. E. Outer Jacket: Galvanized steel. F. Exterior flue must be insulated pipe approved to Standard UL 641. G. Accessories: Tees,
elbows, increasers, draft-hood connectors, terminations, adjustable roof flashings, storm collars, support assemblies, thimbles, firestop spacers, and fasteners; fabricated from similar
materials and designs as vent-pipe straight sections; all listed for same assembly. 1. Termination: Stack cap designed to exclude minimum 90 percent of rainfall. H. A barometric draft
regulator shall be included and follow the manufacturer’s requirements. 2.2 LISTED SPECIAL VENTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following: 1. Heat-Fab, Inc. 2. Metal-Fab, Inc. 3. Selkirk Inc.; Selkirk Metalbestos and Air Mate. 4. Z-Flex; Flexmaster Canada Limited. B. Description: Double-wall metal vents tested
according to UL 1738 and rated for 480 deg F continuously, with positive or negative flue pressure complying with NFPA 211. C. Construction: Inner shell and outer jacket separated by
at least a 1/2-inch airspace. D. Inner Shell: ASTM A 959, Type AL-29-4C stainless steel. E. Outer Jacket: Aluminized steel. F. Accessories: Tees, elbows, increasers, draft-hood connectors,
terminations, adjustable roof flashings, storm collars, support assemblies, thimbles, firestop spacers, and fasteners; fabricated from similar materials and designs as vent-pipe straight
sections; sections; all listed for same assembly. 1. Termination: Stack cap designed to exclude minimum 90 percent of rainfall. 2.3 GUYING AND BRACING MATERIALS A. Cable: Three or four
galvanized, stranded wires of the following thickness: 1. Minimum Size: 1/4 inch in diameter. 2. For ID Sizes 4 to 15 Inches: 5/16 inch. 3. For ID Sizes 18 to 24 Inches: 3/8 inch. 4.
For ID Sizes 27 to 30 Inches: 7/16 inch. 5. For ID Sizes 33 to 36 Inches: 1/2 inch. 6. For ID Sizes 39 to 48 Inches: 9/16 inch.
211118.00 235100-3 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS 7. For ID Sizes 51 to 60 Inches: 5/8 inch. B. Pipe: Two or three galvanized steel, NPS 1-1/4. C. Angle Iron: Two or three galvanized
steel, 2 by 2 by 0.25 inch. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of work. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Listed Type B and BW Vents: Vents for certified gas appliances.
B. Listed Special Gas Vent: Condensing gas appliances. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF LISTED VENTS AND CHIMNEYS A. Locate to comply with minimum clearances from combustibles and minimum termination
heights according to product listing or NFPA 211, whichever is most stringent. Install the vent cap at least three feet above the roof penetration, at least two feet above the peak of
the roof and at least eight feet above the unit heater. B. Seal between sections of positive-pressure vents and grease exhaust ducts according to manufacturer's written installation
instructions, using sealants recommended by manufacturer. C. Support vents at intervals recommended by manufacturer to support weight of vents and all accessories, without exceeding
appliance loading. D. Slope breechings down in direction of appliance, with condensate drain connection at lowest point piped to nearest drain. E. Lap joints in direction of flow. 3.4
CLEANING A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.
B. Clean breechings internally, during and after installation, to remove dust and debris. C. Provide temporary closures at ends of breechings, chimneys, and stacks that are not completed
or connected to equipment. END OF SECTION 235100
211118.00 235524-1 GAS-FIRED INFRARED HEATERS SECTION 235524 LOW-INTENSITY GAS-FIRED INFRARED HEATERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,
including General and Special Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall provide the labor, materials, equipment,
appliances, services and transportation, and perform operations in connection with the construction and installation of the Work. Work shall be as herein specified and as denoted on
the accompanying Drawings. 1. Gas-fired infrared heaters. B. This Section of the Work includes the providing of the natural gas-fired, low intensity tube type, infrared heaters of the
size and capacity, where and as denoted on the Drawings. C. Contractor for Division 23 shall provide and install combustion air inlet and flue gas vent piping as denoted on Drawings.
D. Power and control wiring shown on plans and disconnect switch shall be a part of Division 26 Work. E. Refer to Section 01 Alternates that may affect the Work of this Section. F. Refer
to Details and Schedules on the Drawings for additional requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Complete submittals, including product data, parts list, electrical nameplate data, shop drawings,
heights, wiring diagrams, manufacturer's installation, and maintenance instructions are required. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Construct and install gas-fired infrared heaters in compliance
with ANSI and NFPA. B. Heaters shall be design certified by the American Gas Association (AGA). 1.05 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's written warranty covering the heater's radiant
tube element assembly for a period of one year and components utilized in the heater's control assembly for a period of one year from date of substantial completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the product named or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 1. Combustion
Research Corporation -Omega II 2. Roberts Gordon – Vantage II 3. Ambirad 4. Detroit Radiant Heaters Co.
211118.00 235524-2 GAS-FIRED INFRARED HEATERS 5. Reznor /Thomas & Betts Corporation 6. Schwank 7. Solaronics B. Products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided
they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product. Requests for Architect/Engineer’s approval must be accompanied by the “Substitution
Request Form” and complete technical data for evaluation. All materials for evaluation must be received by the Project Manager and Specification Department at least 10 days prior to
bid due date. Additional approved manufacturers will be issued by Addendum. C. Infrared heater shall be self-contained, packaged, factory assembled, prewired unit consisting of cabinet,
heat exchanger, burner, reflector and controls. 2.02 GAS-FIRED INFRARED HEATERS A. Burners 1. Shall be atmospheric type with an electronic pilot ignition system with 100 percent shutoff
and thermo-couple pilot safety device. 2. Controls shall include a pressure differential air flow switch to shut heater off in the event of combustion air or flue outlet blockage. 3.
Electrical power supply to heater shall be 120/1/60. 4. Heaters shall operate satisfactorily in any position from horizontal to 45 degrees from horizontal. 5. Natural Gas model, enclosed
and sealed box design with silicone gasketed doors and internally mounted blower, nickel plated steel burner cup, outside air adapter, hot surface ignition, four-try ignition, door interlock
safety switch, all components easily accessed, durable spot welded construction, mica flame observation window, balanced air rotor, gas and electric controls are separated from the combustion
air stream, and CSA approved. Burner box paint shall be epoxy-polyester powder coat for corrosion resistance. Stainless steel flexible gas line and high-pressure gas cock assembly included.
6. Heater shall be equipped with permanently lubricated motor with thermal overload protection enclosed inside burner compartment. B. Radiant Tubing -Refer to schedule on Construction
Documents for additional information. 1. Radiant Tubing: 4-inch-(100-mm-) diameter Heat Treated Aluminized steel with highemissivity, high-temperature, corrosion-resistant external finish.
2. Radiant Tubing: 4-inch-(100-mm-) diameter Hot-Rolled steel with high-emissivity, hightemperature, corrosion-resistant external finish. 3. Tube shall be provided with a sight glass
for visual inspection of the burner flame. 4. The reflector shall be of highly polished aluminum and shall be individually adjustable to suit actual job site conditions. 5. Heat exchanger
tube shall pitch down at least 1/2 inch in 20 ft. on radiant tube, away from burner box. C. Reflectors 1. Provide aluminum, or other highly radiant reflective material reflectors, installed
to provide continuous coverage over all straight lengths of heat exchanger. In order to maximize radiant output and minimize convection losses, reflectors are to extend below the bottom
of the heat exchanger pipe. 2. Cover Elbow Fittings: Provide reflector joint pieces over heat exchanger elbows so reflector covers heat exchanger continuously. 3. End Cap Fittings: All
reflectors at terminant of the heat exchanger pipe and any elbows shall have end caps to prevent convective heat from escaping.
211118.00 235524-3 GAS-FIRED INFRARED HEATERS 4. Side Reflectors: System to have perimeter side extension reflector in certain areas of layout as shown on plan where specified. Side
reflectors permanently attach to side to top reflector and are secured to the pipe by three side reflector supports and two "Z" clips for each 8 ft. section of side reflector. To prevent
convection losses, tilting of reflectors will not be acceptable. D. Accessories furnished by heater manufacturer shall include necessary chain hangers, reflector supports, tube clamps,
1/2 inch shut-off cock, 1/2 inch by 24 inch stainless steel flexible gas connector, and a 4 inch diameter combustion air intake collar, complete with weather proof cap. E. Controls shall
be provided by the unit manufacturer and shall consist of a 120 volt room thermostat with remote mounted sensing bulb with a 55 degree set point (adj.). Additionally, provide a manual
set, spring return timer, 15 to 60 minute range to override thermostat. A high limit safety thermostat shall be provided to shut off the system in the event the space temperature exceeds
the set point. 1. Factory Wired: All burners shall be factory wired for 120 Vac operation, Hot Surface Ignition. 2. Fail-Safe Controls: To assure a high degree of fail-safe operation,
the design shall include an air proving safety pressure switch to verify blower operation before gas valve opens. 3. Ignition Controls: All units shall be equipped with a fully automatic
direct-spark ignition system. F. Control wiring required to complete required control sequences and not shown on Electrical Drawings shall be supplied by the unit manufacturer, including
cost of conduit, cable, and labor. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install heater(s) as indicated on Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's published installation instructions,
NFPA 54 and ANSI Z223.1. B. Maintain manufacturers' recommended clearances to combustibles. Do not exceed clearance to combustibles outlined and printed on burner nameplate, and in manufacturer's
product data. Measure clearance distance from surface of heat exchanger or as indicated by approval agency's listing. END OF SECTION
211118.00. 235533-1 FUEL-FIRED UNIT HEATERS SECTION 235533 -FUEL-FIRED UNIT HEATERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes wate-oil unit heaters. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product
Data: For each type of fuel-fired unit heater indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For fuel-fired unit heaters. Include
plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer detailing fabrication and assembly of
fuel-fired unit heaters, as well as procedures and diagrams. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and for designing vibration isolation bases.
3. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
4. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Coordination Drawings: Plans, elevations, and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated
with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 1. Structural members to which equipment will be attached. 2. Items penetrating roof and the following: a. Vent
and fuel piping rough-ins and connections. b. Combustion air rough-ins and connections. D. Field quality-control test reports. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuel-fired unit
heaters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices,
and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1.5 WARRANTY A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace heat exchanger of fuel-fired unit heater that fails in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 12 months from date of Substantial Completion.
211118.00. 235533-2 FUEL-FIRED UNIT HEATERS PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 WASTE OIL UNIT HEATERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide waste oil unit heaters
as Reznor or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Modine Manufacturing Company. 2. Sterling HVAC Products; Div. of Mestek Technology Inc. B. Description: Factory assembled,
piped, and wired, and complying with ANSI Z83.8/CSA 2.6 and UL 731. C. Fuel Type: Design burner for fuel oil. D. Type of Venting: Gravity venting. E. Housing: Steel, with integral draft
hood and inserts for suspension mounting rods. 1. External Casings and Cabinets: Powder coating over corrosion-resistant-treated surface. 2. Suspension Attachments: Reinforce suspension
attachments at connection to fuel-fired unit heaters. F. Heat Exchanger: Stainless steel. G. Burner Material: Stainless steel. H. Unit Fan: Formed-steel or Aluminum propeller blades
riveted to heavy-gauge steel spider bolted to cast-iron hub, dynamically balanced, and resiliently mounted. 1. Fan-Blade Guard: Galvanized steel, complying with OSHA specifications,
removable for maintenance. 2. General requirements for motors are specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." a. Motors: Totally enclosed with internal
thermal-overload protection and complying with Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." b. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large
enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. c. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified
in Division 26 Sections. I. Unit Fan: Steel, centrifugal fan dynamically balanced and resiliently mounted. 1. Direct-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to housing, with the following
features: a. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub. b. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings. J. Controls:
. . 1. Fuel Control Valve: Single stage 2. Ignition: Electronically controlled electric spark with flame sensor. 3. Fan Thermal Switch: Operates fan on heat-exchanger temperature. 4.
Vent Flow Verification: Flame rollout switch. 5. Control transformer. 6. High Limit: Thermal switch or fuse to stop burner. 7. Thermostat: Single-stage, wall-mounting type with 50 to
90 deg F operating range and fan on switch. K. Discharge Louvers: Independently adjustable horizontal blades. L. Accessories: 1. Vertical discharge louvers. 2. Discharge Nozzle: Discharge
at 25 to 65 degrees from horizontal.
211118.00. 235533-3 FUEL-FIRED UNIT HEATERS 3. Four-point suspension kit. 4. Summer fan switch. 5. Power Venter: Centrifugal aluminized-steel fan, with stainless-steel shaft; 120-V ac
motor. 6. Concentric, Terminal Vent Assembly: Combined combustion-air inlet and power-vent outlet with wall or roof caps. Include adapter assembly for connection to inlet and outlet
pipes, and flashing for wall or roof penetration. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install and connect oil-fired unit heaters and associated fuel and vent piping according to NFPA
31, applicable local codes and regulations, and manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Suspended Units: Suspend from substrate using threaded rods, spring hangers, and
building attachments. Secure rods to unit hanger attachments. Adjust hangers so unit is level and plumb. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division
23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings,
and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to fuel-fired unit heater to allow service and maintenance. C. Vent Connections: Comply with Division 23 Section "Breechings, Chimneys, and
Stacks." D. Electrical Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections. 1. Install electrical devices furnished with heaters but not specified to be factory
mounted. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment
installations, including connections. Report results in writing. B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized
service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Test and adjust controls
and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 2. Verify bearing lubrication. 3. Verify proper motor rotation. 4. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to
record the following: a. Test procedures used. b. Test results that comply with requirements. c. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve
compliance with requirements. D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust initial temperature set points.
211118.00. 235533-4 FUEL-FIRED UNIT HEATERS B. Adjust burner and other unit components for optimum heating performance and efficiency. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized
service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fuel-fired unit heaters. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." END
OF SECTION 235533
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 260500-1 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL SECTION 260500 -COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions
of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Electrical equipment
coordination and installation. 2. Sleeves for raceways and cables. 3. Sleeve seals. 4. Grout. 5. Common electrical installation requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene
terpolymer rubber. B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment: 1. To allow maximum possible headroom
unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated. 2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations. 3. To allow
right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. 4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of obstructions and of the working
and access space of other equipment. B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components
as they are constructed. C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are
specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames." D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section
"Firestopping." PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends. B. Cast-Iron
Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. C. Sleeves for Rectangular
Openings: Galvanized sheet steel. 1. Minimum Metal Thickness:
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 260500-2 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side more than 16 inches, thickness shall
be 0.052 inch. b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.
2.2 SLEEVE SEALS A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable. 1. Sealing Elements: EPDM or NBR interlocking
links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable. 2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing
element. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
2.3 GROUT A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for
application and a 30-minute working time. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom
of unit for suspended items and wall-mounting items. C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment
to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements. D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical
equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity. E. Right of Way: Give
to piping systems installed at a required slope. 3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or
busways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled
holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls. C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. D. Fire-Rated
Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor
or wall. E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 260500-3 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless indicated otherwise.
H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry 1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces
smooth; protect grout while curing. I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate
for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls,
partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in
Division 07 Section "Firestopping." K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual individual raceways and cables with flexible boottype flashing units applied in coordination
with roofing work. L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular
clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch
annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. N. Interior Sleeves for Fiber Optical and Voice and Data Communications Cables: Construct
of 2-inch metallic conduit, unless otherwise indicated, with insulated bushings on each end. 1. Length: 12 inches longer than width of wall. 2. Location: Install 12 inches above finished
ceiling. 3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations. B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material
and and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against
pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. 3.4 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical
installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Firestopping." END OF
SECTION 260500
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 260519-1 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES SECTION 260519 -LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This
Section includes the following: 1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 26 Section "Common Work Results for Electrical" for sleeves and sleeve seals for cables. 2. Division 27 Section "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling" for cabling used
for voice and data circuits. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Assurance/Control Submittal: 1. Field quality-control test reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and
Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA
70. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. [Aluminum and] Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70. B. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THW, THHN-THWN,
XHHW, and SO 1. Provide No. 6 AWG and smaller conductors with color-coded insulation. C. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for [metal-clad cable, Type MC,] [mineralinsulated,
metal-sheathed cable, Type MI,] [and] Type SO with ground wire. 2.2 MANUFACTURED WIRING SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of
the following manufacturers: 1. ACS/Uni-Fab; a Tyco International Company. 2. Cooper Lighting; a Division of Cooper Industries. 3. Lithonia Lighting; an Acuity Brands Company. 4. Sentinel
Lighting Wiring Systems. B. Products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the
specified product. The “Substitution Request Form” and complete technical data for evaluation must accompany requests for A/E’s
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 260519-2 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES approval. All materials for evaluation must be received by the Project Manager and Specification Department
at least 10 days prior to bid due date. Additional approved manufacturers will be issued by Addendum. C. Comply with UL 183. 1. Listed for use in ducts or plenums. D. Conductors: No.
12 AWG solid copper, including equipment grounding conductor, in metalsheathed cable, Type MC. 1. Conductors entering wiring compartments of luminaires shall be at least No. 18 AWG,
Type TFN, with 105 deg C insulation. E. Connectors: Pin and socket interlocking contacts, keyed and color-coded to prevent mismatching voltages. 1. Rated 20 A at 120/208 V or 277/480
V. 2. Provide dust-caps for unused connectors. 2.3 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class
for application and service indicated. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A. Feeders: Copper [for feeders smaller than 225 A; copper or aluminum for feeders 225 A
and larger]. No. 12 AWG, minimum. 1. Conductor sizes indicated are for copper conductors, unless indicated otherwise. If aluminum conductors are used, provide feeder configuration of
equivalent ampacity and voltage drop as the conductors indicated. B. Branch Circuits: Copper. No. 12 AWG, minimum. C. Class 1 Control Circuits: Copper. No. 14 AWG, minimum. D. Class
2 Control Circuits: Copper. No. 16 AWG, minimum. E. Voltage drop shall not exceed 3 percent from panelboard to farthest outlet. 1. Maximum permitted length of 20 amp, 120, 208, and 240
volt circuits using No. 12 AWG copper wire is 100 feet. 2. Maximum permitted length of 20 amp, 120, 208, and 240 volt circuits using No. 10 AWG copper wire is 140 feet. 3. Maximum permitted
length of 20 amp, 277 and 480 volt circuits using No. 12 AWG copper wire is 170 feet. 4. Maximum permitted length of 20 amp, 277 and 480 volt circuits using No. 10 AWG copper wire is
250 feet. 3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway; or Type XHHW, single conductors
in raceway. B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway; or Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway. C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces:
Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway; or Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway.
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 260519-3 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors
in raceway; or Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway. E. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. F. Branch Circuits Concealed
in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. G. Branch Circuits Installed in Accessible Ceiling Spaces and Gypsum-Board Partitions: Type THHN-THWN,
single conductors in raceway; or metal-clad cable, Type MC; or manufactured wiring system. H. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHNTHWN,
single conductors in raceway. I. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainlesssteel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit
application. J. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway. K. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway; power-limited cable, concealed in building finishes; or
power-limited tray cable, in cable tray. 1. Exposed-Structure Type Ceiling Spaces: Install Class 2 control circuits in raceway. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Comply with
NECA 1 B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.
D. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." E. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors,
unless otherwise indicated. F. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. G. Support cables
according according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A [ B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and
that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. 1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors.
C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 260519-4 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements. 2. Perform
each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. C. Test Reports: Prepare a written
report to record the following: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken
to achieve compliance with requirements. D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION 260519
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 260526-1 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260526 -GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings
and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes
methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International. B. EF: Entrance Facility for voice and data communications.
C. ER: Equipment Room for voice and data communications. D. MC: Main Cross-Connect for voice and data communications. E. TBB: Telecommunications Bonding Backbone conductor. F. TDMM:
Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, published by BICSI. G. TGB: Telecommunications Grounding Busbar. H. TMBC: Telecommunications Main Bonding Conductor (same as ANSI-J-STD-607-A
Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications.) I. TMGB: Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar. J. TR: Telecommunications Room for voice and data communications. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Quality
Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Field quality-control test reports. B. Closeout Documents: 1. Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in Part 3
"Field Quality Control" Article, including the following: a. Test wells. b. Ground rods. c. Ground rings. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed
and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and
bonding materials and equipment.
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 260526-2 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS C. Voice and Data Communications Equipment Grounding: Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding,
Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter, and comply with ANSI-JSTD-607-A. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless
otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors:
ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Copper
tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper
ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 2.2 CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for
applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy,
bolted pressure-type, with at least two bolts. 1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe. C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer
for materials being joined and installation conditions. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations:
Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Exothermic-welded connectors, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.
4. Connections to Structural Steel: Exothermic-welded connectors. 3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with feeders and branch circuits. 3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 331. B. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing
conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 260526-3 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS C. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner column and at
intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify voice and data communications equipment grounding components, complying with TIA/EIA-606-A.
B. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test
reports: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Test completed grounding system
at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal . Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.
a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without
chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81. 3. Prepare dimensioned drawings
locating each ground rod and ground rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include
the number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test
results. B. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: 1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms. 2. Power and Lighting
Equipment or System with Capacity 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. 3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms. 4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards
Serving Electronic Equipment: 1 ohm(s). 5. Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms. 6. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms. C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds
specified values, notify Architect/Engineer promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. END OF SECTION 260526
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 260529-1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260529 -HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings
and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes
the following: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 26
Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls For Electrical Systems" for products and installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria. 2. Division 26 Section “Identification
for Electrical Systems” for cable ties. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents. B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating
weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. C. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for
this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Welding certificates. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code -Steel." B. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of
concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 260529-2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified
in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories." PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated
components for field assembly. 1. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. 2. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating
applied according to MFMA-4. 3. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. B. Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin
channels and angles with 9/16-inch-diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c., in at least 1 surface. 1. Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and designed
for use with those items. 2. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles, except except metal items may be stainless steel. 3. Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable
load criteria. C. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. D. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for
types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. E. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug
or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors
or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron. F. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
G. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Not
permitted. 2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate
for supported loads and building materials in which used. 3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or
MSS SP-58. 4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element. 5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength.
Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. 8. Wire Rope Systems: Galvanized steel wire rope with spring-loaded, key-releasable
locking device with the following rated strength: a. 0.059-inch (1.5-mm): 44 pounds. b. 5/64-inch (2-mm): 100 pounds. c. 1/8-inch (3-mm): 200 pounds. 2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT
ASSEMBLIES A. Description: Welded
or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 260529-3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates.
PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section
are stricter. B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.
C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without
exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel.
3.2 SLOTTED SUPPORT SYSTEMS APPLICATIONS A. Heated Interior Spaces: Painted steel. B. Non-Heated Interior Spaces and Outdoors: Hot-dipped galvanized steel. C. Swimming Pools, Swimming
Pool Chemical Treatment and Chemical Storage Rooms, Dishwashing Rooms, and Corrosive Environments: Nonmetallic. 3.3 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation
requirements except as specified in this Article. B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure
members, as permitted in NFPA 70. C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads
within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb. D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted
Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To To
Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners
on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69. 6. To Light Steel: Sheet
metal screws. 7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers,
and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate[ by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements]. E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete
at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 260529-4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS F. Exposed Conduits: Use one-hole or two-hole straps 8 feet or less AFF. Conduit clamps and hangers that project
past the conduit wall are limited to above 8 feet AFF. G. Do not use wood plugs, perforated metal bands, chain, or wire to support electrical equipment, unless otherwise indicated. H.
Open-Web Joists: Install supports only at panel points. Fasten supports to top of bottom chord of joist. Do not exceed 100 pounds working load per panel point. I. Roof and Elevated Floor
Decks: Do not fasten supports to roof decks or elevated floor decks. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal
Fabrications" for sitefabricated metal supports. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical
materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 3.5 PAINTING A. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup painting
of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair
paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 260529
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 260533-1 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260533 -RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and
general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes
raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 26 Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical
Systems" for exterior ductbanks, manholes, and underground utility construction. 2. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for high capacity floor boxes, multioutlet assemblies, and mounting
heights of device and outlet boxes. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International. B. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. C. ER: Equipment room (Telecommunications.)
D. FMC: Flexible metal conduit. E. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. F. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. G. MC: Main cross-connect (Telecommunications.) H. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.
I. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit. J. TDMM: Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, published by BICSI. K. TR: Telecommunications room. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Assurance/Control
Submittals: 1. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that enclosures and cabinets and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components,
will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following: a. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether
withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 1) The term "withstand" means "the cabinet or enclosure will remain in place without separation
of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified 2) Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting mounting and
anchorage provisions. 3) Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 260533-2 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA
70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Voice and Data Communications Pathways: Install
conduit, raceways, and boxes according to BICSI TDMM, "Horizontal Distribution Systems" Chapter, and comply with NECA 568. 1.6 COORDINATION A. HVAC Control and Monitoring: Verify locations
of temperature control panels with Building Management System installer. B. MC/ER and TR: Verify locations of backboards, cable trays, equipment cabinets and racks, and conduit stub-outs
with Voice and Data Communications Cable installer PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING A. RMC: ANSI C80.1. B. IMC: ANSI C80.6. C. EMT: ANSI C80.3. D. FMC: Zinc-coated steel
or aluminum. E. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket. F. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and
size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed. 1. Die-cast type, pot-metal type, and indenter type fittings are not permitted. 2. Conduit Fittings
for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886. 3. Fittings for EMT: Steel, compression type. G. Joint Compound for RMC or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies,
and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their conductivity. 2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT A. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, unless
otherwise indicated. B. Fittings for RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. 2.3 METAL WIREWAYS A. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA
250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated. B. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, holddown straps, end caps, and other fittings to
match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 260533-3 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS C. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type. D. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.4 SURFACE RACEWAYS A.
Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect/Engineer. 2.5 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Sheet
Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1. 1. Gangable boxes are not permitted. B. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover. C. Small Sheet
Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. D. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover. 2.6 TELCOMMUNICATIONS CONDUIT BODIES A. General
Description: Conduit bodies specifically designed to maintain the required bend radius for data and communications cabling, complying with BISCI TDMM “Horizontal Distribution Systems”
Chapter. 1. Material: Die-cast aluminum. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Outdoors: Apply Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed
Conduit: RMC or IMC. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC. 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid,
or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 4. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R. B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not
Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed and Subject to Physical Damage: RMC. Includes raceways in the following locations: a. Loading dock. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized
carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units. c. Mechanical rooms. 3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 4. Concealed in Exterior Walls: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC
5. Concealed Under Slabs-on-Grade: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC. 6. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment):
FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 7. Damp or Wet Locations: RMC or IMC. 8. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable in Spaces Used for Environmental Air: EMT.
9. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable Risers in Vertical Shafts: EMT. 10. Raceways for Concealed General Purpose Distribution of Optical Fiber or Communications Cable:
EMT. 11. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless steel in damp or wet locations.
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 260533-4 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS C. Minimum RMC, IMC, EMT, or RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC Size: 1/2-inch trade size, unless indicated otherwise. D. Minimum
FMC or LFMC Size: 1/2-inch trade size, unless indicated otherwise. E. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. RMC or IMC: Use threaded rigid
steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOX APPLICATION A. Flush Boxes in Masonry Walls and Partitions: Use masonry boxes at least 3.5 inches deep.
B. Flush Boxes in Gypsum-Board Partitions: Use square boxes at least 2.125 inches deep with raised box covers. C. Surface Boxes: Use cast-metal type with matching cover. Provide knock-out
plugs in unused openings. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings
or in this Article are stricter. B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam
piping. C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. D. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab. F. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and below floors, unless otherwise
indicated. G. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow
compound manufacturer's written instructions. H. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors
smaller than No. 4 AWG. I. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of
slack at each end of pull wire. J. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways,
install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points:
1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. K. Expansion-Joint Fittings for RNC: Install in
each run of aboveground conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F, and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. 1. Install expansion-joint
fittings for each of the following locations, and provide type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for location:
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 260533-5 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed
to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change. 2. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F
of temperature change. 3. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at
specific location at the time of installation. L. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures, equipment
subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations. M. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for
box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. N. Conduits less than 3-3-inch trade size may be field bent, unless indicated otherwise. Use factory
45 and 90 degree, and special radius elbows for conduits 3-inch and larger. O. Conduits for Feeders: Electrically continuous, terminated with grounding and insulating bushings. P. Conduits
for Branch Circuits: Electrically continuous. Q. Finished Spaces: Provide escutcheons where conduits penetrate surfaces of finished spaces. Match finish of adjacent surfaces. R. Raceways
for Optical Fiber and Voice and Data Communications Cable: Install raceways, metallic and nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows: 1. 3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways
in maximum lengths of 50 feet. 2. 1-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet. 3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each
length of raceway unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply
with these requirements. 4. Elbows: Use factory elbows. Field bent elbows are not permitted for optical fiber and communications cables. a. Radii of Elbows for Conduits 1-1/2-inches
and Larger: At least 10 times inside diameter of conduit. 5. Conduit Bodies: Use telecommunications conduit bodies. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions
that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended
by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 260533
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 260553-1 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 260553 -IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general
provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following:
1. Identification for conductors and control cable. 2. Underground-line warning tape. 3. Warning labels and signs. 4. Instruction signs. 5. Equipment identification labels. 6. Miscellaneous
identification products. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and ANSI C2. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate identification
names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual,
and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of
covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. D. Install identifying
devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. B. Baked-Enamel Warning
Signs: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 7
by 10 inches . C. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs: Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, celluloseacetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch galvanized-steel backing; and with
colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches . D. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited
to, the the following legends:
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 260553-2 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER -ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD -EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace
Clearance Warning: "WARNING -OSHA REGULATION -AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES." 2.2 INSTRUCTION SIGNS A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine
plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. in. and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes. 1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical
fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment. 2.3 IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched
or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert,
self-extinguishing, 1-piece, self-locking, fluoropolymer cable ties suitable for ducts or plenums; and other spaces used for environmental air. 1. Flammability Rating: UL94V-0. 2. Minimum
Width: 3/16 inch . 3. Tensile Strength: 50 lb, minimum. 4. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 5. Color: Maroon. B. Paint: Paint materials and application requirements are
specified in Division 09 painting Sections. C. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Raceways and Duct Banks More Than 600 V Concealed within Buildings: 4-inch-wide black stripes on 10-inch centers over orange background that extends
full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches wide. Stencil legend "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch high black letters on 20-inch centers. Stop stripes at legends.
Apply to the following finished surfaces: 1. Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches of a floor that is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated
space. 2. Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall. 3. Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts, exposed in the building,
or concealed above suspended ceilings. B. Accessible Raceways and Cables of Fire Alarm Systems: Identify junction boxes by painting boxes and covers red. C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification:
For primary and secondary conductors No. 4 AWG and larger in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes use marker tape. Identify source and circuit number of each set
of conductors. For single conductor cables, identify phase in addition to the above. D. Branch-Circuit Conductor Identification: Where there are conductors for more than three branch
circuits in same junction or pull box, use marker tape. Identify each ungrounded conductor according to source and circuit number.
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 260553-3 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS E. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list source and circuit number.
F. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections. 1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures
and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. 2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by
manufacturer for factory-installed connections. 3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. G. Warning Labels
for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply baked-enamel or metal-backed, butyrate warning signs. Identify system voltage
with black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 1. Equipment with Multiple Power or Control Sources: Apply to door or cover of equipment
including, but not limited to, the following: a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections. 2. Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to
NFPA 70: Unless otherwise indicated, apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flush panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces. H. Instruction Signs: 1. Operating Instructions:
Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions
are needed for system or equipment operation. 2. Emergency Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch-high letters
for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer. I. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with
wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations,
terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.
1. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters on
1-1/2-inch-high label; where 2 lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. 1) For single-gang motor starting switches use 3/8-inch high letters on 3/4-inch high by 2.25-inch
wide label. 2) For two-gang motor starting switches, use 3/8-inch high letters on 3/4-inch high by 4 inch wide label. b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.
c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures.
b. Disconnect switches. c. Enclosed circuit breakers. d. Push-button stations. J. Electrical Energy Source Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique energy source
and circuit designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment,
central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 260553-4 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment
is provided with its own identification. 1. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line
of text with 3/8-inch-high letters on 3/4-inch-high label; where 2 lines of text are required, use labels 1.5 inches high. b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine
label. c. Device, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Apply energy source and circuit number to back of device box covers and to front of junction and pull box covers with indelible ink. 1) Provide
pull and junction boxes with covers larger than 5-by-5-inches with engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and
enclosures. b. Disconnect switches. c. Enclosed circuit breakers. K. Nominal System Voltage Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique nominal system voltage and
color-coding label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. 1. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic
or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 3/8-inch-high letters on 3/4-inch-high label; where 2 lines of text are required, use labels 1.5 inches
high. b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards. b. Electrical switchgear and switchboards. c. Motor-control centers.
d. Safety switches used for service entrance disconnecting means. L. Feeder and Branch Circuit Load Identification Labels: On each overcurrent protective device, install unique load
designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. 1. Labeling Instructions: a. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide type-written
or laser laser printed circuit directory on heavy card stock. Arrange in two columns with odd numbered circuits on left and even numbered circuits on right. Include panelboard identification
and installation date. Indicate spare circuit breakers: “SPARE”. Install in metal frame with clear plastic cover. b. Distribution Panels and Switchboards: Provide for each overcurrent
protective device. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine labels. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 3/8-inch high letters on 3/4-inch high label; where
2 lines of text are required, use labels 1.5 inches high. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B. Location: Install identification
materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require
finish after completing finish work. D. Attach signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to the location and substrate. E. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage
Level Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors. 1. Color shall be factory applied
or, for sizes larger than No. 6 AWG if authorities having jurisdiction permit, field applied.
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 260553-5 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C: Blue. d. Neutral: White. e. Ground:
Green. 3. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made.
Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings. F. Painted Identification: Prepare surface and apply
paint according to Division 09 painting Sections. END OF SECTION 260553
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 262416-1 PANELBOARDS SECTION 262416 -PANELBOARDS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. C. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard
and related equipment. 1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following: a. Enclosure
types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. c. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective
devices. d. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control
wiring. B. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, overcurrent protective device, surge protective device, accessory, and component indicated.
Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. 2. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification:
Submit certification that panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic
Controls for Electrical Systems" Include the following: a. Basis of Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.
1) The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." 2) The term "withstand"
means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic
event." b. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. c. Detailed description of equipment
anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. 3. Field quality-control test reports including the following: a. Test procedures used. b.
Test results that comply with requirements. c. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements. 4. Panelboard Schedules: For
installation in panelboards.
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 262416-2 PANELBOARDS C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance
manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: a. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting
overcurrent protective devices. b. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. 2. Extra Materials: Receipt for extra materials. 1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Product Options:
Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of panelboards and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements." C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked
for intended use. D. Comply with NEMA PB 1. E. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions,
unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F. 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet. B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:
1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet. C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied
by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify
Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Construction
Manager's written permission. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them,
including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements. B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt
inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Surge Protective Devices: Manufacturer's standard
form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 262416-3 PANELBOARDS 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match
products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Keys: Six spares for each type of panelboard cabinet
lock. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products.
2. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 3. Square D; Schneider Electric. B. Products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material
requirements and functional qualities of the specified product. The “Substitution Request Form” and complete technical data for evaluation must accompany requests for A/E’s approval.
All materials for evaluation must be received by the Project Manager and Specification Department at least 10 days prior to bid due date. Additional approved manufacturers will be issued
by Addendum. 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls
for Electrical Systems." B. Enclosures: Flush-and surface-mounted cabinets. NEMA PB 1, Type 1. 1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. a. Outdoor Locations: NEMA
250, Type 3R. b. Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel. c. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. 2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For
surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. 3. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with flanges for
attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor. 4. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer coat. 5. Directory Card: With transparent
protective cover, mounted in metal frame, inside panelboard door. C. Phase and Ground Buses: 1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity; or tin-plated aluminum. 2. Equipment
Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment ground conductors; bonded to box. 3. Split Bus: Vertical buses divided into individual vertical sections. D. Conductor Connectors:
Suitable for use with conductor material. 1. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 2. Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Terminators: Mechanical type. 3. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical
type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device. 2.3 PANELBOARD SHORT-CIRCUIT RATING A. Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical
short-circuit current available at terminals. 1. Series-connected ratings are not permitted.
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 262416-4 PANELBOARDS 2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
B. Main Overcurrent Devices: Thermal-magnetic circuit breaker. C. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. 2.5
OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current
element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 2. Adjustable
Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting. 3. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single-and two-pole configurations with 5-mA trip
sensitivity. B. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes, sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 1. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number,
size, trip ratings, and conductor materials. 2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning,
and refrigerating equipment. 3. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault
indicator. 4. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55 percent of rated voltage. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 407. B.
Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1. C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for
Electrical Systems." D. Mount top of trim 74 inches above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. E. Mount plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with
fronts uniformly flush with wall finish. F. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers. 1. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges. G. Install filler
plates in unused spaces. H. Flush Panelboards: Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub
four 1-inch empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade. I. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties. J. Panelboards shall not
be used as junction boxes, auxiliary gutters, or raceways for conductors feeding through or tapping off to other switches or overcurrent devices. Splices shall not be allowed in any
panelboard. Phase conductors shall terminate on breakers and then leave the
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 262416-5 PANELBOARDS panelboard either grouped in three phase configuration or with associated neutrals and routed into the branch circuit conduit out to the load.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical
Systems." B. Panelboard Nameplates: Install equipment identification, electrical energy source identification, nominal system voltage identification, and feeder and branch-circuit load
identification labels with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. 1. Lighting and Appliance Branch-Circuit Panelboards: Create a directory
to indicate installed circuit loads. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. Use room names and
numbers furnished by Owner instead of room names and numbers indicated. 2. Distribution Panelboards: Install feeder and branch-circuit load identification labels on each overcurrent
protective device. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section
"Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows: 1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component,
connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Perform each electrical
test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded-case circuit breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct
malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 3.5 CLEANING A. On completion of installation, installation,
inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces
to match original finish. END OF SECTION 262416
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 262726-1 WIRING DEVICES SECTION 262726 -WIRING DEVICES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral
GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Twist-locking receptacles. 3. Snap switches 4. Cord reels. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 26 Section "Raceways and Boxes
for Electrical Systems" for metal and nonmetallic floor boxes. 2. Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for photoelectric switches and occupancy sensors other than wall-switch
type. 3. Division 27 Section "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling" for workstation outlets. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. B. Pigtail: Short lead used
to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 2. Field quality-control
test reports. B. Closeout Submittals: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include
labeling conditions. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as
they are available, obtain all wiring devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled
as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Receptacles
for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. 1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 262726-2 WIRING DEVICES PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names
are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Arrow Hart/Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Ltd. (Arrow Hart). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Bryant Electric (Bryant). 3. Hubbell
Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 4. Leviton Mfg. Co., Inc. (Leviton). 5. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour). B. Products of other manufacturers
will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product. The “Substitution Request Form” and complete
technical data for evaluation must accompany requests for A/E’s approval. All materials for evaluation must be received by the Project Manager and Specification Department at least 10
days prior to bid due date. Additional approved manufacturers will be issued by Addendum. 2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD
1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, DSCC W C 596G, and UL 498. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Arrow Hart; 5361 (single), AH5362
(duplex). b. Bryant; 5361 (single), BRY5362 (duplex). c. Hubbell; HBL5361 (single), HBL5362 (duplex). d. Leviton; 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex). e. Pass & Seymour; 5361 (single), 5362-A
(duplex), PT5362A (duplex, with separable pigtailed connector). 2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES A. General Description: Straight blade, feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498,
and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped. B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with
requirements, provide one of the following: a. Arrow Hart; VGF20. b. Bryant; GF20L. c. Hubbell; GF20L. d. Leviton; 7899. e. Pass & Seymour; 2095, or PT2095 (with separable pigtailed
connector). connector). C. Listed Weather-Resistant Type Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Arrow Hart; WRVGF20. b. Hubbell; GFTR20. c. Pass & Seymour; 2095-TRWR. 2.4 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES A. Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 15 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD
6 configuration L5-15R, and UL 498. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Bryant; 4710. b. Arrow Hart; CWL515R. c. Hubbell; HBL4710.
d. Leviton; 4710. e. Pass & Seymour; L515-R.
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 262726-3 WIRING DEVICES B. Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration L5-20R, and UL 498. 1. Products: Subject
to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Arrow Hart; CWL520R. b. Bryant; 70520FR. c. Hubbell; HBL2310. d. Leviton; 2310. e. Pass & Seymour; L520-R. C. Single
Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 30 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration L5-30R, and UL 498. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Arrow Hart; CWL530R. b. Bryant; 70530FR. c. Hubbell; HBL2610. d. Leviton; 2610. e. Pass & Seymour; L530-R.. 2.5 SNAP SWITCHES A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, DSCC W C 896F, and UL 20. B.
Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Arrow Hart; AH1221 (single pole), AH1222 (two pole), AH1223 (three way),
AH1224 (four way). b. Bryant; 4901 (single pole), 4902 (two pole), 4903 (three way), 4904 (four way). c. Hubbell; HBL1221 (single pole), HBL1222 (two pole), HBL1223 (three way), HBL2224
(four way). d. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four way). e. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1 (single pole), PS20AC2 (two pole), PS20AC3 (three way),
PS20AC4 (four way). 2.6 WALL PLATES A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material
for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch-thick, satin-finished stainless steel. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded
lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in "wet locations." B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weatherresistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable
cover. 2.7 CORD REELS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. EGS Electrical Group; McGill products. 2. Industrial Industrial
Electric Reels, Inc. 3. Reelcraft Industries, Inc. 4. Daniel Woodhead; a Woodhead Industries, Inc. Co. B. Description: 115 V, 35 A, 60 Hz, spring retractable electric cord reel with
latch, solid steel construction, abrasion and corrosion resistant baked on powder coat finish, nylon roller cable guides, adjustable cord stop, under-hung ceiling mounted. 1. Provide
25 foot cord with No. 10 AWG stranded-copper conductors, rubber insulated, Type SO jacket, with green insulated grounding conductor, unless otherwise indicated.
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 262726-4 WIRING DEVICES 2. Provide two GFCI duplex receptacles, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide cast aluminum or non-metallic portable outlet box, listed
and labeled for “wet locations.” 4. Provide woven wire mesh cord grip and cord connector. 2.8 FINISHES A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device
color. Color as defined by NEMA WD 1 unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Gray, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device
listing. 2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Take steps to insure
that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside
of the boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors,
and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring
devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. C. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices.
2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free
conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. 4. Existing Conductors: a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.
b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough. D. Device Installation:
1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each
wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last
possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 5. Connect grounding terminals of devices to device box and equipment
grounding conductor using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length with factory-crimped flanged spade and ring terminals. 6. When using side wiring with binding-head screw
terminals, use solid conductor pigtails. Wrap conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw. 7. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required
by the manufacturer. 8. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15-or 20-A circuits, splice splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 9. Tighten unused terminal
screws on the device. 10. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 262726-5 WIRING DEVICES 11. Install device boxes so that finish plates do not span different types of building finishes. E. Receptacle Orientation: 1. Install ground
pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the left. F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount
outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. 1. Install blank device plates on unused device boxes. G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless
otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. H. Adjust
locations of floor service outlets, service poles, and high capacity floor boxes to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings. I. Securely install multioutlet assemblies with screws
and anchors. Comply with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." J. GFCI Receptacles: Where double-duplex GFCI receptacles are indicated, provide one duplex
GFCI receptacle and feed-through to standard straight blade convenience receptacle in same device box. 1. Unless indicated otherwise, do not feed-through to receptacles in other device
boxes. K. Mounting Heights: Measured from finished floor to bottom of outlet or device box, unless indicated otherwise. 1. General Use Receptacles: 16 inches. 2. Snap Switches, Wall-Box
Dimmers, Wall-Switch Sensors: 44 inches. a. Install on strike side of door, 6 to 12 inches from door, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Receptacles in Mechanical and Electrical Equipment
Rooms: 48 inches. 4. Wiring Devices Above 30-Inch-High Countertops: 40 inches. a. Install at least 2 inches above backsplash. 5. Wiring Devices Above 36-Inch-High Countertops: 44 inches.
a. Install at least 2 inches above backsplash. 6. Wiring Devices Above 42-Inch-High Countertops: 48 inches. a. Install at least 2 inches above backsplash. 7. Pushbuttons: 44 inches.
8. Interior Wall Mounted Luminaire Outlets: 88 inches. a. Install at least 2 inches above mirrors. 9. Occupant Adjustable Thermostats: 44 inches. 10. Sensor Only Thermostats: 56 inches.
11. Fire Alarm Manual Stations: 44 inches. a. Install within 5’-0” of door. b. Install no higher than 48 inches to top of device. 12. Fire Alarm Notification Appliances: 80 inches, or
6 inches below ceiling. Whichever is lower. L. Utilization Equipment: Refer to Shop Drawings for mounting height of special purpose devices serving, but not limited to, the following:
1. Ceiling fans 2. Roof vents 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from
which served. Use durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 262726-6 WIRING DEVICES 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with
UL 1436. 2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement. B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:
1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms
are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. The
tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems.
Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION 262726
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 262816-1
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS SECTION 262816 -ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,
including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following individually mounted,
enclosed switches and circuit breakers: 1. Nonfusible switches. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. B. HD: Heavy duty. C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw. 1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring. B. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory,
and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
a. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Current and voltage ratings. c. Short-circuit current rating. d. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory
settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. 2. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that enclosed switches and circuit
breakers, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" Include the following: a. Basis
of Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 1) The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place
without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." 2) The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any
parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." b. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit:
Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. c. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their
installation requirements. 3. Field quality-control test reports including the following: a. Test procedures used. b. Test results that comply with requirements. c. Results of failed
tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements. C. Closeout Submittals:
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 262816-2 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: a. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing
and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers. b. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of circuit breaker. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components,
Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply
with NFPA 70. C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and
adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following
conditions, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate
layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace
clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. B. Products of other manufacturers
will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product. The “Substitution Request Form” and complete
technical data for evaluation must accompany requests for A/E’s approval. All materials for evaluation must be received by the Project Manager and Specification Department at least 10
days prior to bid due date. Additional approved manufacturers will be issued by Addendum. 2.2 FUSIBLE AND NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: 1. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products.
2. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 3. Square D; Schneider Electric. B. Nonfusible Switch, 1200 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks,
and interlocked with cover in closed position.
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 262816-3 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 2.3 ENCLOSURES A. NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1 to meet environmental conditions of installed location. 1. Outdoor Locations:
NEMA 250, Type 3R. 2. Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel. 3. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine elements
and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only
after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with applicable portions of NECA 1, NEMA PB 1.1, and NEMA PB 2.1 for installation of enclosed switches
and circuit breakers. B. Mount individual wall-mounting switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor floor-mounting switches to concrete
base. C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." D. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove
temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting
wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure with engraved
metal or laminated-plastic nameplate as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare for acceptance testing as follows:
1. Inspect mechanical and electrical connections. 2. Verify switch and relay type and labeling verification. 3. Verify rating of installed fuses. 4. Inspect proper installation of type,
size, quantity, and arrangement of mounting or anchorage devices complying with manufacturer's certification. B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Test mounting and anchorage devices according to requirements in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." 2. Perform each electrical test and visual
and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded-case circuit breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters. 3. Correct malfunctioning
units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker
trip ranges.
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 262816-4 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 3.6 CLEANING A. On completion of installation, vacuum dirt and debris from interiors; do not use compressed air
to assist in cleaning. B. Inspect exposed surfaces and repair damaged finishes. END OF SECTION 262816
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 265100-1 INTERIOR LIGHTING SECTION 265100 -INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior lighting fixtures,
lamps, ballasts, and SSL drivers. 2. Exterior luminaires normally mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings. 3. Emergency fluorescent power units. 4. Exit signs. 5. Lighting fixture
supports. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time switches, photoelectric relays,
occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BF: Ballast factor. B. CEE: Consortium for Energy Efficiency, Inc. C. CRI: Color-rendering index.
D. HID: High-intensity discharge. E. LED: Light-emitting diode. F. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating. G. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast and SSL driver housing if
provided. H. SSL: Solid-state lighting. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation.
Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: a. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. b. Emergency lighting units including battery and
charger. c. Ballast and SSL Drivers. d. Energy-efficiency data. e. Life, output, and energy-efficiency data for lamps. f. Photometric data, in IESNA format, based on laboratory tests
of each lighting fixture type, outfitted with lamps, ballasts, SSL drivers, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project. 1) Photometric
data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) for Energy Efficient Lighting
Products.
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 265100-2 INTERIOR LIGHTING 2. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast and SSL driver for bi-level and dimmercontrolled fixtures, signed by product manufacturer.
3. Field quality-control test reports. B. Closeout Submittals: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
2. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 3. Extra Materials: Receipt for extra materials. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications:
Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. B. Electrical Components,
Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply
with NFPA 70. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them,
including HVAC equipment, firesuppression system, and partition assemblies. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for SSL Luminaires and Drivers: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer
of lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for SSL Luminaires and Drivers: 5 years
from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit
agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit
Batteries: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining nine years. 2. Warranty Period for Emergency
Fluorescent Ballast and Emergency SSL Drivers and Self-Powered Exit Sign Batteries: Seven years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated
warranty for the remaining six years. C. Special Warranty for Ballasts and SSL Drivers: Manufacturer's standard form in which ballast and SSL driver manufacturers agree to repair or
replace ballasts and SSL drivers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Electronic Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps: Five years
from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for SSL Drivers for SSL Luminaires: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Warranty Period for Ballasts for HID Lamps:
Three years from date of Substantial Completion. D. Special Warranty for T5 and T8 Fluorescent Lamps: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by lamp manufacturer
agreeing to replace lamps that fail in materials or workmanship, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 265100-3 INTERIOR LIGHTING 1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that
match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating
installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 2. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 3. Battery and Charger
Data: One for each emergency lighting unit. 4. Ballasts and SSL Drivers: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 5. Globes and Guards: 1
for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In Lighting Fixture Schedule where titles below are column or
row headings that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers
specified. B. Products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product.
The “Substitution Request Form” and complete technical data for evaluation must accompany requests for A/E’s approval. All materials for evaluation must be received by the Project Manager
and Specification Department at least 10 days prior to bid due date. Additional approved manufacturers will be issued by Addendum. 2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures. B. LED Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598, in addition to the requirements contained in UL Subject
8750. C. Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5A. D. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test
according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable. E. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. F. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and
support to prevent warping and sagging. G. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping
without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. H.
Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces:
75 percent. 4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 265100-4 INTERIOR LIGHTING I. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing
and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch nominal unless different thickness is indicated. b. UV stabilized. 2. Glass:
Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated. J. Trim Work: Provide solid aluminum or solid brass bar work, finials, and similar trim on wall sconces and decorative pendent lighting
fixtures. Steel or hollow tubes are not permitted. K. Tap Connections (Fixture Whips): Not longer than 6 feet, constructed of No. 12 AWG copper conductors. 2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT
LAMPS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers: 1. General Electric Co.; GE Lighting Division. 2. Lutron Electronics
Co., Inc. 3. OSRAM SYLVANIA. 4. Philips Lighting Co.; Advance Transformer Co. Division. 5. Universal Lighting Technologies, Inc. B. Electronic Ballasts for T8 Lamps: Comply with ANSI
C82.11; NEMA Premium electronic ballast, programmed-start type, unless otherwise indicated, and designed for type and quantity of lamps served. 1. Automatic lamp starting after lamp
replacement. 2. Sound Rating: A. 3. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 4. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. 5. Operating Frequency:
20 kHz or higher. 6. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 7. BF: 0.88 or higher. 8. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher. 9. 32 W T8 Maximum ANSI Input Power, 277 V: a. 1 Lamp Ballast: 37
W, 0.14 A nominal line current. b. 2 Lamp Ballast: 60 W, 0.22 A nominal line current. c. 3 Lamp Ballast: 89 W, 0.33 A nominal line current. d. 4 Lamp Ballast: 115 W, 0.43 A nominal line
current. C. Electronic Programmed-Start Ballasts for T5 and T5HO Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11 and the following: 1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 2. Automatic lamp
starting after lamp replacement. 3. Sound Rating: A. 4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. 6.
Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 8. BF: 1.0 or higher. 9. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher. 10. 54 W T5 Maximum ANSI Input Power, 277 V:
a. 1 Lamp Ballast: 64 W, 0.24 A nominal line current. b. 2 Lamp Ballast: 118 W, 0.43 A nominal line current. D. Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments: 1. Temperatures 0 Deg F and
Higher: Electronic type rated for 0 deg F starting and operating temperature with indicated lamp types.
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 265100-5 INTERIOR LIGHTING 2.4 BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following manufacturers: 1. General Electric Co.; GE Lighting Division. 2. OSRAM SYLVANIA. 3. Philips Lighting Co.; Advance Transformer Co. Division. 4. Robertson Worldwide. 5. Universal
Lighting Technologies, Inc. B. Description: Electronic programmed rapid-start type, complying with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. 1. Lamp end-of-life
detection and shutdown circuit. 2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. 3. Sound Rating: A. 4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. 5. Transient Voltage
Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. 6. Operating Frequency: 50 kHz or higher. 7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 8. BF: 0.98 or higher. 9. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher.
10. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment. 11. Ballast Case Temperature:
75 deg C, maximum. 12. 26 W T4 Triple-Tube Compact Fluorescent Lamp Maximum ANSI Input Power, 277 V: a. 1 Lamp Ballast: 29 W, 0.11 A nominal line current. b. 2 Lamp Ballast: 54 W, 0.22
A nominal line current. 13. 32 W T4 Triple-Tube Compact Fluorescent Lamp Maximum ANSI Input Power, 277 V: a. 1 Lamp Ballast: 36 W, 0.14 A nominal line current. b. 2 Lamp Ballast: 69
W, 0.26 A nominal line current. 14. 42 W T4 Triple-Tube Compact Fluorescent Lamp Maximum ANSI Input Power, 277 V: a. 1 Lamp Ballast: 48 W, 0.18 A nominal line current. b. 2 Lamp Ballast:
94 W, 0.40 A nominal line current. 15. 57 W T4 Triple-Tube Compact Fluorescent Lamp Maximum ANSI Input Power, 277 V: a. 1 Lamp Ballast: 62 W, 0.23 A nominal line current. 16. 70 W T4
Triple-Tube Compact Fluorescent Lamp Maximum ANSI Input Power, 277 V: a. 1 Lamp Ballast: 75 W, 0.27 A nominal line current. 2.5 EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT POWER UNITS AND EMERGENCY SSL DRIVER
UNITS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Cooper Lighting; Sure-Lites Division; a Division of Cooper
Industries. 2. Dual-Lite; a Division of Hubbell Lighting, Inc. 3. IOTA Engineering LLC. 4. Lithonia Lighting; a Division of Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 5. McPhilben; a Philips group
brand. 6. Philips Bodine. B. Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within lighting fixture body and compatible with ballast or SSL driver. Comply
with UL 924. 1. Emergency Connection: Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast or driver. Operate one fluorescent lamp or LED array
continuously at the following total output: a. T8, 32 W: 1350 lumens. b. T5, 28 W: 1250 lumens. c. T5HO, 54 W: 1250 lumens. d. Long Compact Fluorescent, 39 W: 1100 lumens. e. Long Compact
Fluorescent, 40 W: 1800 lumens. f. Compact Fluorescent, 26 W: 500 lumens. g. Compact Fluorescent, 32 W: W: 750 lumens.
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 265100-6 INTERIOR LIGHTING h. Compact Fluorescent, 42 W: 1000 lumens. i. LED: 5.1 W, 30 V dc, 200 mA. 2. Night-Light Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp or
LED module continuously. 3. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or entering ceiling space. a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit
housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates
charging at end of discharge cycle. 4. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. 5. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer
relay. 6. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated
by an integral audible alarm and flashing red LED. 2.6 EXIT SIGNS A. Description: Comply with UL UL 924; Comply with NEMA EM 1; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering
size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Internally Lighted Signs: 1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 2. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery
Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained power pack. a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed
transfer relay. c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay
disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power
and demonstrates unit operability. e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
f. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates coderequired test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by
an integral audible alarm and flashing red LED. 3. Wire Guard: Heavy-chrome-plated wire guard protects lamp heads or fixtures. 2.7 FLUORESCENT LAMPS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance
with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers: 1. General Electric Co.; GE Lighting Division. 2. OSRAM SYLVANIA. 3. Philips Lighting Co.; a Division of Philips
Electronics North America Corporation. B. Low-Mercury Lamps: Comply with EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching procedure test; shall yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when
tested according to NEMA LL 1. C. High performanceT8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches, 3100 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 80 (minimum),
color temperature 4100 K, and average rated life 30,000 hours at 3 hours operation per start, complying with CEE High-Performance T8 Specification, unless otherwise indicated. D. Reduced
wattage T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 28 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches, 2725 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 4100 K, and average rated
life 36,000 hours at 3 hours operation per start, complying with CEE Reduced-Wattage T8 Specification, unless otherwise indicated.
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 265100-7 INTERIOR LIGHTING E. Reduced wattage T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 15 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches, 1200 initial lumens (minimum),
CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 4100 K, and average rated life 24,000 hours at 3 hours operation per start, unless otherwise indicated. F. Standard T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps,
rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches, 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 4100 K, and average rated life 20,000 hours at 3 hours operation per
start, unless otherwise indicated. G. Standard T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches, 1300 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 80 (minimum), color
temperature 4100 K, and average rated life 20,000 hours at 3 hours operation per start, unless otherwise indicated. H. T5 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 28 W maximum, nominal length
of 45.2 inches, 2900 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 82 (minimum), color temperature 4100 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated. I. T5HO rapid-start, high-output
low-mercury lamps, rated 54 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2 inches, 5000 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 82 (minimum), color temperature 4100 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours,
unless otherwise indicated. J. Long Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, low mercury lamps, rated 40 W maximum, nominal length of 22.5 inches, 3150 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 80 (minimum),
color temperature 4100 K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at 3 hours operation per start, and suitable for use with dimming ballasts, unless otherwise indicated. K. Compact Fluorescent
Lamps: 4-Pin, low mercury, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 4100 K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at 3 hours operation per start, and suitable for use with dimming ballasts,
unless otherwise indicated. 1. 13 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (minimum). 2. 18 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1200 initial lumens (minimum). 3. 26 W:
T4, double or triple tube, rated 1800 initial lumens (minimum). 4. 32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum). 5. 42 W: T4, triple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum).
6. 57 W: T4, triple tube, rated 4300 initial lumens (minimum). 7. 70 W: T4, triple tube, rated 5200 initial lumens (minimum). 2.8 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS A. Comply with Division
26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel-and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing
with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture. C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same
as fixture. D. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod. E. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with
threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug. F. Chains: 12 gage, zinc-plated steel jack chain or double-loop chain. G. Air-Craft Cable: 3/32-inch stainless steel cable with adjustable
cable holder, adjustable plus or minus 6 inches.
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 265100-8 INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 500 and NECA 502. B. Lighting
fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each luminaire. C. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support: 1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches,
brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. 3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension
for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. 4. Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building structure. D. Connect
wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." E. Install wire guards to exit signs and emergency lighting units in gymnasia, milt-purpose
rooms, shops, and stage areas. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply with requirements for identification
specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation.
Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal. B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting
results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards. 3.4 STARTUP SERVICE A. Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate
properly, prior to occupancy by Owner. Burn-in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to be dimmed, for at least 100 hours at full voltage. END OF SECTION 265100
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 265600-1 EXTERIOR LIGHTING SECTION 265600 -EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior luminaires with lamps,
ballasts, and SSL drivers. 2. Luminaire-mounted photoelectric relays. 3. Poles and accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 26 Section "Interior Lighting"
for exterior luminaires normally mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CRI: Color-rendering index. B. HID: High-intensity discharge. C. LED: Light-emitting diode.
D. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast and SSL driver housing if provided. E. Pole: Luminaire support structure, including tower used for large area illumination.
F. SSL: Solid-state lighting. G. Standard: Same definition as "Pole" above. 1.4 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS CRITERIA FOR POLE SELECTION A. Dead Load: Weight of luminaire and its horizontal and
vertical supports, and supporting structure, applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-5. B. Ice Load: Load of 3 lbf/sq. ft., applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-5. C. Wind Load: Pressure of wind
on pole and luminaire, calculated and applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-5. 1. Basic wind speed for calculating wind load for poles 50 feet or less in height is 90 mph. a. Wind Importance
Factor: 1.0. b. Minimum Design Life: 50 years. c. Velocity Conversion Factors: 1.0. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Product Data: For each luminaire, pole,
and support component, arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: a. Physical description of luminaire, including
materials, dimensions, effective projected area, and verification of indicated parameters. b. Details of attaching luminaires and accessories. c. Details of installation and construction.
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 265600-2 EXTERIOR LIGHTING d. Luminaire materials. e. Photometric data based on laboratory tests of each luminaire type, complete with indicated lamps, ballasts,
SSL drivers, and accessories. 1) Photometric data shall be certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program
for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. f. Photoelectric relays. g. Ballasts and SSL Drivers, including energy-efficiency data. h. Lamps, including life, output, and energy-efficiency
data. i. Materials, dimensions, and finishes of poles. j. Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is suitable for components involved. 2. Field quality-control
test reports. B. Closeout Submittals: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and poles to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Warranty: Special warranty specified
in this Section. 3. Extra Materials: Receipt for extra materials. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories
that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and
labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical
Safety Code." D. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for SSL Luminaires and Drivers: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of lighting unit agrees to repair
or replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for SSL Luminaires and Drivers: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship; that corrode; or that fade, stain,
perforate, erode, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within specified warranty period. Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage, hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or
unauthorized repairs or alterations from special warranty coverage. 1. Warranty Period for Luminaires: One year from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Metal Corrosion:
One year from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Warranty Period for Color Retention: One year from date of Substantial Completion. 4. Warranty Period for Lamps: Replace lamps and fuses
that fail within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion; furnish replacement lamps and fuses that fail within the second 12 months from date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 EXTRA
MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 265600-3 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 2. Glass and Plastic Lenses, Covers, and Other Optical Parts: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one
of each type. 3. Ballasts and SSL Drivers: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 4. Globes and Guards: 10 for every 20 of each type and
rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In Lighting Fixture Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists,
the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. B. Products
of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product. The “Substitution
Request Form” and complete technical data for evaluation must accompany requests for A/E’s approval. All materials for evaluation must be received by the Project Manager and Specification
Department at least 10 days prior to bid due date. Additional approved manufacturers will be issued by Addendum. 2.2 LUMINAIRES, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Luminaires shall comply with
UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light
distribution patterns indicated for luminaires. C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum, unless otherwise indicated.
Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather-and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in use. Provide filter/breather for
enclosed luminaires. F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of
tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable
for cleaning or replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast and SSL driver when door opens. G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel. H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing
and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. I. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light distribution to indicated
portion of normally illuminated area or field. J. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular
Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. K. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat-and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors
in luminaire doors.
PROJECT NO. 211118.00 265600-4 EXTERIOR LIGHTING L. Factory-Applied Finish for Steel and Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2, "Near-White
Blast Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust,
if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling." 2. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting
of electro-statically coated urethane polyester thermosetting powder at least 3.0 mils thick, cured in a convection oven at 400 degrees F. a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard
catalog of colors. b. Color: Match Architect/Engineer's sample of custom color. c. Color: As selected by Architect/Engineer from manufacturer's full range of standard and optional colors.
PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 501. B. Install lamps in each luminaire. C. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports. 1. Use fastening methods
and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer. D. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. Include adjustment
of photoelectric device to prevent false operation of relay by artificial light sources. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures
and components. B. Illumination Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires and energizing circuits with normal power source. 1. Verify operation
of photoelectric controls. C. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting
system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards. END OF SECTION 265600
211118.00 311000-1 SITE CLEARING SECTION 311000 -SITE CLEARING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Protecting existing trees, shrubs, groundcovers, plants,
and grass to remain or to be transplanted. 2. Removing existing trees, shrubs, groundcovers, plants, and grass. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 5. Removing
above-and below-grade site improvements. 6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities. 7. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures. B. Related Sections
include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary utilities, temporary construction and support facilities, temporary security and protection
facilities. 2. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and site grading. 3. Division 23 Section "Turf and Grasses" for finish grading including
preparing and placing planting soil mixes and testing of topsoil material. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt,
and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more
than 1/2 inch in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil materials. B. Tree Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of
trees to be protected during construction, and defined by the drip line of individual trees or the perimeter drip line of groups of trees, unless otherwise indicated. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Requirement of Regulatory Agencies: All work shall conform to regulations, codes, safety requirements, ordinances, and laws of federal, state, and local governing bodies having jurisdiction.
Keep a copy of the Soil Erosion and Sediment Control Plan on-site at all times during construction. For purposes of erosion control, Contractor shall be considered the “operator” of
the site and shall comply with all rules of Rule 5. Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining and installing erosion control measures as noted on Drawings and additional measures
required by governing agencies. B. Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or air borne dust to
adjacent properties and sidewalks according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, sediment, and erosion control drawings, and EPA 832/R-92-005, whichever is more stringent.
211118.00 311000-2 SITE CLEARING 1.5 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP A. Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's
property and shall be removed from Project site. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals 1. Product Data: Silt fence data, including capacities. 2. Contractor shall supply
a copy of the log kept of erosion control monitoring and repairs, as well as means and methods for temporary controls. 3. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing
conditions of trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic: Minimize
interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other
adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required
by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing site clearing or other work indicated on property adjoining Owner's property will
be obtained by Owner before award of Contract. 1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Architect. C. Notify corporations, companies, individuals, and local
authorities owning conduits, wires, or pipes that will be affected by this Work. Arrange for removal of wires running to or on the property that will interfere with the execution of
the Work. 1. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing. D. Protect and maintain conduit, drains, sewers, pipes, and
wires that are to remain. Provide and maintain markers for location of underground facilities. E. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control
measures are in place. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. Satisfactory Soil Materials: Requirements for satisfactory soil materials are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
1. Obtain approved borrow soil materials off-site when satisfactory soil materials are not available on-site. B. Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control 1. Straw Bale Filters, Sediment
Traps, and Silt Fence. 2. Rip Rap: Sound and durable rock shall be free of soil and placed as a rock fill for the protection of slopes so denoted on the Drawings. Thin, slablike pieces
shall not be used. Rock shall consist of sizes such that the amount of material passing a 3 inch sieve shall not be more than 15 percent by weight of the total material, and the amount
of material passing a 6 inch square opening shall not be more than 50 percent by weight of the total material. 3. Temporary seeding.
211118.00 311000-3 SITE CLEARING a. Northern States Temporary Seeding Mix; Seeding Rate: 8 lbs/1,000 sq.ft. 1) 85 percent Perennial Ryegrass 2) 15 percent Annual Ryegrass b. Transition
States (Southern Ohio/Indiana/Illinois); Seeding Rate: 8 lbs./1,000 sq.ft. 1) 85 percent Tall Fescue 2) 15 percent Annual Ryegrass 4. Mulch shall be the following: a. Wood fiber PART
3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction. B. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain
or to be transplanted. The contractor shall layout and stake parking lots, drives, detention basin and the building outline and shall walk the site with the Architect to field verify
trees and vegetation to remove before the commencement of clearing operations. C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. 1. Restore damaged improvements
to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner. 3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL A. Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion
and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to a sediment and erosion control plan, specific to the site, that complies
with EPA 832/R-92-005 or requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. B. Sequence of Construction Activities 1. Install silt fence, sediment traps, and
all other erosion control measures as part of initial phase of any work to ensure maximum silt retention. 2. Mass grade the site keeping disturbed areas to a minimum at all times. Seed
and mulch sides of swales, mounds, and ponds immediately upon completion. Application of temporary seeding will be required for all disturbed areas that cannot be final seeded within
a time period that will prevent slope erosion. Temporary seeding will be required on all areas to be left disturbed in excess of 30 days. All temporary seeded areas shall be seeded and
then hydro mulched in conformance with Division 32 Section “Turf and Grasses”. 3. Control mud accumulation on all streets surrounding project by installing stone surface at each location
where construction traffic leaves the site. Keep dust to a minimum by utilizing sprinkling, calcium chloride, vegetative cover, spray on adhesives, or other approved methods. 4. Maintain
all filters and traps during construction to prevent any blockages from accumulated sediment. Clean sediment traps, filters, and fencing after each storm event and on a weekly basis.
Replace all materials that are clogged or ineffective, 20 percent of capacity lost or obstructed. 5. As storm sewer lines are installed, install a silt barrier at each inlet and on each
drainage swale at maximum 50 foot intervals. 6. Pave proposed paved areas as soon as possible after subgrade is prepared. 7. Remove temporary erosion control and sediment controls only
when sufficient growth of ground cover is established to prevent further erosion. 8. Place riprap in areas of high velocity stream flow as noted on the Drawings. C. Temporary Seeding
211118.00 311000-4 SITE CLEARING 1. If swale banks and slopes of five horizontal to one vertical or greater cannot be permanently seeded immediately after grading, temporarily seed these
areas and install erosion control blankets in conformance with Division 32 Section “Turf Grasses”. When permanent seeding is to be completed these blankets shall then be removed by the
site clearing contractor and then fine grading, permanent seeding and new erosion control blankets installed under division 32 section “Turf Grasses”. 2. Mulch shall be the following
with a coverage of at least 75 percent of the soil surface: a. Install wood fiber at a rate of 1 ton/acre with a hydro mulcher and tacking agent. 3. Check for erosion damage after each
storm event and on a weekly basis. Reseed and mulch as required. 4. If grading occurs during December, January, or February, no seeding is to take place until Spring planting time. All
sediment filters and traps are to be in place prior to bulk earth moving and clearing. 5. All areas along streets (approximately 25 feet behind curb or edge of road) shall be seeded
with permanent seed mixture as soon as grade is established. Reseeding may be required after utility companies have installed their mains. a. Mow monthly, regardless, from March through
October. 6. All existing lawns and seeded areas as defined shall be maintained in accordance with Division 32 Section “Turf and Grasses”. a. If area remains undisturbed, it must be mowed
monthly from March through October. D. Monitoring: Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.
1. Monitor soil erosion control practices at least weekly to determine the effectiveness of the installation any repairs required. Keep a detailed log of these observations and remedies
taken. 2. Clean out siltation filters when siltation reduces capacity by 20 percent. Material removed may be dried and used as embankment material only in areas approved by the A/E.
E. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal. 3.3 TREE PROTECTION A. Erect and maintain temporary fencing around tree protection
zones before starting site clearing. Remove fence when construction is complete. 1. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within fenced area. 2. Do not permit
vehicles, equipment, or foot traffic within fenced area. 3. Maintain fenced area free of weeds and trash. B. Do not excavate within tree protection zones, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Where excavation for new construction is required within tree protection zones, hand clear and excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil
to expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible. 1. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly. 2. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage
until they are permanently redirected and covered with soil. 3. Coat cut faces of roots more than 1-1/2 inches in diameter with an emulsified asphalt or other approved coating formulated
for use on damaged plant tissues. 4. Backfill with soil as soon as possible. D. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations,
in accordance with ANSI A300. 1. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined by Architect.
211118.00 311000-5 SITE CLEARING 3.4 UTILITIES A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed or as encountered. 1. Arrange with utility companies
to shut off indicated utilities. B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and
then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify A/E &Construction Manager not less than two days in advance of proposed
utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. C. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.
3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction. 1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation
indicated to remain or to be relocated. 2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation
of new construction. 3. Completely remove stumps of trees, shrubs, and other vegetation including the roots. 4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within tree protection zone. 5. Chip
removed tree branches and dispose of off-site. B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is
indicated. 1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches, and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground. 3.6 TOPSOIL STRIPPING
A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil. B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials.
1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials. 2. At lawn and landscape planting areas, a minimum of 6 inches
of topsoil is required after final grading. Where changes in contours are indicated in these areas, topsoil is not required to be removed to its full depth as indicated finish contours
will allow, or have, 6 inches of topsoil after final grading. C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles
to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust and surround with a silt fence. 1. Do not stockpile topsoil within tree protection zones. 2. If excess topsoil remains following
topsoil spreading operations, stockpile surplus topsoil or respread deeper than 6” in areas as directed by the Architect.. 3.7 SITE IMPROVEMENTS A. Remove existing above-and below-grade
improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction.
211118.00 311000-6 SITE CLEARING B. Where catch basins or other underground structures are removed and drainage lines are encountered that cannot be abandoned, provide and install the
necessary sewer tile so that maintenance of the lines can be assured. This will particularly apply to subsurface drainage lines, which should be maintained to assure proper drainage.
Obtain Architect/Engineer approval for rerouting such lines. 1. Fill the open ends of abandoned sewers or drains encountered in excavation with concrete or masonry, as per Local and
State Codes. 3.8 DISPOSAL A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally
dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. Burning of combustible cleared and grubbed materials is not permitted on Owner’s property. END OF SECTION 311000
211118.00 312000-1 EARTH MOVING SECTION 312000 -EARTH MOVING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements,
lawns and grasses for any areas that may be disturbed. 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3. Installation of drainage course for slabs-on-grade. 4. Subbase course
for concrete walks,pavements. 5. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. 6. Topsoil installation in lawn, planting areas, and all other disturbed areas not covered by
other improvements. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary controls, utilities, and support facilities. 2.
Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for granular course if placed over vapor retarder and beneath the slab-on-grade. 3. Divisions 21, 22, 23, 26, 27, and 28 Sections for installing
underground mechanical and electrical utilities and buried mechanical and electrical structures. 4. Division 32 Section "Turf and Grasses" for finish grading, 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill:
Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation. 1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides
of pipe. 2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. B. Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe. C. Borrow
Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill. D. Drainage Course: Course supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore
water. E. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated. 1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade
elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions
for unit prices. 2. Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 feet in width and more than 30 feet in length. 3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond
indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation. F. Fill:
Soil materials used to raise existing grades.
211118.00 312000-2 EARTH MOVING G. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material 3/4 cu. yd. or more in volume that exceed
a standard penetration resistance of 50 blows/2 inches when tested by an independent geotechnical testing agency, according to ASTM D 1586. H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations,
retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. I. Subbase Course
(Aggregate): Course placed between the subgrade and base course for hotmix asphalt pavement, or course placed between the subgrade and cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or
hot-mix asphalt walk. J. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil
materials. K. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings. L. Topsoil; ASTM D 5268, ph range of 5.5-7, a fertile,
friable loam with a range of 2 percent to 20 percent organic material content, free of stones ½ inch or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.
1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Product Data: For the following: a. Each type of plastic warning tape. b. Geotextile. c. Controlled low-strength material,
including design mixture. 2. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated:
a. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. b. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 or ASTM D 1557 for each
on-site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Blasting: Is not permitted: B. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing
agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials and rock-definition testing, as documented according to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 548. C. All grading of athletic playing
fields shall be laser graded with an as built survey to be approved by the Architect prior to installation of athletic field subdrainage, special soil mix installation and final grading
and seeding operations. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Site Information: Data furnished by Owner in Soils Exploration Report (following Information Available To Bidders) of indicated subsurface
conditions is not intended as representations or warrants of continuity of such conditions between soil borings. It is expressly understood that Owner will not be responsible for interpretations
or conclusions drawn there from by Contractor. Data is made available for the convenience of Contractor. 1. Contractor at no cost to Owner may make additional test borings and other
exploratory operations.
211118.00 312000-3 EARTH MOVING B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only
after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated. 1. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be encountered during
excavation, consult the Architect immediately for directions as to procedure. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair
damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner. 2. Notify Construction Manager not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 3. Do not proceed with utility
interruptions without written permission. 4. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating. C. Demolish and completely remove from site existing
underground utilities indicated to be removed or as required. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active. D. Rock Measurement: Volume of rock actually
removed, measured in original position, but not to exceed the following. Unit prices for rock excavation include replacement with approved materials. 1. 24 inches outside of concrete
forms other than at footings. 2. 12 inches outside of concrete forms at footings. 3. 6 inches outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast against grade. 4. Outside dimensions
of concrete walls indicated to be cast against rock without forms or exterior waterproofing treatments. 5. 6 inches beneath bottom of concrete slabs-on-grade. 6. 6 inches beneath pipe
in trenches, and the greater of 24 inches wider than pipe or 42 inches wide. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by the manufacturers specified. B. Products of other manufacturers
will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product. The “Substitution Request Form” and complete
technical data for evaluation must accompany requests for A/E’s approval. All materials for evaluation must be received by the Project Manager and Specification Department at least 10
days prior to bid due date. Additional approved manufacturers will be issued by Addendum. 2.2 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide borrow soil materials and topsoil when sufficient satisfactory
soil materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM or a combination of these groups; free of
rock or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter. C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC,
SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487 or a combination of these groups. 1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent
of optimum moisture content at time of compaction. D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand;
ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
211118.00 312000-4 EARTH MOVING E. Engineered Fill/Granular Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM
D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve, unless otherwise noted. 1. Aggregates used for subsurface storm water
storage, underdrains, or storm sewer backfill shall be washed limestone, washed gravel, or river rock. The aggregates shall be 100 percent crushed in all cases. F. Bedding Course: Naturally
or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and not more than
8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. G. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57;
with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve. H. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural
sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve. I. Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate, natural, or
manufactured sand. J. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state. K. Topsoil; ASTM D 5268, ph range of 5.5-7, a fertile, friable loam with
a range of 2 percent to 20 percent organic material content, free of stones ½ inch or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. 2.3 GEOTEXTILES
A. Subsurface Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater
than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced: 1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288. 2. Grab Tensile Strength: 157 lbf; ASTM
D 4632. 3. Sewn Seam Strength: 142 lbf; ASTM D 4632. 4. Tear Strength: 56 lbf; ASTM D 4533. 5. Puncture Strength: 56 lbf; ASTM D 4833. 6. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60 sieve, maximum;
ASTM D 4751. 7. Permittivity: 0.2 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491. 8. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355. B. Separation Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric,
manufactured for separation applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation less than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test
methods referenced: 1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288. 2. Grab Tensile Strength: 247 lbf; ASTM D 4632. 3. Sewn Seam Strength: 222 lbf; ASTM D 4632. 4. Tear Strength: 90 lbf; ASTM
D 4533. 5. Puncture Strength: 90 lbf; ASTM D 4833. 6. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60 sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751. 7. Permittivity: 0.02 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491. 8. UV Stability:
50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355. C. Reinforcing Fabric 1. Reinforcing fabric shall be made from woven polypropylene containing heavy monofilament and fibrillated yarns
with the minimum physical properties: a. Grab Strength ASTM D4632 250 lbs b. Mullen Burst ASTM D3786 750 psi
211118.00 312000-5 EARTH MOVING c. Trapezoidal Tear ASTM D4533 110 psi d. Water Flow Rate ASTM D4491 40 gpm 2. Typically used as subgrade stabilization D. Reinforcing Geogrid 1. Reinforcing
geogrid shall be made from polypropylene with the minimum physical properties: a. True Initial Modulus In Use Type I 17,140 lb/ft. b. Flexural Stiffness Type I 250,000 cm c. Aperture
Stability Modulus Type I 3.2 deg d. Resistance to Installation Damage Type I 70% GP 2. Typically used as subgrade stabilization 2.4 CONTROLLED LOW-STRENGTH MATERIAL (FLOWABLE FILL) A.
Controlled Low-Strength Material: Low-density, self-compacting, flowable concrete material as follows: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or III. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C
or F. 3. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size. 4. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M. 5. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. B. Maximum Water Cementitious
Ratio: Concrete mixes shall be limited to the water-cement ratios specified in the Concrete Schedule in these Specifications (DIV. 3 -CS-1). Water reducers and fly ash may be used to
increase the slump while maintaining or reducing the water-cementitious ratio at or below the maximums specified values, except where specifically prohibited in these specifications.
C. Mix designs for flowable fill shall generally conform to the following guideline mixes: Material Type 1 (for utility Type 2 (for backfill trench backfill) under structures) (lbs/cu
yd) (lbs/cu yd) Cement 50 50-100 Fly Ash 250 Fine Aggregate 2910 2420 Water 500 210-300 Entrained Air 0% 5 % +/-1 ½ % 1. Alternate mix designs may be submitted in lieu of the above.
Mix designs shall have an unconfined compressive strength when tested according to ASTM D4832 as shown in the Concrete Schedule. Long term (12 months) unconfined compressive strength
for utility trench backfill shall be less than 100 psi. Mixes shall be flowable. Mixes shall conform to the requirements of ACI 229 for “Controlled Low Strength Material”. 2. Mixes shall
set up in less than 12 hours. Flowable fill shall be ready-mixed concrete. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid-and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured
for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in
a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored as follows: 1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam,
and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems.
211118.00 312000-6 EARTH MOVING PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which excavating, filling, and grading are to be performed and notify the
A/E in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable
manner. B. Proof Rolling: After topsoil has been stripped and excavation made to required subgrade elevations, proof roll areas to be occupied by the new buildings and paved surface
areas using a medium weight roller. A representative from the Soil Testing and Inspection Laboratory shall be present during all proof rolling operations. 1. Excavation of unsuitable
proof roll bearing materials a. Building Pad b. Paved Areas 1) Unsuitable bearing materials in areas to receive a bituminous or aggregate pavement structure shall not be undercut without
written authorization from the A/E. 2) Unsuitable bearing materials excavated in paved areas without without written approval from the A/E shall be considered unauthorized excavation.
No contract adjustments will be made for unauthorized excavation. 3) Prior to excavation of unsuitable materials, the contractor shall report to the soils engineer, [Construction Manager,]
and/or [A/E] the quantity of unsuitable soil to be excavated. The contractor shall report the following information: a) Quantity in cubic yards b) Quantity square yards c) The average
depth of cut. 2. Using the quantity information, the architect will consult with the soils engineer regarding alternative methods to remedy the unsuitable soil. Alternatives include:
a. Installation of an approved reinforcing fabric or reinforcing geogrid b. Installation of Hydrated Lime c. Removal and replacement of the unsuitable material 1) The depth of additional
excavation shall be based on the depth of deflection measured during the proofroll operation: a) 0 to 1/2 inch – no additional excavation b) >1/2 inch to 1 inch – 12” of additional excavation
c) >1 inch to 1.5 inch – 18” of additional excavation d) >1.5 to 2.5 inch – 24” of additional excavation plus an approved reinforcement geosynthetic. 2) Replacement material shall consist
of crushed concrete, 100 percent crushed gravel or 100 percent crushed limestone. a) The size of replacement aggregate material shall range from 1.5 inches to no greater than 3 inches
d. Disc and Dry 1) No additional payment will be made to disc and dry. e. Other remedy as suggested by the soils engineer or contractor. 3. The A/E will recommend to the owner implementing
an alternative or combination of alternatives based upon cost, effectiveness, scheduling impact and recommendations from the soils engineer. The owner shall issue final approval of the
remedy. 4. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by A/E, without additional compensation. 3.2
PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created
by earthwork operations.
211118.00 312000-7 EARTH MOVING B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 31 Section "Site Clearing," during earthwork operations. C.
Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary. D. Provide erosion control measures in accordance
with erosion control plan to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. 3.3 DEWATERING
A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. B. Protect subgrades from
softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation. 1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations.
Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches. 2. Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from excavations. Maintain until dewatering
is no longer required. 3.4 EXPLOSIVES A. Explosives: Do not use explosives. 3.5 EXCAVATION, GENERAL A. Classified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations. Material to be excavated
will be classified as earth and rock. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross sectioned by Architect. The Contract Sum will be adjusted for rock excavation according
to unit prices included in the Contract Documents. Changes in the Contract time may be authorized for rock excavation. 1. Earth excavation includes soil, boulders, and other materials
not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation. a. Intermittent drilling if permitted; ram hammering; or ripping of material not classified as rock excavation is earth excavation.
2. Rock excavation includes removal and disposal of rock. Remove rock to lines and subgrade elevations indicated to permit installation of permanent construction without exceeding the
following dimensions: dimensions: a. 24 inches outside of concrete forms other than at footings. b. 12 inches outside of concrete forms at footings. c. 6 inches outside of minimum required
dimensions of concrete cast against grade. d. Outside dimensions of concrete walls indicated to be cast against rock without forms or exterior waterproofing treatments. e. 6 inches beneath
bottom of concrete slabs on grade. f. 6 inches beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 24 inches wider than pipe or 42 incheswide. B. Additional Excavation: When excavation has
reached required subgrade elevations, notify Soils Engineer and A/E so he can observe conditions. 1. If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at required subgrade elevations,
carry excavations deeper and replace excavated material as directed by the Representative of Soils Testing and Inspection Laboratory after approval by A/E. 2. Removal of unsuitable material
and its replacement, as directed, will be paid on the basis of contract conditions relative to changes in work.
211118.00 312000-8 EARTH MOVING 3. The assumed quantity of additional excavation for bidding is zero cubic yards, unless otherwise noted. As such, all future estimated quantities of
additional excavation should be considered a substantial change in quantity. 4. All additional excavation or rock excavation performed without written authorization by the A/E shall
be considered unauthorized excavation for which no additional payment will be made. 5. Additional excavation and its replacement will be paid for based on contract provisions for changes
in the work or unit prices where applicable. C. Stability of Excavations: Slope sides of excavations to comply with codes and ordinances having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping
is not possible either because of space restriction or stability of material excavated. 1. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in a safe condition until completion of backfilling.
2. Comply with OSHA, "Construction Standards for Excavations, 29 CFR". D. Shoring and Bracing: Provide materials for shoring and bracing such as sheet piling, uprights, stringers, and
cross-braces in good serviceable condition. 1. Provide minimum requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with local codes and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Maintain
shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open. Carry down shoring and bracing as excavation progresses. E. Dewatering: Prevent surface water and
subsurface or groundwater from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area. 1. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent
softening of pavement subgrade, foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, sumps,
suction, and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations. 2. Convey water removed from excavations and rainwater to collecting
or runoff areas. Provide and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits for each structure. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage
ditches. 3.6 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance
from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb
bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
2. Excavation for Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. Do not disturb
bottom of excavations intended as bearing surfaces. 3.7 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations,
and subgrades. 3.8 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. 1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow
installation of top of pipe below frost line.
211118.00 312000-9 EARTH MOVING B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench
bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Clearance: 12 inches each side of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise noted. C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate
and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. . Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade. 1. Excavate trenches to depth
indicated or required. Carry depth of trenches for piping to establish indicated flow lines and invert elevations. Beyond building perimeter, keep bottoms of trenches sufficiently below
finish grade to avoid freeze-ups. 2. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation 6 inches below required elevation and backfill with a 6-inch layer of crushed stone or gravel prior to
installation of pipe. 3. For pipes or conduit 5 inches or less in nominal size and for flat-bottomed multiple-duct conduit units, do not excavate beyond indicated depths. Hand excavate
bottom cut to accurate elevations and support pipe or conduit on undisturbed soil. 4. For pipes or conduit 6 inches or larger in nominal size, tanks and other mechanical/electrical work
indicated to receive subbase, excavate to subbase depth indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, to 6 inches below bottom of work to be supported. 5. Except as otherwise indicated,
excavate for exterior water bearing piping (water, steam, condensate, drainage) so top of piping is not less than 5 feet below finished grade. 6. Grade bottoms of trenches, notching
under pipe bells to provide solid bearing for entire body of pipe. 7. Where welded and wrapped black iron pipe, wrought iron pipe, or soft type "K" copper tubing with silver soldered
joints is specified, a narrow trench made with special trenching machines will be acceptable, providing it can maintain a straight, true-to-line trench bottom in undisturbed earth to
prevent damage to the pipe. 8. Excavation for manholes and other accessories to have 12 inches minimum and 24 inches maximum clearances on all sides. 9. Trenches interior to the building
shall be excavated of sufficient width to allow ample working space and performed so walls and footings are not disturbed, weakened, or injured. 3.9 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. Fill unauthorized
excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill,
with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, or controlled low-strength material may be used when approved by A/E. 1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility
pipe as directed by A/E. 3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles
to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 2. Dispose
of excess soil material and waste materials as specified hereinafter. 3.11 BACKFILL A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1.
Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record
Documents. 3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.
211118.00 312000-10 EARTH MOVING 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or
ice. 3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding
course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. C. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within
18 inches of bottom of footings, piers, or foundations with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete or controlled low-strength material to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is
specified in Division 03 Section "[Cast-in-Place Concrete] [Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete]." 1. Wrap pipe with one inch glass fiber blanket by pipe installer prior to placement
of concrete. D. Provide 4-inch-thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 inches below surface of roadways or paving. After installing and testing, completely
encase
piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase. 1. Backfill when piping or conduit is greater than 30 inches below surface of roadways
and paving may be either controlled low-strength material or granular fill. E. Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil, free of particles larger than 1 inch in any dimension,
to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit, unless otherwise noted. 1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along
the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. 2. Backfill within the building and
piping or conduit below sidewalk shall be granular fill. F. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Place initial backfill of controlled low-strength material to a height of 12 inches over
the utility pipe or conduit. G. Trench Backfilling for PVC or PE Storm Piping Outside the Building: Backfill storm piping in four phases. Bedding, haunching, initial and finish backfill.
Place each lift to equal depths on both sides of pipe. Each lift shall extend from the side of the pipe to the trench wall. H. Trench Backfilling for Underdrains: Line the trench for
underdrains with a nonwoven filter fabric. Completely encase the washed river rock. 1. Backfill material shall be 3/4 inches diameter washed river rock. Continue the rock from the top
of the pipe to the base of the surface material. I. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while installing and removing shoring and bracing. J. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory
soil to final subgrade elevation. Properly compact and stabilize fill before permitting weight or traffic on the backfill. K. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches
below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs. 3.13 SOIL FILL FILL A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4
horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material. B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory
soil material to where topsoil begins.
211118.00 312000-11 EARTH MOVING 2. Under walks and stoops, use satisfactory soil material to subgrade elevation below concrete then use subbase material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use
engineered fill. 4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill to establish subgrade. a. Refer to Division 03 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete” for drainage fill. 5. Under footings and
foundations, lean concrete or controlled low-strength material, unless otherwise approved by A/E and geotechnical engineer. C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow,
or ice. 3.14 FLOWABLE FILL PLACEMENT A. Flowable Fill Placement: Discharge the flowable fill material from the ready-mix truck by any reasonable means into the space of the plan intended
usage. Bring material up uniformly to the fill line shown on the plans. B. The Contractor may begin placing other fill materials, as required, over flowable fill as soon as the surface
water on the flowable fill is gone. C. Reinforcing steel for foundations to be placed over flowable fill may be placed 24 hours after placement of flowable fill. 3.15 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL
A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content as indicated in geotechnical
report. 1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory
soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. 3.16 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Place backfill
and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted
by hand-operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure. C.
Compact soil materials to not less than the values in the soils report and the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698 (Standard): 1. Under structures,
building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent. 2. Under pavements, scarify
and recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent. 3. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade
and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent. 4. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill
or fill soil material at 95 percent. 5. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 95 percent. 3.17 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas
to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. 1. Provide a smooth transition
between adjacent existing grades and new grades.
211118.00 312000-12 EARTH MOVING 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances. B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water
away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch. 2. Walks: Plus or
minus 1/2 inch. 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge. 3.18 SUBBASE
AND BASE COURSES A. Place subbase course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course under pavements and walks as follows: 1. Install
separation geotextile on prepared subgrade if required according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends. 2. Place base course material over subbase course
under hot-mix asphalt pavement. 3. Shape subbase course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades. 4. Place subbase course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single
layer. 5. Place subbase course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick.
6. Compact subbase course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM
D 698. C. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base course to prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches wide, of satisfactory soil materials
and compact simultaneously with each subbase and base layer to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. 3.19 DRAINAGE COURSE A. Place drainage course
on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabson-grade as follows: 1. Install subdrainage
geotextile on prepared subgrade if required according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends. 2. Place drainage course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness
in a single layer. 3. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3
inches thick. 4. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. 3.20
TOPSOIL INSTALLATION A. Limit lawn subgrade preparation to disturbed areas to be planted. B. Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 4 inches. Remove stones larger
than 1/2 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. Spread topsoil to a depth of 6 inches but
not less than required to meet finish grades after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if topsoil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. a. Spread approximately
1/2 the thickness of toposoil over loosened subgrade. Mix thoroughly into top 2 inches of subgrade. Spread remainder of topsoil. b. Import additional topsoil material as required to
achieve 6 inch depth in lawn areas.
211118.00 312000-13 EARTH MOVING 3.21 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform special inspections. TABLE 1704.7 REQUIRED
VERIFICATION AND INSPECTIONI OF SOILS Verification and Inspection Task Continuous During Task Listed Periodically During Task Listed 1. Verify materials below footings are adequate to
achieve the design bearing capacity. --X 2. Verify excavations are extended to proper depth and have reached proper material. --X 3. Perform classification and testing of controlled
fill materials. --X 4. Verify use of proper materials, densities and lift thicknesses during placement and compaction of controlled fill. X --5. Prior to placement of controlled fill,
observe subgrade and verify that site has been prepared properly. --X 1. Determine footings have been excavated to proper depths by observing surveying of at least one location for each
foundation depth indicated. 2. Determine prior to placement of fill that site has been prepared in compliance with requirements by observing proof rolling operations. 3. Determine that
fill material and maximum lift thickness comply with requirements. B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field
quality-control testing. C. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously
completed work comply with requirements. D. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent
verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by A/E, except that a minimum of one test shall
be performed for each 15,000 sq.ft. of building area. E. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as
applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies: 1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least
1 test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than 3 tests. 2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least 1 test
for each 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than 2 tests. 3. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 150 feet or less
of trench length, but no fewer than 2 tests. F. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten
or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. 3.22 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded
areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.
211118.00 312000-14 EARTH MOVING B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they
lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact.
C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance,
quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. 3.23 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A.
Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. 1. If excess topsoil
remains, dispose on site as directed by the Architect and Construction Manager. END OF SECTION 312000
211118.00 321216-1 ASPHALT PAVING SECTION 321216 -ASPHALT PAVING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes the following that may be required for minor asphalt paving and pavement repair:
1. Cold milling of existing hot-mix asphalt pavement. 2. Hot-mix asphalt patching. 3. Hot-mix asphalt paving. 4. Asphalt surface treatments. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 31 Section
“Site Clearing” for removal of above ground improvements. 2. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for aggregate subbase courses and for aggregate pavement shoulders. 1.3 DEFINITION A.
Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 8 for definitions of terms. B. DOT: Department of Transportation. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide hot mix asphalt paving according
to materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of standard specification of state or local DOT. B. Special Conditions 1. Protection of work in place a. All paving work
shall be protected from construction traffic at all times after completion. All damaged work shall be replaced with no additional payment. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Assurance/Control
Submittals: 1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties. 2. Job-Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities
having jurisdiction, of approval of each job mix proposed for the Work. a. Certification: Provide material certificates signed by the material producer and the Contractor, certifying
that each mixture does not contain ferrous material or ferrous minerals of any kind. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM D 3666 for testing
indicated. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of the State Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for asphalt
paving paving work, except where modified, changed or added to in this specification: 1. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in standard specifications
do not apply to this Section.
211118.00 321216-2 ASPHALT PAVING C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review methods and procedures related to hot-mix asphalt paving including, but
not limited to, the following: a. Review proposed sources of paving materials, including capabilities and location of plant that will manufacture hot-mix asphalt. b. Review condition
of subgrade and preparatory work. c. Review requirements for protecting paving work, including restriction of traffic during installation period and for remainder of construction period.
d. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 1.7 DELIVERY,
STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver pavement-marking materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken and bearing manufacturer's labels containing brand name and type
of material, date of manufacture, and directions for storage. B. Store pavement-marking materials in a clean, dry, protected location within temperature range required by manufacturer.
Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively damp, if rain is
imminent or expected before time required for adequate cure, or if the following conditions are not met: 1. Tack Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F. 2. Slurry Coat: Comply
with weather limitations in ASTM D 3910. 3. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F and rising at time of placement. 4. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature
of 60 deg F at time of placement. B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F for
oil-based materials and 55 deg F for water-based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists,
the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by the manufacturers specified. B. Products of other
manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product. The “Substitution Request Form”
and complete technical data for evaluation must accompany requests for A/E’s approval. All materials for evaluation must be received by the Project Manager and Specification Department
at least 10 days prior to bid due date. Additional approved manufacturers will be issued by Addendum. 2.2 COMPACTED AGGREGATE BASE MATERIAL A. General: Use materials and gradations that
have performed satisfactory in previous installations. 1. Aggregates shall meet DOT requirement of State in which the project is located and as indicated.
211118.00 321216-3 ASPHALT PAVING B. Compacted aggregate base for all pavement types shall consist of natural aggregate. The aggregate shall contain 95 to 100 percent crushed content.
1. Provide crushed limestone. The contractor may provide 95 to 100 percent crushed gravel. Class B or higher aggregates shall be used in all cases. 2. Compacted aggregate base material
shall conform to the gradation shown in the table for each class of paving. 3. All compacted aggregate for bituminous paving shall be constructed in two lifts. In no case shall compacted
aggregate lifts be thicker than 4 inches. 4. Compacted aggregate shall contain 0% soft particles, 0 percent shale and 0 percent flat elongated particles. 2.3 MATERIAL GRADATIONS (Percent
Passing is shown): SIEVE SIZE mm (US Sieve) PARKING AND DRIVES SURFACE COURSE BINDER COURSE BASE COURSE COMPACTED AGGREGATE 37.5 (1 ½) 100 100 25.0 ( 1 ) 100 80-99 80-100 19.0 (3/4)
80-98 67-90 70-90 12.5 (1/2) 100 56-80 42-74 55-80 9.5 (3/8) 85-98 43-68 33-60 45-70 4.75 (No. 4) 4) 57-67 30-40 25-35 35-60 2.36 (No. 8) 31-62 14-40 12-34 25-50 1.18 (No. 16) 17-50
8-32 7-28 ---600mm (No. 30) 8-37 5-24 4-22 12-30 300mm (No. 50) 3-25 2-16 1-16 ---150mm (No. 100) 0-14 0-10 0-10 ---75mm (No. 200) 0-3 0-3 0-3 5-10 % Bitumen 5.5-7.0 4.1-5.2 4.0-5.1
N/A 2.4 PAVING MATERIALS A. General: Use locally available materials and gradations, which exhibit a satisfactory record of previous installations. B. Mineral Filler: Limestone dust,
portland cement, or other inert material complying with State Department of Transportation Standard Specifications. C. Asphalt Cement: Use Performance Grade liquid asphalt’s in accordance
with State Department of Transportation Standard Specifications. D. Tack Coat: ASTM D977, emulsified asphalt or ASTM D2397, cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, diluted in water,
of suitable grade and consistency for application. E. Fabric: As specified on the Drawings. F. Protective Membrane System: Nonwoven polypropylene fabric and asphalt cement complying
with AASHTO M-288-00. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products: 1. Petromat No. 4598; Amoco Fabrics and Fibers Company, Austell, Georgia. 2. Mirafi
FG; TC Mirafi, Norcross, Georgia. 3. 461 Pavedry; SI Geosolutions, Chattanooga, Tennessee. G. Pavement Sealers
211118.00 321216-4 ASPHALT PAVING 1. Emulsified-Asphalt Slurry: ASTM D 977-03 and ASTM D 2397-02, consisting of polymer modified emulsified-asphalt, fine aggregates and mineral fillers.
No Coal Tar based products will be acceptable. a. Basis-of-Design: Asphalt emulsion pavement sealer “Jennite AE” as manufactured by Neyra Industries, Inc., Cincinnati, Ohio. Other acceptable
Emulsified-Asphalt products include “MasterSeal (PMM) as manufactured by Sealmaster, “Guardian AE” as manufactured by GemSeal Pavement Products, Chicago , Il., “Brewer AEH/S” as manufactured
by The Brewer Company, Milford,Oh. b. Mineral Aggregate: Shall be clean, dry silica sand, free from foreign matter. No more than 2 percent retained on 30 mesh or coarser; no more than
10 percent passing 140 mesh, and no more than .3 percent passing 200 mesh. c. Water: If recommended by manufacturer shall be incorporated at recommended rates but shall not exceed 10
percent of the volume. .AUXILIARY MATERIALS H. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by the EPA. Provide in granular, liquid, or wettable powder form. I. Paving
Geotextile: AASHTO M 288, nonwoven polypropylene; resistant to chemical attack, rot, and mildew; and specifically designed for paving applications. J. Joint Sealant: ASTM D 6690 or AASHTO
M 324, Type II or III, hot-applied, single-component, polymer-modified bituminous sealant. K. Pavement-Marking Paint: Alkyd-resin type, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying
with AASHTO M 248, Type N or Type F; colors complying with FS TT-P-1952. 1. Color: As indicated. L. Accessibility Pavement-Marking Paint: Latex, waterborne emulsion, lead and chromate
free, ready mixed, complying with FS TT-P-1952, Type II, with drying time of less than 45 minutes. 1. Color: Blue. 2.5 MIXES A. All mix design parameters shall be measured in accordance
and comply with State Department of Transportation Standard Specifications 1. VMA% 15 2. Air Voids % 3.5 3. Fines/Binder Ratio 1.2 4. Fine Aggregate Angularity 3 5. Flow (mm) 2.0 – 4.0
6. L.A. Abrasion Loss 40 7. Soft Particle Max. 8 8. Stability Min. 4.0 kN 2.6 RECYCLED ASPHALT PAVEMENT A. Recycled asphalt pavement may be used in bituminous base or bituminous binder,
provided the recycled asphalt does not contain objectionable material or materials that are not compatible with paints, coatings or other pavement markings, and do not exceed DOT recommended
percentages. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to begin paving.
211118.00 321216-5 ASPHALT PAVING B. Proof-roll subgrade below pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll
wet or saturated subgrades. 1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in direction perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5
km/h). 2. Proof roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons. 3. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting,
as determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed. C. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 COLD MILLING
A. Clean existing pavement surface of loose and deleterious material immediately before cold milling. Remove existing asphalt pavement by cold milling to grades and cross sections indicated.
1. Mill to a depth of 1-1/2 inches. 2. Mill to a uniform finished surface free of excessive gouges, grooves, and ridges. 3. Control rate of milling to prevent tearing of existing asphalt
course. 4. Repair or replace curbs, manholes, and other construction damaged during cold milling. 5. Excavate and trim unbound-aggregate base course, if encountered, and keep material
separate from milled hot-mix asphalt. 6. Transport milled hot-mix asphalt to asphalt recycling facility. 7. Keep milled pavement surface free of loose material and dust. 3.3 PATCHING
A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending min.12 inches into
adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Remove excavated material. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new subgrade.
B. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to vertical surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix asphalt paving at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. 1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed
before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces. C. Patching:
Fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix for full thickness of patch and, while still hot, compact flush with adjacent surface. D. Patching: Partially fill excavated pavements
with hot-mix asphalt base mix and, while still hot, compact. Cover asphalt base course with compacted, hot-mix surface layer finished flush with adjacent surfaces. 3.4 REPAIRS A. Leveling
Course: Install and compact leveling course consisting of hot-mix asphalt surface course to level sags and fill depressions deeper than 1 inch in existing pavements. 1. Install leveling
wedges in compacted lifts not exceeding 3 inches thick. B. Crack and Joint Filling: Remove existing joint filler material from cracks or joints to a depth of 1/4 inch. 1. Clean cracks
and joints in existing hot-mix asphalt pavement. 2. Use emulsified-asphalt slurry to seal cracks and joints less than 1/4 inch wide. Fill flush with surface of existing pavement and
remove excess. 3. Use hot-applied joint sealant to seal cracks and joints more than 1/4 inch wide. Fill flush with surface of existing pavement and remove excess.
211118.00 321216-6 ASPHALT PAVING 3.5 INSTALLATION OF COMPACTED AGGREGATE BASE A. The entire area to receive compacted aggregate shall be proof rolled with a tandem dump truck loaded
with approximately 15 tons. The proof rolling shall be executed prior to installing the compacted aggregate. All soft and yielding areas shall be repaired. 1. The acceptable observed
subgrade deflection shall be 1/2 inch or less measured at the rear tire. B. Compacted aggregate shall be installed immediately after acceptance of the subgrade proof roll operation by
the soils engineer and Architect. 1. The subgrade shall be repaired and the proof roll operation repeated in the event the approved subgrade is disturbed by construction traffic, rain
or other circumstance prior to placing the compacted aggregate. 2. The proof roll operation shall be repeated in the event the subgrade is left exposed for 3 work days or more prior
to placing the compacted aggregate. C. Place the aggregate material in accordance with applicable sections sections of the State Department of Transportation Standard Specifications
and as hereinafter specified. D. Aggregate material shall be compacted to thickness indicated on the Drawings. Each lift shall be compacted with approved rollers to no less than 100
percent of the maximum dry density as determined by Method C of AASHTO T99, as modified in Article 2.03.24. E. All compacted aggregates for all bituminous pavements shall be installed
in 2 lifts. F. Grade Control: During construction maintain lines and grades, including crown and cross-slope of compacted aggregate course. G. Shoulders: Where curbs are not indicated,
place shoulders along edges of aggregate subbase course to prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders of acceptable aggregate materials, placed in such quantity to compact to thickness
of each aggregate base course layer. Compact and roll at least a 12 inch width of shoulder simultaneously with compacting and rolling of each layer of aggregate subbase course. 3.6 SURFACE
PREPARATION A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive
paving. B. Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates and written application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared subgrade or surface of compactedaggregate
base before applying paving materials. 1. Mix herbicide with prime
coat if formulated by manufacturer for that purpose. C. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. 1. Allow tack coat to cure
undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings. Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces. 3.7
PAVING GEOTEXTILE INSTALLATION (IF REQUIRED) A. Apply tack coat uniformly to existing pavement surfaces at a rate of 0.20 to 0.30 gal./sq. yd. B. Place paving geotextile promptly according
to manufacturer's written instructions. instructions. Broom or roll geotextile smooth and free of wrinkles and folds. Overlap longitudinal joints 4 inches and transverse joints 6 inches.
1. Protect paving geotextile from traffic and other damage and place hot-mix asphalt paving overlay the same day.
211118.00 321216-7 ASPHALT PAVING 3.8 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place asphalt mix by hand to areas
inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted. 1. Place hot-mix asphalt base
course in number of lifts and thicknesses indicated. 2. Place hot-mix asphalt surface course in single lift. 3. Spread HMA base mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F and HMA Surface
Mix at a minimum temperature of 280 deg F. 4. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side of one-way slopes unless otherwise indicated. 5. Regulate
paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and tears in asphalt-paving mat. B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet wide unless infill
edge strips of a lesser width are required. 1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips. Complete a section
of asphalt base course before placing asphalt surface course. C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to remove excess material
forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface. D. Special Conditions 1. Fenced areas: All fence fabric
shall be removed from poles prior to paving fenced areas. 2. The paving machine shall not be allowed to track over or back track over any finished course of freshly placed bituminous
mixture while the mixture is still hot or warm. Tracking the paving machine over freshly placed bituminous courses shall render that section of pavement unacceptable. All unacceptable
pavements shall be removed and replaced with no additional payment. 3.9 JOINTS A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints free
of depressions, with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphalt course. 1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints. 2. Offset longitudinal joints,
in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches. 3. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 24 inches. 4. Construct transverse joints at each point where paver ends
a day's work and resumes work at a subsequent time. Construct these joints using either "bulkhead" or "papered" method according to AI MS-22, for both "Ending a Lane" and "Resumption
of Paving Operations." 5. Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. 6. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent
of specified course density. 3.10 COMPACTION A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving
with hot, hand tampers or with vibratory-plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers. 1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F. B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete
breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Correct
laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements.
211118.00 321216-8 ASPHALT PAVING C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hotmix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified
density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density: 1. Average Density: 96 percent of reference laboratory density according
to ASTM D 6927 or AASHTO T 245, but not less than 94 percent nor greater than 100 percent. D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt
is still warm. E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly.
F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface
smoothness. G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened. H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until
mixture has cooled enough not to become marked. 3.11 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Pavement Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances:
1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. B. Pavement Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following
tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas: 1. Base Course: 1/4 inch. 2. Surface Course: 3/16 inch. 3. Crowned
Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown. Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch. 3.12 SURFACE TREATMENTS A. Fog Seals: Apply fog seal
in minimum 2 coats at a total minimum rate of 0.35 gal./sq. yd. on asphalt pavement and allow to cure. With fine sand, lightly dust areas receiving excess fog seal. B. Slurry Seals:
Apply slurry coat in a a uniform thickness according to ASTM D 3910 at the total rate of 0.35 gal /sq.yd. and allow to cure. 1. Roll slurry seal to remove ridges and provide a uniform,
smooth surface. C. Application must be made when ambient temperature and pavement temperatures are above 50 degrees and no temperature expected below 50 degrees anticipated for 48 hours.
D. New asphalt should be allowed to cure for a minimum of 30 days prior to application. 3.13 PAVEMENT MARKING A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement
have been verified with Architect. B. Allow paving to age for 30 days before starting pavement marking. C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.
211118.00 321216-9 ASPHALT PAVING D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions indicated, with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's
recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils. 1. Broadcast glass beads uniformly into wet pavement markings at a rate of 6 lb/gal. 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined
according to ASTM D 3549. 1. Compacted thickness shall not be less than indicated. C. Surface Smoothness: Test finished surface of each asphalt concrete course for smoothness, using
a 10-foot straightedge applied parallel with, and at right angles to, centerline of paved area. Surfaces will not be accepted if exceeding the following tolerances for smoothness: 1.
Binder Course: 1/4 inch. 2. Surface Course: 3/16 inch. 3. Check surface areas at intervals as directed by the Architect. D. Flood Test 1. Schedule: After the pavement is complete, perform
a flood test in the presence of the Architect. 2. Method: Perform the flooding by use of water tank truck or available water. 3. If depressions exist where water is ponding to a depth
of more than 1/8 inch, fill with fresh hot asphalt concrete to provide proper drainage. Feather and smooth the edges of fill so that the joint to original surface is not visible. E.
Test uncompacted asphalt concrete mix and report the following: 1. Sampling: AASHTO T168 (ASTM D979). 2. Asphalt Cement Content: AASHTO T164 (ASTM D2172). 3. Perform at least one initial
test for paving, unless otherwise specified or directed. F. In-Place Density: Testing agency will take samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and compacted pavement according to ASTM
D 979 or AASHTO T 168. 1. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results from four samples of hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared
according to ASTM D 2041, and compacted according to job-mix specifications. 2. In-place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samples according to ASTM D
1188 or ASTM D 2726. a. One core sample will be taken for every 500 sq. yd. or less of installed pavement, with no fewer than 3 cores taken. b. Field density of in-place compacted pavement
may also be determined by nuclear method according to ASTM D 2950 and correlated with ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726. G. Replace and compact hot-mix asphalt where core tests were taken.
H. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. 3.15 FINAL ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
FOR HEAVY AND STANDARD DUTY PAVING A. Final acceptance for heavy duty and standard duty paving shall be based on asphalt coring within the test area limits as shown on the Drawings.
Arrange for and execute core sampling by an independent testing agency. The cost of this testing shall be included in the bid by Contractor. B. Core Requirements 1. Cores shall be a
minimum of 2 inches in diameter and 24 inches in depth.
211118.00 321216-10 ASPHALT PAVING 2. Cores shall be taken at a rate of 1 core every 3000 sq.yds. for each pavement type in each test area. In any case, no less than 4 cores shall be
taken in each test area for each type of pavement. 3. The location of the cores shall be at painted lines and as determined by the Engineer and marked on the Drawings after the surface
course has been constructed. 4. The total thickness of the surface plus the binder course for each core shall be determined. The total thickness of the compacted aggregate base for each
core shall be measured and recorded. 5. The average thickness of each aggregate course for each pavement type shall be determined and recorded for each test area. The average thickness
of the surface course plus the binder course shall be determined and recorded for each test area. 6. Voids created as a result of the coring shall be filled using concrete, mortar or
other bituminous material as directed. C. Acceptance Criteria 1. The thickness of each asphalt course as shown on the Drawings is the compacted minimum not an average. If the average
thickness of any asphalt or aggregate course is less than that shown on the Drawings, then the entire test area shall be resurfaced using a bituminous surface mixture with appropriate
aggregate size to obtain 90 pound per square yard yield without breaking or scratching the aggregate. 2. If the average thickness of the surface plus the binder or the average thickness
of the compacted aggregate equals or exceeds the required thickness and if any course in any individual core is less than that shown on the Drawings then, at the discretion of the Engineer,
that portion of the test area shall be resurfaced using 90 pound per square yard bituminous surface. Areas requiring resurfacing due to inadequate core samples shall not be less than
2400 square feet. 3. No asphalt materials shall be removed to correct insufficient compacted aggregate once the binder or surface has been placed. The only acceptable corrective measure
for insufficient compacted aggregate is additional bituminous material. Substantially insufficient compacted aggregate shall be corrected by additional resurface work constructed at
a rate of 1 compacted inch of asphalt for every 2 inches of insufficient aggregate. 4. No additional payment will be made for additional construction necessary due to insufficient cores.
D. Acceptance Submittals 1. No bituminous pavements will be accepted until it has been demonstrated by the Contractor that the pavements are in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications.
The Contractor shall submit the following: a. Pavement coring report with a drawing illustrating the location of each core taken, asphalt and aggregate thicknesses and subgrade moisture
content. b. Modified proctor maximum dry density soil data for each soil type used as subgrade within the pavement. The soils data sheet(s) shall indicate which asphalt core or cores
the soil corresponds to. c. Job mix formula for each type of bituminous mixture. The job mix formula shall contain, at minimum, the aggregate gradation, percent bitumen, source and type
of bitumen and the laboratory maximum compacted density for the mixture. d. In-place asphalt compaction density test results illustrating the corresponding core to which the test applies.
E. Variation from Job Mix Formula or Required Gradations: 1. Compliance Criteria a. Paving work shall be considered in compliance if the gradations and % bitumen noted in the table are
within the specified ranges. No contract adjustments shall be made for all work that is in compliance with these specifications. 2. Substantial Compliance Criteria a. Paving work shall
be considered within substantial compliance if the gradations and percent bitumen noted in the table are within plus or minus 0.20 b. A deduct contract adjustment shall be made at the
rate of $0.50 per square yard for each square yard of paving that varies from the Job Mix Formula or the Required Gradations.
211118.00 321216-11 ASPHALT PAVING 3. Non-Compliance: Paving work shall be considered non-compliant if the gradations and percent bitumen deviate greater than 0.20 of the values in the
table. 3.16 DISPOSAL A. Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. Do not
allow milled materials to accumulate on-site. END OF SECTION 321216
211118.00 321313-1 CONCRETE PAVING SECTION 321313 -CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes exterior cement concrete pavement for the following: 1. Misc. concrete
slabs 2. Curbs 3. Walkways. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete, Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete" for general building applications
of concrete. 2. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for subgrade preparation, grading, and subbase course. 3. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants" for joint sealants of
joints in concrete pavement and at isolation joints of concrete pavement with adjacent construction. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination
with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, and ground granulated blast-furnace slag. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Product
Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. 2. Design Mixtures: For each concrete pavement mixture. Include alternate mixture designs when characteristics of
materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 3. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and testing agency. 4. Field quality-control
test reports. 5. Minutes of preinstallation conference. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products who complies with ASTM C 94/C
94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated,
as documented according to ASTM E 548. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-01 or an equivalent
certification program. C. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. D. Concrete Testing
Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.
211118.00 321313-2 CONCRETE PAVING E. Concrete ramps and curbs shall be provided to conform to the Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) and State and Local
Regulations. These requirements supersede Technical Specifications in this Section. 1. Detectable warnings shall conform to ADAAG, Articles 4.7.7 and 4.29. F. Preinstallation Conference:
Conduct conference at project site. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete pavement mixture design and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials and concrete
pavement construction practices. Require representatives, including the following, of each entity directly concerned with concrete pavement, to attend conference. a. Contractor's superintendent.
b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready-mix concrete producer. d. Concrete pavement subcontractor. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Steel
Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement, when applicable. B. Collect unused reinforcing
steel and place in designated area for recycling. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance
with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. B. Products
of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional qualities of the specified product. Requests for A/E's
approval must be accompanied by the Substitution Request Form” and complete technical data for evaluation. All materials for evaluation must be received by the Project Manager and Specification
Department at least 10 days prior to bid due date. Additional approved manufacturers will be issued by Addendum. 2.2 FORMS A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or
other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces. 1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves with a radius 100 feet or less. B.
Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete
surfaces. 2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.
211118.00 321313-3 CONCRETE PAVING B. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497, flat sheet. C. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60; deformed. D. Galvanized Reinforcing
Bars: ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class II zinc coated, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and bending; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 deformed bars. E. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M;
with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed bars; assembled with clips. F. Plain Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn. G. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 496. H. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel
bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. I. Tie Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. J. Hook Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A,
internally and externally threaded. Design hook-bolt joint assembly to hold coupling against pavement form and in position during concreting operations, and to permit removal without
damage to concrete or hook bolt. K. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and
dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete,
and as follows: 1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs. L. Zinc Repair Material: ASTM A 780. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use one of the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source throughout the Project: a. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or III,gray
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4S coarse aggregate, uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years'
satisfactory service in similar pavement applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials. 1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch nominal. 2.
Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M. D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. E. Chemical Admixtures: Provide
admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material. 1.
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range,
Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C
1017/C 1017M, Type II.
211118.00 321313-4 CONCRETE PAVING 2.5 CURING MATERIALS A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. dry. B.
Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. C. Water: Potable. D. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured
for application to fresh concrete. 1. Products: a. Axim Concrete Technologies; Cimfilm. b. Burke by Edeco; BurkeFilm. c. ChemMasters; Spray-Film. d. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing
Co., Inc.; Aquafilm. e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film. f. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Eucobar. g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Vapor Aid. h. Lambert Corporation; Lambco Skin.
i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-Con. j. MBT Protection and Repair, ChemRex Inc.; Confilm. k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Sealtight Evapre. l. Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold. m. Nox-Crete
Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Monofilm. n. Sika Corporation, Inc.; SikaFilm. o. Symons Corporation; Finishing Aid. p. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex EnvioAssist. E. Clear Waterborne
Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B. 1. Products: a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Curing Compound #2 DR WB. b. Burke by Edoko; Aqua Resin Cure. c. ChemMasters;
Safe-Cure Clear. d. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.; W.B. Resin Cure. e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W). f. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Kurez
DR VOX. g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 420. h. Lambert Corporation; Aqua Kure-Clear. i. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R. j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100 Clear. k. Nox-Crete
Products Group, Kinsman Corporation; Resin Cure E. l. Symons Corporation; Resi-Chem Clear. m. Tamms Industries Inc.; Horncure WB 30. n. Unitex; Hydro Cure 309. o. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.;
Certi-Vex Enviocure 100. 2.6 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion-and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding
cork. B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. C. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid
curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to requirements, and as follows: 1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened
or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.
211118.00 321313-5 CONCRETE PAVING D. Penetrating Anti-Spalling Sealer: Sealer shall be a siloxane-based compound which has a 92 percent chloride ion screen and a repellency factor of
92 percent when tested in accordance with NCHRP #244, Test Method. In addition, sealer-treated concrete must exhibit no scaling when exposed to 125 cycles of freezing and thawing. System
shall conform to requirements with ASTM C957-81. Tests must be by an independent testing laboratory. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following: a. Euco-Guard Vox (VOC Compliant); Euclid Chemical Co. b. Environseal; Hydrozo. c. Saltguard WB; PROSOCO, Inc. d. Aquapel Plus; L & M Construction Chemical Co. 2.7 PAVEMENT
MARKINGS A. Pavement-Marking Paint: Alkyd-resin type, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying with FS TT-P-115, Type II or AASHTO M 248, Type N or F. 1. Color: White,Yellow. B.
Accessibility Pavement-Marking Paint: Latex, waterborne emulsion, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying with FS TT-P-1952, with drying time of less than 45 minutes. 1. Color:
Blue. 2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial
mixes or field experience. 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete mixture designs for the trial batch method. B. Proportion mixtures
to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): Refer to Concrete Schedule. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point
of Placement: Refer to Concrete Schedule. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch. C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-weight
concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows: 1. Air Content: 6 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent for 1-inch nominal maximum aggregate size. D. Limit water-soluble,
chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement. E. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing
admixture, high-range, water-reducing admixture, high-range, waterreducing and retarding admixture, plasticizing and retarding admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.
2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. F. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by
weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement according to ACI 301 requirements as follows: 1. Fly Ash or Pozzolan: 25 percent. 2.9 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete,
unless otherwise noted: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work.
211118.00 321313-6 CONCRETE PAVING 1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above
90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for dimensional,
grading, and elevation tolerances. B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding.
1. Completely proof-roll subbase in one direction and repeat in perpendicular direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph. 2. Proof-roll with a loaded 10-wheel tandem-axle dump truck
weighing not less than 15 tons. 3. Subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2 inch require correction according to requirements in Division 31 Section
"Earth Moving." C. Proceed with concrete pavement operations only after nonconforming conditions have been corrected and subgrade is ready to receive pavement. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove
loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete. 3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate
screed guides for pavement to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete
placement. B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage. 3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual
of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials. C. Arrange,
space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement. D. Install welded wire reinforcement
in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.
E. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace
units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch overlap of adjacent mats. 3.5 JOINTS A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings
true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated. 1. When joining existing pavement,
place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise indicated.
211118.00 321313-7 CONCRETE PAVING B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at locations where pavement operations are stopped for
more than one-half hour unless pavement terminates at isolation joints. 1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement
through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide tie bars at sides of pavement strips where indicated. 3. Keyed Joints: Provide preformed keyway-section forms
or bulkhead forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 4. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where
indicated. Lubricate or asphalt-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips
abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, objects, and where indicated. 1. Locate expansion joints at intervals not to exceed 50
feet or as noted on plans. 2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 3. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface if joint
sealant is indicated. 4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated. 5. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than
one length is required, lace or clip joint-filler sections together. 6. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap.
Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint. D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated.
Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving
and finishing each edge of joint with grooving tool to a 3/8-inch radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes to provide a “tooled and traced” or “window
pane” appearance, unless otherwise noted. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Do not saw cut joints. E. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and
joints in concrete after initial floating with an edging tool to a 3/8-inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces.
3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades
to permit installation of their work. B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces. C. Moisten
subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and
alignment. D. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. F. Do not
add water to fresh concrete after testing. G. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators
to move concrete into place.
211118.00 321313-8 CONCRETE PAVING H. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping. 1. Consolidate concrete
along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels
for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint devices. I. Screed pavement surfaces with a straightedge and strike
off. J. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not
further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments. K. Curbs and Gutters: When automatic machine placement is used for curb and gutter
placement, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing
as specified for formed concrete. If results are not approved, remove and replace with formed concrete. L. When adjoining pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate
equipment on concrete until pavement has attained 85 percent of its 28-day compressive strength. M. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work
from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg
F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement. 2. Do not use
frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise
specified and approved in mix designs. N. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist: 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete
temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount
of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air
temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing
water, soft spots, or dry areas. 3.7 FLOAT FINISHING A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations. B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation
when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small
or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture. 1. Medium-to-Fine-Textured
Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float-finished concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture. 3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.
211118.00 321313-9 CONCRETE PAVING B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection. C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy
conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding,
and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. E. Curing
Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing compound, or a combination of these as follows: 1. Moist Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for
not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces
and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest
practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material
and waterproof tape. 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to
heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. F. Apply anti-spalling sealer per Manufacturer’s installation
instructions and recommendations. 3.9 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES A. Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and as follows: 1. Elevation: 1/4 inch. 2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch. 3.
Surface: Gap below 10-foot-long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch. 4. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Tie Bars and Dowels: 1 inch. 5. Vertical Alignment of Tie Bars and
Dowels: 1/4 inch. 6. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge: 1/2 inch. 7. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Pavement Edge:
Length of dowel 1/4 inch per 12 inches. 8. Joint Spacing: 3 inches. 9. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. 10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus. 3.10 PAVEMENT MARKING
A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Architect. B. Allow concrete pavement to cure for 28 days and be dry before starting
pavement marking. C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust. D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings of dimensions indicated with
uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils.
211118.00 321313-10 CONCRETE PAVING 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections
and prepare test reports. B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:
1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least 1 composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer
than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform additional tests when
concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete
mix. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5. Compression
Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of three standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test
1 specimen at 7 days and 2 specimens at 28 days. a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from 2 specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested
at 28 days. C. Strength of each concrete mix will be satisfactory if average of any 3 consecutive compressivestrength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strengt
h test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within
48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency,
location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-and
28-day tests. E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection
of concrete. F. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths,
or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. G. Remove and replace concrete pavement where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.
H. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.12 REPAIRS AND
PROTECTION A. Remove and replace concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section. B. Drill test cores, where directed
by Architect, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement
with epoxy adhesive.
211118.00 321313-11 CONCRETE PAVING C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain
pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. D. Maintain concrete pavement free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign
material. Sweep concrete pavement not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections. END OF SECTION 321313
211118.00 321373-1 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS SECTION 321373 -CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,
including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Expansion and contraction
joints within cement concrete pavement. 2. Joints between cement concrete and asphalt pavement. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 32 Section "Asphalt Paving" for
constructing joints between concrete and asphalt pavement. 2. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving" for constructing joints in concrete pavement. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Samples for Verification:
For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint-sealant samples in 1/2-inch-wide joints formed between two 6-inch-long strips of material matching the appearance of
exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. B. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing
time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage
due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by jointsealant manufacturer. 2. When joint substrates are wet or covered with frost. 3. Where joint
widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from
joint substrates. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles.
211118.00 321373-2 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS B. Products of other manufacturers will be considered for acceptance provided they equal or exceed the material requirements and functional
qualities of the specified product. Requests for A/E's approval must be accompanied by the Substitution Request Form” and complete technical data for evaluation. All materials for evaluation
must be received by the Project Manager and Specification Department at least 10 days prior to bid due date. Additional approved manufacturers will be issued by Addendum. 2.2 MATERIALS,
GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service
and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's
full range. 2.3 COLD-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS A. Multicomponent Sealant for Concrete: Concrete: Pourable, chemically curing elastomeric formulation complying with the following requirements
for formulation and with ASTM C 920 for type, grade, class, and uses indicated, provide one of the following: 1. Urethane Formulation: Type M; Grade P; Class 25; Uses T, M, and, as applicable
to joint substrates indicated, O. a. Products: 1) Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-200. 2) Sonneborn Building Products, Inc., Sonolastic SL2. 3) Tremco Inc., Vullcem 245. 4) Sika Corp.,
Sikaflex 2C SL. B. Single-Component Urethane Sealant for Concrete: Single-component, pourable, coal-tarmodified, urethane formulation complying with ASTM C 920 for Type S; Grade P; Class
25; Uses T, M, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. 1. Products: a. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc.; Sonolastic SL-1. b. Pecora Corp.; NR-201 Urexpan. c. Tremco Inc.;
Vulkem 45. d. Sika Corp.; Sikaflex ICSL. C. Type NS Silicone Sealant for Concrete: Single-component, low-modulus, neutral-curing, nonsag silicone sealant complying with ASTM D 5893 for
Type NS. 1. Products: a. Crafco Inc.; RoadSaver Silicone. b. Dow Corning Corporation; 888. D. Type SL Silicone Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt: Single-component, low-modulus, neutralcuring,
self-leveling silicone sealant complying with ASTM D 5893 for Type SL. 1. Products: a. Crafco Inc.; RoadSaver Silicone SL. b. Dow Corning Corporation; 890-SL. E. Multicomponent Low-Modulus
Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt: Proprietary formulation consisting of reactive petropolymer and activator components producing a pourable, selfleveling sealant. 1. Products: a. Meadows,
W. R., Inc.; Sof-Seal. 2.4 HOT-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant for Concrete: Single-component formulation complying with ASTM D 3406.
211118.00 321373-3 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS 1. Products: a. Crafco Inc.; Superseal 444/777. b. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Poly-Jet 3406. B. Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt: Single-component
formulation complying with ASTM D 3405. 1. Products: a. Koch Materials Company; Product No. 9005. b. Koch Materials Company; Product No. 9030. c. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Sealtight Hi-Spec.
2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS A. General: Provide joint-sealant backer materials that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers;
and are approved for applications indicated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Round Backer Rods for Cold-and Hot-Applied Sealants: ASTM
D 5249, Type 1, of diameter and density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant. 2.6 PRIMERS A. Primers: Product recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer
where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions
affecting jointsealant performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints
immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended
in writing by jointsealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written
instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant
manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations
in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install backer materials of type indicated to support sealants during
application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do
not leave gaps between ends of backer materials. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear backer materials.
211118.00 321373-4 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS 3. Remove absorbent backer materials that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D. Install
sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement
capability. E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form
smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces
adjacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. F. Provide joint configuration
to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated. G. Provide recessed joint configuration for silicone sealants of recess depth and at locations
indicated. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint
sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting
from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs,
cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately and replace with joint sealant so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work.
END OF SECTION 321373
211118.00 329200-1 TURF AND GRASSES SECTION 329200 -TURF AND GRASSES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fine grading of topsoil installed under Division 31 “earth moving” 2. Seeding
of any disturbed lawn areas. 3. Lawn renovation. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for topsoil stripping and stockpiling and for soil erosion and sedimentation
control that may affect the Work of this Section. 2. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavation, filling and backfilling, topsoil installation and rough grading. 1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. B. Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7, a fertile, friable loam with a range of 2 percent to 20 percent organic
material content; free of stones 1/2 inch or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. C. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after
completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately beneath topsoil. D. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack
of organic matter and soil organisms. E. Lawn Maintenance: All materials and operations necessary to establish and maintain a healthy stand of turf following initial seeding operations.
Including but not limited to, mowing, fertilization, watering and treatment for weeds, fungus and disease as needed. Maintenance remains responsibility of Contractor until Project closeout
or a minimum of one full growing season. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 2. Certification of Grass Seed:
From seed vendor for each grass-seed monostand or mixture stating the botanical and common name and percentage by weight of each species and variety, and percentage of purity, germination,
and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of packaging. 3. Qualification Data: For qualified landscape Installer. 4. Product Certificates: For soil amendments and fertilizers
from manufacturer. 5. Material Test Reports: For existing surface soil and imported topsoil. 6. Planting Schedule: Indicating anticipated planting dates for each type of planting.
211118.00 329200-2 TURF AND GRASSES 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful lawn establishment. The submitting
bidders shall be and have been actively engaged in seeding
operations and specifically prairie seeding for a minimum of 4 years and shall provide proof of 5 of more successful prairie seed installations. The contractor performing the prairie
seeding shall also have experience and access to a fluffy seed drill designed for prairie installations. 1. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced
full-time supervisor on Project site when planting is in progress. B. Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent laboratory, recognized by the State Department of Agriculture,
with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed. C. Topsoil Analysis: Furnish soil analysis by a qualified
soil-testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; action exchange capacity; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant-nutrient
content of topsoil. 1. Report suitability of topsoil for lawn growth. State-recommended quantities of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce
satisfactory topsoil for establishment of lawns. D. Seeds: Packages of seed shall bear official State or Federal stamps or certificates indicating type, quality, and content of seed
packages. Deliver packages unopened. Do not open until observed by Architect/Engineer. E. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Comply with all Federal and State laws governing fertilizers.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Seed: Deliver seed in original sealed, labeled, and undamaged containers. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Contractor shall notify A/E , in writing, when
Work on this Project has progressed sufficiently to commence work of seeding. Thereafter, seeding operations shall be conducted under favorable weather conditions during next season
or seasons, which are normal for such work as determined by accepted practice in locality of Project. At option and on full responsibility of Contractor, seeding operations may be conducted
under unseasonable conditions without additional compensation. 1.8 SCHEDULING A. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of following periods. Coordinate planting periods with maintenance
periods to provide required maintenance from date of seeding. 1. Spring Planting: May 1, beginning date. 2. Fall Planting: October 1, ending date. 3. Summer Planting: June 15 through
September 1, only when water is available. B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit. 1.9 WARRANTY AND REPLACEMENT A.
Warranty: Lawns shall be warranted for minimum duration of one full year after seeding and sodding, and shall be alive and in satisfactory growth at end of warranty period.
211118.00 329200-3 TURF AND GRASSES B. Replacement: At end of warranty period, A/E upon written notice requesting such inspection, submitted by Contractor at least 10 days before anticipated
date, will make observation. If lawns do not show a healthy, uniform stand of grass, those areas shall be reseeded or resodded as soon as conditions permit, but during spring or fall
seeding periods. C. Architect/Engineer will observe seeded areas within one-year warranty. Seeded or sodded areas requiring replacement during warranty period shall be warranted one
additional full year from date of reseeding. D. Owner's Responsibility: If an area of seeding during warranty and replacement period is found to be damaged or destroyed due to vandalism,
malicious mischief, vehicle ruts and tracks, or acts of God such as flooding, storm debris, then Owner will have responsibility of replacing those lawn areas without cost or responsibility
to Contractor. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SEED A. Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with AOSA's "Journal of Seed Technology; Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination
tolerances. B. Lawn Grass Seed: Dealer shall mix and warrant in accordance with the following: 50 percent of mixture shall contain 4 of following Kentucky Bluegrass varieties in equal
proportions: Nuglade, Award, Briliant, America, Unique, Apollo, Shamrock, Showase, Absolute, NJ-GD, SR-2109, Bartitia, Livingstton, ASP 200, Midnight, Eclipse, Nu Star, Limosine, Rambo,
Coventry, and NJ-1190. 50 percent of mixture shall contain 2 of following perennial ryegrass varieties in equal proportions. Brightstar II, Calypso II, Premier II, Monterey, Accent,
Panther, LRF-94-C8, Sonata, Top Hat, CIS-MBH, Caddieshack, Laredo, Repell III, Brightstar, Wind Dance, Imagine, SR4400, Omni, and RS. No substitutions will be accepted unless identical
to specified mix and approved by Architect prior to bidding. Grass seed shall be 95 percent pure and free of weeds and other harmful plants. It shall have a sufficient percentage of
germination to provide a good stand of lawn within requirements of these Specifications, approximately 85 to 87 percent minimum. 2.2 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. General: Use any of
the following soil amendments as recommended by “topsoil analysis” to produce topsoil suitable for lawn growth. 1. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural limestone containing a minimum of 80
percent calcium carbonate equivalent and as follows: a. Class: T, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve and a minimum of 75 percent passing through No. 60
(0.25-mm) sieve. b. Provide lime in form of dolomitic limestone. 2. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through
No. 6 (3.35-mm) sieve and a maximum of 10 percent passing through No. 40 (0.425-mm) sieve. 3. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10
percent sulfur. 4. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated. 5. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade. 6. Agricultural Gypsum: Finely ground, containing a minimum
of 90 percent calcium sulfate. 7. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, free of toxic materials. 8. Diatomaceous Earth: Calcined, diatomaceous earth, 90 percent silica, with
approximately 140 percent water absorption capacity by weight.
211118.00 329200-4 TURF AND GRASSES 9. Zeolites: Mineral clinoptilolite with at least 60 percent water absorption by weight. 2.3 FERTILIZER A. Fertilizer: Commercial fertilizer shall
be used for initial preparation and shall conform to applicable state fertilizer laws. Use of organic lawn fertilizer shall be used for surface application after grass is up. Fertilizer
shall be uniform in composition, dry and free flowing, and shall be delivered to site in original, unopened containers, each bearing manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. Fertilizer, which
becomes caked or otherwise damaged, making it unsuitable for use, will not be acceptable. Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast and slow release
nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium.` 2.4 MULCHES 1. Wood Fiber Mulch: Shall not contain growth or germination
– inhibiting factors and shall be dyed an appropriate color to facilitate placement during application. Mulch shall be Weyerhauser “Silva-Fiber” or equal, available from American Excelsior
Corporation, Chicago, Illinois. 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings from damage caused by planting
operations. 1. Protect adjacent and adjoining areas from hydroseeding and hydromulching overspray. 2. Protect grade stakes set by others until directed to remove them. 3. Examine finish
grade for [roper elevation and notify the Architect/Engineer of any areas detrimental to successful development of a lawn. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected and are acceptable 3.2 LAWN PREPARATION A. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade to within
plus or minus 1/2 inch of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit finish grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate
future. B. Newly Graded and areas of temporary seeding: Till topsoil to a minimum depth of 4 inches. Remove stones larger than 1/2 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and
other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. Apply fertilizer and soil amendments directly to topsoil before tilling, per specifications. 2. Apply soil
amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend into topsoil mix. a. Two pounds of 15-20-10 formula commercial starter fertilizer per cu. Yd. shall be thoroughly mixed with
the topsoil or not less than 10 lbs. per 1000 sq. ft. of lawn surface, whichever is the greater. b. Lime shall be applied at the rate of 50 lbs. per 1000 sq. ft. or as indicated by soil
tests to areas being prepared for planting. Mix lime with dry soil before mixing fertilizer. C. Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow
surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil. D. Before planting, restore areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading. 3.3 SEEDING A. Sow lawn seed mix with
spreader or brillion seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph. Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles
to each other. 1. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged.
211118.00 329200-5 TURF AND GRASSES 2. Do not seed against existing trees. Limit extent of seed to outside edge of planting saucer. B. Sow lawn seed mix at a total rate of 8 lb/1000
sq. ft. Sow lawn seed mix in athletic field areas 1 ½ the standard rate or 12 lb/1000 sq. ft. C. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch of soil, roll with a 200 lb roller, and water with
fine spray. D. Protect seeded areas with slopes exceeding 1:5 with erosion-control blankets. HYDROMULCHING E. Hydromulching: Mix specified wood fiber mulch and tackifier in water, using
equipment specifically designed for hydro mulch application. Continue mixing until uniformly blended into homogeneous slurry suitable for hydraulic application. F. Mulch: Hydromulch
seeded areas at a min. rate of 1800 pounds per acre. Use Bowie hydromulcher or equal to apply mulch, unless otherwise noted. Hydromulch shall also be applied over erosion control blankets.
“Hydroseeding” (combination of mulch, seed and fertilizer) will NOT be allowed. Hydromulching shall shall be a separate operation from seeding. 3.4 LAWN RENOVATION A. Renovate existing
lawn. B. Renovate existing lawn damaged by Contractor's operations, such as storage of materials or equipment and movement of vehicles. 1. Reestablish lawn where settlement or washouts
occur or where minor regrading is required. 2. Provide new topsoil as required. C. Remove sod and vegetation from diseased or unsatisfactory lawn areas; do not bury in soil. D. Remove
topsoil containing foreign materials resulting from Contractor's operations, including oil drippings, fuel spills, stone, gravel, and other construction materials, and replace with new
topsoil. E. Mow, dethatch, core aerate, and rake existing lawn. F. Remove weeds before seeding. Where weeds are extensive, apply selective herbicides as required. Do not use pre-emergence
herbicides. G. Remove waste and foreign materials, including weeds, soil cores, grass, vegetation, and turf, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. H. Till stripped, bare,
and compacted areas thoroughly to a soil depth of 6 inches. I. Apply soil amendments and initial fertilizers required for establishing new lawns and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches
of existing soil. Provide new planting soil to fill low spots and meet finish grades. J. Apply seed and protect with hydromulch as required for new lawns. K. Water newly planted areas
and keep moist until new lawn is established. 3.5 LAWN MAINTENANCE A. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable lawn is established, but
for not less than following periods:
211118.00 329200-6 TURF AND GRASSES 1. Seeded Lawns: Maintenance remains responsibility of Contractor until substantial completion or a minimum of 60 days. B. Maintain and establish
lawn by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, cultivation, replanting, and other operations. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly
smooth lawn. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation. New lawn planting shall be protected and maintained until the end of lawn maintenance
period. 1. In areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations, add new mulch and anchor as required to prevent displacement. C. Watering: Provide and maintain
temporary piping, hoses, and lawn-watering equipment to convey water from sources and to keep lawn uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches. The owner will furnish the water used to maintain
the lawns as specified. 1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or mulch. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or
newly planted areas. 2. Water lawn with fine spray at a minimum rate of 1 inch per week unless rainfall precipitation is adequate. D. Mow lawn as soon as top growth is tall enough to
cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified height without cutting more than 1/3 of grass height. Remove no more than 1/3 of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay
mowing until grass blades bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and subsequent mowings to maintain the following grass height: Provide all labor
and equipment for maintenance and mowing 1. May – June Every 3-4 days 2. July – Early August Every 5 days 3. August – November Every 3-4 days E. Fertilization: Apply fertilizer after
initial mowing and when grass is dry. Continue fertilization through maintenance period in accordance with following rates and schedule: LAWN Date Rate (lb. N/1000 ft2) Fertilizer Ratio
(N-P-K) Examples to Purchase Nitrogen Source May 1-10th 0.75 1-0-1 25 0-25 20-0-20 >50% soluble Nitrogen June 1-10th 0.5 1-0-1 25-0-25 20-0-20 >50% soluble Nitrogen July 1-6th 0.75 1-0-0
33-0-0 35-5-4 <35% soluble Nitrogen September 5-10th 1 1-1-1 12-12-12 19-19-19 <35% soluble Nitrogen November 5-15th 1 1-0-0 33-0-0 Sulfur coated urea <35% soluble Nitrogen 3.6 SATISFACTORY
LAWNS A. Lawn installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Architect: 1. Satisfactory Seeded Lawn: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand of
grass has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. (0.92 sq. m) and bare spots not exceeding 5 by 5 inches (125
by 125 mm) and as acceptable to the Architect. B. Use specified materials to reestablish lawns that do not comply with requirements and continue maintenance until lawns are satisfactory.
211118.00 329200-7 TURF AND GRASSES 3.7 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. Promptly remove soil and debris, created by lawn work, from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site
to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas. B. Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain
fencing and barricades throughout initial maintenance period and remove after lawn is established. C. Remove nondegradable erosion-control measures after grass establishment period.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Architect will make observation of the Work of lawns to determine completion of Contract work at conclusion of maintenance period, upon written notice requesting
such observation submitted by Contractor at least 10 days prior to anticipated date. Architect will note condition of lawns and determine in writing whether maintenance shall continue.
END OF SECTION 329200